JP7380395B2 - Induction heating cooker, built-in complex heating cooker, and kitchen furniture - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an induction heating cooker, a built-in complex type heating cooker, and kitchen furniture in which the internal cooling structure of the main body case is devised.

There are three main types of induction cookers.
One of them is the so-called "built-in type", which is installed in kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter.
The second type is a "stationary type" that is placed in a predetermined position on kitchen furniture, like a gas stove (also referred to as a "gas combustion cooker").
The third type is a small and portable "tabletop type" that can be placed anywhere on a dining table or the like.

"Built-in type" induction heating cookers are installed inside kitchen furniture, so the external dimensions must be designed according to general kitchen furniture standards. The degree of freedom in design is much lower than that of

Generally, even an induction heating cooker with a single induction heating section is equipped with multiple induction heating coils (hereinafter referred to as "IH coils"), and each IH coil is connected to a dedicated inverter circuit. A method has been adopted in which various heating patterns are obtained by supplying a predetermined high-frequency power.

In addition, there are many induction heating cookers that are generally provided with induction heating sections at two positions on the left and right sides of a top plate on which an object to be heated, such as a metal pot, is placed. In such a device having two heating sections, two or more inverter circuits must be provided to simultaneously perform different types of cooking using the two heating sections.
In any case, it is required to minimize the installation area of the inverter circuit board by consolidating the two inverter circuits on one circuit board as much as possible. Various ideas are also required for the installation position and structure of the heat sink.

As an example of an improvement over the conventional method, there is a roaster (also called a "grill warehouse") inside the box-shaped main body case, so an inverter board that drives the IH coil is placed in a large three-dimensional space on the right side, avoiding the roaster. is stored. When IH coils are arranged in three places so that induction heating can be performed in three places, the inverter circuit boards are arranged in three stages with intervals in the vertical direction, and one inverter circuit board is placed between these inverter circuit boards. There is a configuration that distributes and supplies air from a cooling fan (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Another conventional improvement example includes an IH coil, a support that supports the IH coil, an inverter circuit board that drives the IH coil, a board support that holds the inverter circuit board, and a cooling system that cools the IH coil and the inverter board. Some devices are equipped with a cooling means (cooling fan). In this case, the IH coil and the inverter circuit board are arranged in parallel and are simultaneously cooled by the cooling fan. This is expected to have the effect of making the main body case (casing) of the induction heating cooker thinner than before (see, for example, Patent Document 2). However, in this case, the premise that the thickness can be reduced is that the heat radiator (heat sink) having the heat generating component does not overlap the IH coil above and below. In other words, if a heat radiator (heat sink) is placed directly under the IH coil, the structure of Patent Document 2 cannot be made thinner.

In addition, in order to create a flexible configuration in which the arrangement of IH coils with different outputs and the spacing between the IH coils can be changed according to the user's requests, we have installed multiple IH coils and one inverter to drive each IH coil. A stationary induction heating cooker is known that includes a circuit board and a cooling means for cooling the inverter circuit board (for example, see Patent Document 3).

Furthermore, an induction heating cooker is also known in which a heat sink is provided for cooling the switching elements constituting the inverter circuit, and a cooling fan is arranged to supply cooling air to the heat sink (for example, Patent Document 4). and 5).

Furthermore, the top plate (top plate) is provided with a top plate (top plate) and a box-shaped outer case with an open upper part, and the heating unit support plate on which four IH coils are placed is connected to the top plate (top plate) using screws. A built-in type heating cooker has been proposed in which the connection is made by fitting a claw and an engaging portion without having to do so (see Patent Document 6). However, details such as the number of inverter circuits, the inverter circuit board, the heat sink, and the two cooling fans are not disclosed.

Generally, in order to efficiently inductively heat a cooking pot using an IH coil, it is necessary to optimally lay out various electronic components of an inverter circuit. An optimal layout means that the distance between each electronic component is narrow, the degree of integration per unit volume is high, and it is not affected by the operation of various electronic components or the flow of high voltage current (through electric wires, etc.). This is said to be the arrangement of various electronic components in a circuit pattern (with high noise resistance). In addition, for example, in the case of a circuit that includes a power supply circuit, a signal circuit, etc. of an important microcomputer that controls the entire control, it is difficult to find an optimal layout.

Therefore, like the heating cooker described in Patent Document 1 mentioned above, three inverter circuit boards are integrated on one side, and generation of unnecessary noise can be suppressed, and the circuit configuration has good heating efficiency. It is realistically difficult to do so. In particular, in order to reduce the overall thickness, the inverter circuit board is placed directly under the IH coil in close proximity to each other, and the coil wires of the IH coil cross above the inverter circuit board, which may cause electromagnetic noise. Since some effects are expected, it is necessary to determine the actual circuit configuration and placement of electronic components through trial and error.

Incidentally, as the temperature of the various electronic components making up the inverter circuit increases with the induction heating operation, a heat sink on which the various electronic components are mounted is generally used to prevent abnormal temperatures.
However, in order to make the cooking device body case thinner, it is not possible to suppress the height of the heat sink and use a flat one or one that is simply miniaturized. This is because the cooling effect of the various electronic components mentioned above is determined by the volume of the heat sink and the amount of cooling air flowing through the heat sink, so if the volume of the heat sink is reduced, a large cooling fan with high pressure will be required. Alternatively, it is necessary to increase the number of cooling fans. For this reason, even if the product is thin, the main body case has a large planar area, making it impossible to install it on kitchen furniture. In other words, it is impossible to store the substrates stacked on the side of the grill compartment below the heating coil as described in Patent Document 1, and it is necessary to consider a special cooling air path structure. There is.

JP 2011-003372 (Page 2, Figure 2) Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-280744 (Page 4, Figure 5) Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-123104 (Page 1, Figure 8) JP2014-135119 (Page 1, Figure 3) JP2015-49960A (Page 6, Figure 7) JP 2014-142125 (Page 6, Figure 1)

The conventional induction heating cooker as described above does not effectively cool the heat sink to which the switching elements for the two inverter circuits are attached. Therefore, for example, in order to increase the air blowing capacity of the cooling fan, a large cooling fan is required, and in order to install the cooling fan, the size, especially the height dimension, of the main body case that makes up the outer shell of the heating cooker must be increased. There was an issue of not being able to obtain the desired results.
Therefore, for example, in the case of a stationary heating cooker, if the height of the heating cooker is large, if it is placed on a kitchen counter, etc., when placing, unloading, or moving objects to be heated such as a pot, The problem was that it was difficult to work with.

Furthermore, when built-in complex induction heating cookers are installed inside kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter, they often have a built-in heating chamber (also called a "grill chamber") equipped with an electric heater. Therefore, as the height of the heating cooker is increased, the height dimension of the grill chamber is restricted, resulting in a problem that the height of the grill chamber cannot be secured large. When the height of the grill compartment is restricted, the items that can be cooked are also restricted, and convenience is sacrificed.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and improves the internal cooling structure of the main body case, and provides an induction heating cooker, a built-in complex type heating cooker, and a kitchen with a thin main case. The purpose is to provide furniture.

The induction heating cooker of the first invention is
It has a flat case with a top plate on the top on which the object to be heated is placed.
Inside the case, there are two or more IH coils that heat the object to be heated, one inverter circuit board disposed below the coils, and an inverter circuit board disposed below the IH coils and above the inverter circuit board. a cover that partitions one air passage; a first cooling fan and a second cooling fan that introduce outside air for cooling from outside the case;
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan each have a rotor blade that rotates around a vertical axis, and each of the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan has rotary blades that rotate around a vertical axis, and the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan have rotary blades that rotate around a vertical axis, and the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan have rotary blades that rotate around a vertical axis, and the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan have rotary blades that rotate about vertical axes, and the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan have rotary blades that rotate about vertical axes, and the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan have rotary blades that rotate around a vertical axis, and the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan have rotary blades that rotate around a vertical axis. Facing the entrance of the wind route,
The first air path is formed laterally long inside the case,
This configuration is characterized in that another circuit board to be cooled is disposed downstream of the outlet of the first air path.

The induction heating cooker of the second invention is
It has a horizontally long and flat case with a top plate on the top on which the heated object is placed.
Inside the case, a plurality of IH coils arranged at a plurality of locations below the top plate, two inverter circuits that supply high frequency power to each of the IH coils, and the plurality of inverter circuits are mounted. an inverter circuit board, a cover installed between the IH coil and the inverter circuit board and defining a first air path between them, and two covers that introduce outside air for cooling from outside the case. Equipped with a cooling fan,
The inverter circuit board has a horizontally long rectangular planar shape,
The two cooling fans are a first cooling fan having rotary blades and a second cooling fan having rotary blades,
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are installed near the left side wall or the right side wall of the case, and draw outside air for cooling through a ventilation hole formed at the bottom of the case by rotation of the rotary blades. Each will be introduced,
The first air passage in which the first cooling air from the first cooling fan and the second cooling air from the second cooling fan are combined and introduced is arranged above the inverter circuit board in the left-right direction. It extends in a straight line,
This configuration is characterized in that the first cooling air and the second cooling air that have passed through the first air path are discharged to the outside from an exhaust window formed at the rear of the case.

The induction heating cooker of the third invention is
It has a horizontally long and flat case with a top plate on the top on which the heated object is placed.
Inside the case, there are three IH coils corresponding to the three locations on the top plate, first, second, and third inverter circuits that supply high-frequency power to each of these IH coils, and the A first inverter circuit board on which first and second inverter circuits are mounted, a second inverter circuit board on which the third inverter circuit is mounted, and above the IH coil and the first inverter circuit board. A cover that partitions a tunnel-shaped first air path, and two cooling fans that introduce outside air for cooling from the outside of the case,
The first inverter circuit board has a horizontally long rectangular planar shape,
The two cooling fans are a first cooling fan having rotary blades for centrifugal air blowing, and a second cooling fan having rotary blades for centrifugal air blowing,
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are installed near the left wall surface or right wall surface of the case, and each introduces outside air for cooling by rotation of the rotary blade,
The first air path, into which the first cooling air from the first cooling fan and the second cooling air from the second cooling fan are combined, is located above the first inverter circuit board. , extending in a straight line in the left and right direction,
The first cooling air and the second cooling air that have passed through the first air path are discharged to the outside from an exhaust window formed at the rear of the case,
The configuration is characterized in that the second inverter circuit board is cooled by cooling air blown from the first cooling fan and different from the first cooling air.

The built-in complex heating cooker of the fourth invention is
The top of the main case has a top plate that is exposed to the top of the kitchen furniture.
The main case includes a horizontally long and flat upper case that includes the top plate at the top, and a box-shaped lower case that is connected to the lower part of the upper case and has a heating chamber inside. have,
The lower case includes a door for freely opening and closing the front opening of the heating chamber, a microwave heating source for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber, and a door for cooling a heat radiation part of the microwave heating source. A lower air passage through which outside air is introduced,
Inside the upper case, there are a plurality of IH coils and two inverter circuits that supply high-frequency power to each of the IH coils, corresponding to the two induction heating parts specified on the top plate. an inverter circuit board on which each of the inverter circuits is mounted; a cover installed between the IH coil and the inverter circuit board and defining a first air path between them; Equipped with two cooling fans that introduce outside air for cooling from the outside,
The inverter circuit board has a horizontally long rectangular planar shape,
The two cooling fans are a first cooling fan having rotary blades for centrifugal air blowing, and a second cooling fan having rotary blades for centrifugal air blowing,
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are installed near the left side wall or the right side wall of the upper case, and the rotation of the rotor allows cooling air to flow through the ventilation hole formed at the bottom of the upper case. It introduces air respectively,
The first air passage in which the first cooling air from the first cooling fan and the second cooling air from the second cooling fan are combined and introduced is arranged above the inverter circuit board in the left-right direction. It extends in a straight line,
The first cooling air and the second cooling air that have passed through the first air path are discharged to the outside from an exhaust window formed at the rear of the upper case,
An outlet side end portion of the lower air passage is disposed in a third gap formed in the rear part of the upper case,
The configuration is characterized in that the cooling air after cooling the heat radiating section is guided to the third gap without passing through the space through which the first cooling air and the second cooling air flow. be.

The built-in complex heating cooker of the fifth invention is
Inside the main case, there is a heating chamber whose front opening is openable and closed by a door, a microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber, and a heating object placed above the top plate. an induction heating source;
The interior of the main body case is divided into two spaces, an upper space and a lower space,
The upper space includes an IH coil of the induction heating source, an inverter circuit board for the IH coil, an IH control unit that controls induction heating, a filter circuit board, and a power supply circuit that receives power from the filter circuit board. containing a substrate;
The lower space accommodates the microwave heating source, an oven heating source, and a control device that controls both the microwave heating source and the oven heating source,
The inverter circuit board, the microwave heating source, and the oven heating source are supplied with power from the power supply circuit board,
The upper space has an upper cooling fan that introduces outside air for cooling the inverter circuit board and the power supply circuit board,
The lower space has a lower cooling fan that introduces outside air for cooling the heat radiation part of the microwave heating source,
The inverter circuit board is installed horizontally at the bottom of the upper space, and a flat first air path is defined above the inverter circuit board,
The upper cooling fan includes a first cooling fan having a rotor blade that rotates around a vertical axis, and a rotor blade that is located adjacent to the first cooling fan and rotates around a vertical axis. a second cooling fan;
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are arranged adjacent to the inlet side of the first air path,
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are operated when any one of the induction heating source, the microwave heating source, and the oven heating source is operated for heating, and the lower cooling fan is configured to: This configuration is characterized in that it is operated when the microwave heating source is subjected to a heating operation.

The kitchen furniture of the sixth invention is
It has an installation port on the top surface, and the built-in complex heating cooker according to claim 43 or 49 is installed in the installation port,
A right side gap and a left side gap formed between the side wall surface of the main body case and a lower gap formed between the bottom wall surface of the main body case communicate with the outside through a front gap formed below the door. This configuration is characterized by the following.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a highly convenient built-in composite heating cooker with a thin outer case and kitchen furniture equipped with the same.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the entire kitchen furniture in which a built-in composite heating cooker according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention is installed. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the state of kitchen furniture before the cooking device shown in FIG. 1 is installed. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an intermediate stage of work for assembling the cooking device shown in FIG. 1 into kitchen furniture. FIG. 2 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture and the heating cooker in FIG. 1; FIG. 5 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged part of the front part of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 4; FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 4 when viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 2 is a plan view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 8 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 1 taken along the ZZ line of FIG. 7; FIG. 8 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 1 taken along the Z-Z line of FIG. 7 and showing the flow of cooling air. 9 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 1 taken along the line WW of FIG. 8. FIG. FIG. 8 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 1 taken along line YY of FIG. 7; 9 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 1 taken along the line VV of FIG. 8. FIG. 9 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 1 taken along the line XX of FIG. 8. FIG. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the main part on the right side when the heating cooker of FIG. 1 is installed on kitchen furniture. FIG. 2 is a simplified plan view for explaining an input operation section of the cooking device of FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a plan view of the front portion of the cooking device of FIG. 1 for explaining the arrangement of an input operation section and various display sections. FIG. 2 is an enlarged plan view showing a central operation section and an integrated display section of the cooking device of FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is an enlarged plan view of a right operation section and a right display section of the cooking device of FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is an enlarged plan view of a left operating section and a left display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the cooking device of FIG. 1. FIG. 21 is a simplified schematic diagram of the main configuration shown in FIG. 20. FIG. 21 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view taken along line SS in FIG. 20. FIG. FIG. 22 is an enlarged view of the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 21 and is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of cooling air and the cooling principle. FIG. 7 is a simplified perspective view illustrating the positional relationship between the cooling air from the outlet of the first cooling fan and the inverter circuit board 80. FIG. FIG. 1 is a block diagram 1 showing main control relationships of the cooking device of FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram 2 showing a main control device of the cooking device of FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing main cooling air passages of the cooking device of FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing details of an inverter circuit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a list showing the correspondence between main control menus and display areas in the integrated display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart 1 for explaining a control operation of the cooking device of FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart 2 for explaining the control operation of the cooking device of FIG. 1. FIG. 3 is a flowchart 3 for explaining the control operation of the cooking device of FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart 4 for explaining the control operation of the cooking device of FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 for explaining the control operation of the cooking device of FIG. 1 in chronological order. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 for explaining the control operation of the cooking device of FIG. 1 in chronological order. 2 is a list showing the correspondence between the cooling fan of the cooking device of FIG. 1 and the type of cooking. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing main parts to be cooled by a cooling fan of the upper unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a control operation when frying (automatically), which is a type of induction heating cooking, is performed in the heating cooker of FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 illustrating the operation of the left operating section and left display section of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 of the operation of the left operation section and the left display section of the heating cooker of FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display section of the cooking device of FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display section of the cooking device of FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display operation of the integrated display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram 5 showing the display operation of the integrated display section of the cooking device of FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is an enlarged plan view showing a central operation section and an integrated display section of the cooking device of FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a simplified plan view of a built-in composite heating cooker according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention. FIG. 48 is a plan view showing the heating cooker shown in FIG. 47 with the top plate removed. 49 is a plan view showing a state in which the IH coil, coil base, etc. are further removed from the cooking device shown in FIG. 48. FIG. FIG. 49 is a plan view of the heating cooker showing a state in which the cover is further removed from the state shown in FIG. 48. 51 is a plan view showing the flow of cooling air in the state of FIG. 50. FIG. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the cooking device showing the power cord and main power wiring in the state shown in FIG. 50; The heating cooker shown in FIG. 47 is an enlarged longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of the portion supported by kitchen furniture. It is a principal part simplified perspective view of the lower unit of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 48 is an enlarged plan view of essential parts of the upper unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 47. FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing main control relationships of the cooking device of FIG. 47. FIG. 48 is a circuit diagram showing details of the inverter circuit of the cooking device of FIG. 47. FIG. FIG. 7 is a plan view showing a modification of the second embodiment of the present invention, with the top plate, IH coil, etc. removed. FIG. 3 is a simplified perspective view of a built-in composite heating cooker according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention. FIG. 59 is a perspective view showing the built-in composite heating cooker shown in FIG. 58 with the door open. FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the cooking device of FIG. 58 with the top plate removed. FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 58 with the top plate and IH coil removed. 63 is a perspective view of the upper unit with the cover further removed from the state shown in FIG. 62. FIG. 64 is a reference perspective view showing the flow of cooling air in the state of FIG. 63. FIG. 60 is a bottom (bottom) view of the upper unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 59. FIG. 53 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the main part taken along the line XX in FIG. 52. FIG. FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged partial cross section of a first cooling fan or a second cooling fan in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 59; 60 is a block diagram illustrating the overall control function of the cooking device shown in FIG. 59. FIG. It is a block diagram explaining the whole control function of the built-in type compound heating cooker concerning Embodiment 4 of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of each cooling fan in the built-in complex heating cooker according to Embodiment 5 of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a simplified plan view of a built-in complex heating cooker for disclosing Embodiment 6 of the present invention. It is a principal part simplified perspective view of the lower unit of the heating cooker shown in FIG. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing main cooling air passages of the cooking device of FIG. 71; 72 is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 71. FIG. 72 is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in FIG. 71. FIG. 7 is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the heating cooker to disclose Embodiment 7 of the present invention. 12 is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the heating cooker to disclose a modification of the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a list showing the correspondence between the cooling fan of the heating cooker and the type of heating cooking, for disclosing Embodiment 8 of the present invention. 79 is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 78. FIG. 79 is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 78. FIG. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a built-in composite heating cooker for disclosing a ninth embodiment of the present invention. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main parts of the cooking device of FIG. 81 viewed from another direction. FIG. It is a top view of a heating cooker for disclosing Embodiment 10 of the present invention. FIG. 84 is a plan view, a front view, a right side view, and a rear view of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 83 with both the top plate and the IH coil removed. FIG. 85 is a plan view of the state shown in FIG. 84 with the cover further removed. 84 is a bottom (bottom) view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 83. FIG. 84 is a vertical cross-sectional view taken along the line XX of the cooking device shown in FIG. 83. FIG. 84 is a vertical cross-sectional view taken along the line YY of the cooking device shown in FIG. 83. FIG. 84 is a vertical sectional view taken along the Z-Z line of the cooking device shown in FIG. 83. FIG. 84 is a plan view of the heating cooker, showing a modification of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 83. FIG. FIG. 91 is a plan view, a front view, a right side view, and a rear view of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 90 with both the top plate and the IH coil removed. FIG. 7 is a partially vertical cross-sectional explanatory view showing a built-in composite heating cooker according to Embodiment 11 of the present invention. FIG. 93 is a partial vertical cross-sectional explanatory view of a heating cooker showing a modification of FIG. 92;

Embodiment 1.
1 to 46 show a built-in complex type (induction) heating cooker according to the first embodiment. In the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, it will simply be referred to as a "cooking device."
In each figure, the symbol RT indicates the right direction of the cooking device 1, and LE indicates the left direction. Further, FT indicates the front, and BK indicates the rear.

In this first embodiment, the "induction heating cooker" refers to one having a heating section based on the principle of induction heating. When there are multiple heating units, there may be a heating source using a method different from the induction heating method, for example, a radiant electric heat source.

In this Embodiment 1, the "combined heating cooker" is equipped with an "induction heating source" which has a different heating principle in addition to the microwave heating source, and these two types of heating sources are used to produce one heating. This refers to food that can be heated indoors. Note that a heating source other than the induction heating source may be added. For example, a system in which one heating chamber is heated by a radiant electric heat source such as a sheathed heater or a mica heater, and the inside of that heating chamber is heated by microwaves is a type of "compound heating cooker." .

In this first embodiment, the "heating means (referred to as "oven heating source" in the following explanation)" of the heating chamber refers to a heating source that heats the wall surface of the heating chamber from the outside, and a heating source installed in the internal space of the heating chamber. Any heating source may be used.
Further, any form may be used in which a heat generating member that reaches a high temperature using an induction heating method is disposed, and the heat generating member heats the wall surface of the heating chamber from the outside or heats the air within the heating chamber.

For example, in a Japanese patent document, JP 2017-74305A discloses that a cooking plate placed in a heating chamber (grill chamber) on which a food to be cooked is placed is connected to a second plate that heats the food from below. A cooking device has been proposed that includes a heating body (induction heating coil) and a third heating body (induction heating coil) that heats the food from the side.

Furthermore, in JP-A-2016-85996, an electrical insulator is provided below the heating chamber, an induction heating coil (hereinafter referred to as "IH coil") is provided in the space below the electrical insulator, and the IH heat A configuration has been proposed in which a cooking plate placed on a coil is heated by induction. The cooking plate is made of a material that can be heated by induction, such as iron, stainless steel, a carbon material with a carbon content of 90% or more, or a ceramic material containing Si (silicon) or FeSi (ferrosilicon) as a conductive material. It is being

In addition, as a typical example in which a heat generating member that becomes high temperature is arranged using an induction heating method, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-071695 discloses that a high frequency current is supplied to an IH coil to generate a high frequency magnetic flux in the IH coil. By interlinking high-frequency magnetic flux with the heater installed in the heating chamber, an induced current flows through the heater, and the food inside the heating chamber can be cooked using the Joule heat generated by the heater's own electrical resistance. Disclosed.

Furthermore, Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2013-247048 discloses that an electrically closed-circuit heater is arranged inside the heating chamber, and the high-frequency magnetic flux generated from the IH coil disposed outside the heating chamber is chained to this heater. It has been proposed to heat the heater to a high temperature and radiate heat into the heating chamber. Note that the heater here forms an electrically closed circuit, and is made by bending a round bar or round pipe made of stainless steel or high nickel alloy into a predetermined shape, and joining both ends together by welding, brazing, etc. It is formed into an endless shape.

As a typical example of the "IH coil" mentioned in Embodiment 1, about 30 thin copper wires or aluminum wires of about 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm are bundled together, and the bundle is twisted into a spiral shape. There is a structure that is wound around (for example, a Japanese patent document, JP-A-2012-79580). Alternatively, there is also one made by winding around 1000 to 1500 wires of about 0.05 mm.

Further, another patent document, JP-A No. 2018-32551, proposes an induction heating cooker that uses a ring-shaped conductor made of a flat plate-shaped conductive material as an IH coil.
Any of these forms corresponds to an "IH coil" which is the main part of the induction heating source.

In Embodiment 1, "cooperative cooking" refers to two types of heating for one cooking object (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) in different heating locations and in which heating operation conditions can be set independently. Refers to cooking that uses sources.

The above-mentioned "cooperative cooking" corresponds to the case where multiple heating sources are used at different times. For example, in the process of completing one cooking process, after completing microwave heating and preheating, the food to be cooked is moved to another location, and the cooking process is completed by heating it with the IH coil 17L (described later) at the moved location. This is a type of "cooperative cooking" referred to here.

Cooperative cooking is proposed in the form of a built-in heating cooker in Japanese Patent No. 5833699 and Japanese Patent No. 5500944.

In FIGS. 1 to 46, a cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment is, for example, a cooking device built into kitchen furniture (including furniture called a system kitchen) 2 equipped with a sink. 2A is an installation opening formed in the kitchen furniture 2. The heating cooker 1 is supplied with AC power at a voltage of 200 V and a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz from a commercial power source 99 as described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 15, the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment has two induction heating sections on the left and right sides.
In FIG. 15, CL1 is a center line passing through the left and right center points of the upper unit 100 in the front-rear direction, and AL is the range where the top plate 15 is exposed on the upper surface of the upper unit 100.

17HR is a right heating section provided on the right side of the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed directly above this section.
17HL is a left heating section provided in a range to the left of the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed directly above this. In this way, this cooking device 1 is a cooking device in which two “heating ports” (two ports) are provided on the top surface of the top plate 15.

In addition, another induction heating part may be provided between the right heating part 17HR and the left heating part 17HL so as to straddle the left-right center line CL1, and a three-burner cooking device may be provided. Alternatively, either one of the IH coils 17L and 17R may be replaced with a radiant electric heat source such as a radiant heater or an infrared heater.
In the following description, 17H is used as a reference numeral when referring to an "induction heating section."

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 15, circular position marks 17LS and 17RS are provided to indicate a desirable position to place a heated object N (not shown) such as a metal pot or plate (grilling board). , are provided on the upper surface of the top plate 15.

By looking at the circular position marks 17LS and 17RS, the user of the heating cooker 1 can recognize that there are two induction heating parts 17H on the left and right. Note that the user can also recognize that there are two induction heating sections on the left and right by the voice guide of the voice synthesizer 95, which will be described later.

The position marks 17LS and 17RS are formed by printing. Directly below the position marks 17LS and 17RS, IH coils (induction heating coils) 17L and 17R, which will be described later, are installed. Note that the position marks 17LS and 17RS do not need to be circular; for example, only the center point of the desired position where the object to be heated N is placed may be indicated by a figure, a symbol such as "+", or a letter. .

The position marks 17LS and 17RS are circular marks that indicate the approximate positions where induction heating can be performed by the IH coils 17L and 17R, so they are drawn with a diameter slightly larger than the maximum outer diameter of the IH coils 17L and 17R. .

In this first embodiment, when the IH coils 17L and 17R are collectively referred to as an IH coil, the reference numeral 17 is used. Therefore, when the "IH coil" 17 is referred to, it may refer to either the left IH coil 17L or the right IH coil 17R.

In this first embodiment, the "induction heating source" 9 refers to a configuration including the IH coil 17 and inverter circuits 81R and 81L, which will be described later.

At least one IH coil 17 is arranged in one induction heating section, for example, the right heating section 17HR. It may also be one in which a plurality of IH coils are arranged. For example, an IH coil (inner coil) with a circular or elliptical planar shape and an IH coil (outer coil) having the same center point as the IH coil are provided, and these two IH coils are driven by separate inverter circuits. It can also be a form.

Alternatively, two or more IH coils having a semicircular or triangular planar shape may be provided close to each other as one induction heating section, and these IH coils may be driven by separate inverter circuits. .

The present invention is applicable to such a cooking device equipped with two or more inverter circuits. That is, the present invention can also be applied to a single-burner induction heating cooker in which two IH coils are arranged in one place.

As shown in FIG. 4, the cooking device 1 is supported by being placed on the upper surface 2P of the mouth edge of the installation port 2A. In the first embodiment, the kitchen furniture 2 is equipped with a water tank 2C that can temporarily store water discharged from a water supply port 2D, as shown in FIG. 2B is a front opening formed at a predetermined position of the kitchen furniture 2. This front opening 2B is for exposing the front component (door 114 and front cover 112, which will be described later) to the front when the heating cooker 1 is installed.

If the sizes of the front opening 2B and the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 are standard, they are almost always pre-formed with standard dimensions because the industry promotes standardization. be. This will be explained in detail later.

A typical method for assembling the cooking device 1 into the kitchen furniture 2 is as shown in FIG. This FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing an intermediate stage of the work of assembling into the kitchen furniture 2.
As shown in FIG. 3, put the cooking device 1 into the installation opening 2A while tilting the cooking device 1 so that the front FT side (front side) is facing down, and then When the BK side is lowered as shown by the solid arrow BD, the cooking device 1 is placed on the periphery of the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2.

After that, tighten the screws and move (rotate) a fixing metal fitting (not shown) installed at the rear peripheral edge of the lower unit 100, which will be described later, so that the fixing metal fitting is strongly pressed against the kitchen furniture 2. The installation is completed. Note that since such an installation method has already been widely adopted, a detailed explanation of the structure will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main body 110 of the heating cooker 1 is made up of an upper unit 100 and a lower unit 200 that are stacked vertically and are combined and integrated. Therefore, in the installation work shown in FIG. 3, only the upper unit 100 is fixed (directly) to the kitchen furniture 2 with the screws. By removing the fixing fittings (not shown), the entire heating cooker 1 can be taken out from the kitchen furniture 2. Thereby, inspection and repair can be performed outside the kitchen furniture 2 from now on. Note that when only the upper unit 100 is referred to as the "main body", the reference numeral 10 is attached to distinguish it.

In the first embodiment, the "main body case" HC is a general term for the upper case 16 that constitutes the outer shell of the upper unit 100 and the lower case 101 that constitutes the outer shell of the lower unit 200. Note that the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be configured as an integrated case (housing).

The installation opening 2A formed in the kitchen furniture 2 has a rectangular planar shape as shown in FIG. However, the four corners are arcuate.
The width dimension W1 of the installation port 2A is 560 mm to 564 mm. Further, the dimension D1 in the front-rear direction is set to 460 mm to 464 mm.

In FIGS. 1 and 2, 3 and 4 are surface materials that constitute the surface of the kitchen furniture 2. 5 and 6 are surface materials adjacent to both left and right sides of the cooking device 1 when the cooking device 1 is incorporated into the kitchen furniture 2.
The front surfaces of these surface materials 3 to 6 are substantially flush with the front surface of the cooking device 1 when the cooking device 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2. In other words, when the heating cooker 1 is incorporated, the surface materials 3 to 6 and the heating cooker 1 can present to the user a design feeling as if they were on a unified plane.

In FIG. 3, 8 is a wall that vertically partitions the inside of the kitchen furniture 2 into a plurality of rooms, and the lower part of this wall is often used as a storage for kitchen utensils, food, etc., for example. Note that the illustration of the wall 8 is omitted in FIG. 2 . Alternatively, the wall 8 may be removably installed inside the kitchen furniture 2.

With the configuration described above, when the heating cooker 1 is incorporated into the kitchen furniture 2, the entire front surface of the kitchen furniture 2 presents approximately one plane. When a user looks at the kitchen furniture 2, it is designed so that the entire front (front) can be recognized as having a clean and unified design.

The kitchen furniture 2 and the heating cooker 1 do not have to be designed by the same manufacturer; the kitchen furniture may be manufactured and sold by a kitchen furniture or housing equipment manufacturer, while the heating cooker 1 may be manufactured by a home appliance manufacturer. Often sold.

In FIGS. 1 and 2, 7 is a frame line printed on the front surface of the surface materials 3 to 5, and does not form physical irregularities on the front surface of the surface materials 3 to 5. Note that a thin decorative board made of shiny metal, tape, or the like may be pasted to indicate the presence of the frame line 7 and give a sense of luxury.

The four types of surface materials 3 to 6 may be the same. Further, these surface materials 3 to 6 do not have to be movable back and forth like a door or a drawer. For example, it may always exist in a fixed state on the surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and never move.

If the four types of surface materials 3 to 6 have the same front color and surface form (pattern, presence or absence of gloss, unevenness, etc.), the unified design of the kitchen furniture 2 will be enhanced. For example, if the entire front surface of the surface material 4 is unified with a single color or wood grain design, the front surface of the surface material 3 may also be unified with the same single color or wood grain design.

Next, FIGS. 4 and 5 will be explained. FIG. 4 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture 2 and the heating cooker 1 in FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged part of the front part of the kitchen furniture 2 shown in FIG. 4. As shown in FIG.

Kitchen furniture 2, etc. is defined by the national standard ("JIS" A0017) in Japan. In addition, the ``Long-term Use Housing Materials Standardization Promotion Council'' (abbreviation: Nagasumi-kyo) is promoting the standardization (common) of housing parts and materials.

According to the "Long-term Usage Materials Standards" for IH cooking heaters (built-in) established by the Nagasumi Association, the countertop (kitchen furniture 2) to which the IH cooking heater is attached must meet the following conditions: stipulated.
(1) The installation opening 2A has a width W1 of 560 mm to 564 mm. Also, the dimension D1 in the front-rear direction shall be 460 mm to 464 mm.
(2) The height dimension C1 of the front descending portion 2F shall be 40 mm or less.
(3) The depth (front-back direction) dimension D3 of the front descending portion 2F is 45 mm or less.
(4) The ceiling depth (front-to-back direction) dimension D2 of the front descending portion 2F shall be 58 mm to 70 mm.

Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned "Long-Term Usage Component Standards", the external dimensions of a built-in IH cooking heater (induction heating cooker) are also specified as follows.
(1) The height dimension H2 from the bottom edge of the top plate to the bottom edge of the front panel must be 215 mm to 223 mm.

The heating cooker 1 of the present invention is designed to satisfy the various constraints as described above.
In FIG. 4, A1 is the longitudinal dimension of the top plate 15, which will be described later, and is 510 mm. A2 is the maximum dimension in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the front cover 112 that covers the front surface of the main body 110 to the rearmost end of the main body 110, and is 498 mm. A3 is the dimension in the front-rear direction from the inclined portion 111 formed at the rear of the main body 110 to the front surface of the front cover 112, and is 451 mm.

The front cover 112 is integrally formed of plastic or metal. Further, this front cover 112 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape, and protruding mounting legs 112P are formed at several locations on the back side to which it is attached (see FIG. 14). Insert this mounting leg 112P into a plurality of vertically long fitting holes (not shown) formed in the front plate 102 of the lower case 101, and slide it slightly downward until the mounting leg 112P is engaged with the fitting hole. I try to do that. In this state, the front cover 112 is fixed to the lower case 101 with a fixture (not shown). This fixation prevents the front cover 112 from moving upward, so that it remains attached to the lower case 101.

In FIG. 4, 113 is a heating chamber, which will be described later, and is formed inside the lower unit 200. An opening 113A (see FIG. 11) is formed in the front surface of the heating chamber 113 through which cooking utensils such as frying pans or objects to be cooked can be taken in and out. The opening 113A is covered by a door 114 so as to be openable and closable.

The front surface of the door 114 and the front surface of the front cover 112 are designed to be flush with each other. The door 114 has two hinges 176 (see FIG. 9) and two arms 116 ( (not shown) is rotatably supported with respect to the main body 110. Therefore, the door 114 functions as a "front-opening" door that opens forward using the hinge 176 at its lower end as a fulcrum (rotation center).

The front cover 112 is attached to the front of the cooking device 1 by a specialist such as a store or an installation company after the cooking device 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2. Note that the door 114 is attached to the heating cooker 1 when it is shipped from the factory, so that it cannot be removed later by anyone other than a professional, that is, by a user at each home. This is to reliably prevent microwave leakage from inside the heating chamber 113.

In FIG. 4, H1 is the maximum height dimension of the cooking device 1. That is, the dimension from the top surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom surface of the lower unit 200 is 227 mm.

In FIG. 4, H2 is the height dimension from the lower end of top plate 15 to the lower end of front cover 112, and is 215 mm to 223 mm. H3 is the height dimension from the upper end to the lower end of the front cover 112 or the door 114, and is set to 171 mm. H4 is the height dimension of the top plate 15, which is 11 mm. In addition, by establishing such a dimensional relationship, when the heating cooker 1 is installed, a front gap 302, which will be described later, is secured below the lower surface of the door 114 and the lower surface of the front cover 112, respectively. ing.

Next, FIG. 6 will be explained. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. In FIG. 6, 2G is a stepped portion formed at both left and right corners of the front opening 2B. This stepped portion is a portion that a front cover 112 of a lower unit 200, which will be described later, approaches and faces. W2 is the maximum width dimension of the installation space formed right below the installation opening 2A. This maximum width dimension W2 is approximately 560 mm.

Next, the configuration of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 7 to 20.
FIG. 7 is a plan view of the heating cooker 1. FIG. 8 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 taken along the ZZ line in FIG. FIG. 9 is a longitudinal sectional view of the cooking device 1 taken along the ZZ line in FIG. 7, showing the flow of cooling air.

(Upper unit 100)
In this first embodiment, the upper unit 100 alone functions as the cooking device 1. Therefore, commercial (AC) power 99 is supplied only to upper unit 100. However, a power cord 106 (not shown) for direct connection to the commercial power source 99 via a plug 106A (not shown) is drawn out from the lower unit 200 to the outside of the cooking device 1. Note that when the upper unit 100 is used alone, complex cooking is not possible because there is no heating chamber 113. Also, cooperative cooking is not possible.

The upper unit 100 includes a box-shaped upper case (upper casing) 16 constituting the outer shell of the main body 10, and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing plate (support frame) 22 fixed to the upper part of the upper case (Fig. 8) and a top plate 15 made of heat-resistant tempered glass or crystallized glass and attached to the top surface of the reinforcing plate 22 (so as to cover substantially the entire surface except the rear part). In other words, the main body 10 of the upper unit 100 includes an upper case 16 and a top plate 15, each serving as an outer shell.

The upper case 16 is formed by pressing a thin metal plate such as a galvanized steel plate. Alternatively, it is formed into a box shape by joining multiple thin metal plates with spot welding, screws, etc.
In the first embodiment, the upper case 16 is constructed by vertically bending the peripheral portion of one thin metal plate to form a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B, a front vertical wall 16F, (left and right), as will be described later. ) side vertical walls 16L, 16R are each integrally formed. This bottom wall 16S also serves as a "partition wall", which is one of the characteristic configurations, as will be explained later.

The upper case 16 may be formed in other forms. For example, one metal flat plate is pressed to form one "body" having three surfaces: a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B, and a front vertical wall 16F. On the other hand, two side vertical walls 16L and 16R are separately formed. Then, these two side vertical walls 16L and 16R are attached to the ends of the above-mentioned "body" using screws, spot welding, etc., and finally form a box-like shape with the entire upper surface open.

The top plate 15 is formed into a flat plate having a substantially uniform overall thickness, and its entire lower surface is covered with a painted surface that does not transmit visible light. Therefore, from above the top plate 15, functional components below it, such as the IH coil 17, cannot be seen.

The right IH coil 17R has a donut-like planar shape. The maximum thermal power of this IH coil 17R is 3200W. The maximum external dimension (diameter) is 168 mm.

Further, the IH coil 17L on the left side similarly has a donut-like shape. The maximum thermal power of this IH coil 17L is 3200W. The maximum external dimension (diameter) is 168 mm. Note that the diameter may be expanded to about 180 mm so that it can accommodate objects to be heated such as large pots and frying pans.

Further, the maximum external dimension (diameter) of the right IH coil 17R may be, for example, about 150 mm. In that case, the maximum thermal power of the right IH coil 17R should be 2800W or 3000W. Note that FIGS. 7, 15, and 21 depict the case where the maximum external dimension of the right IH coil 17R is smaller than the left IH coil 17L.

In FIG. 8, 18 is a horizontally long opening formed in the rear part of the upper case 16, and 19 is an exhaust cover installed above this opening, and has shutters or a number of through holes to provide ventilation. is formed. 20 is an exhaust port formed between the exhaust cover 19 and the opening 18.

8 and 10, 22 is a metal reinforcing plate fixed to the rear upper end of the upper case 16, as described above. This reinforcing plate 22 has a length equivalent to the width of the rear edge of the upper case 16. 21 is a metal decorative frame fixed to the upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22. This decorative frame projects to the rear of the upper case 16 and is longer than the width of the upper case 16. In other words, when viewed from above, the decorative frame 21 appears to surround the rear and left and right sides of the exhaust cover 19 (see FIG. 7).

7, 8, and 10, reference numeral 25 denotes a metal decorative frame, which is installed to protect the left and right end surfaces and the front end surface of the top plate 15 from external impact, as shown in FIG. ing.
Reference numeral 26 denotes an annular cushioning material made of a material with high elasticity, such as silicone rubber, and is attached to the entire circumference of the lower surfaces of the decorative frames 21 and 25. Thereby, the upper unit 100 is placed on the kitchen furniture 2 via the cushion material 26. Note that the top plate 15 may have a design in which three parts (sides) of the left and right end faces and the front end face or four parts (four peripheral sides) including the rear end face are surrounded by one decorative frame 25.

In FIGS. 7 and 15, 30 is an integrated display section, which is installed in the front part of the top plate 15 and below the left and right center. 31L is a left display section, and 31R is a right display section. These left and right display sections 31L and 31R are also installed on the left side of the front part of the top plate 15 and below the right side.

The integrated display section 30 and the left and right display sections 31L and 31R are mainly composed of liquid crystal display screens. It is installed on an operation board 41. Alternatively, it is attached to the lower surface of the holder 50 connected to the operation board 41 (see FIG. 8).

Corresponding to the position directly above the integrated display section 30 and the left and right display sections 31L and 31R, the lower surface of the top plate 15 is not provided with a painted surface that blocks visible light as described above. Therefore, the display contents of the integrated display section 30 and the left and right display sections 31L and 31R can be viewed from above the top plate 15.

The integrated display section 30 displays common information and alarms of the cooking device 1. For example, the selection results of the three types of heat sources of this heating cooker 1, and caution information and warning information indicating the operating states of these heat sources are displayed. That is, since the integrated display section 30 may display information related to three heating sources: the induction heating source 17, an oven heat source 188, which will be described later, and a microwave heat source 189, the integrated display section 30 It is called.

The left display section 31L displays information regarding the operation of the left IH coil 17L. For example, as described below, when setting timer cooking, it can be set in units of one minute, and the set time can be displayed. It also displays the elapsed time since the heating operation started and the "remaining time" until the timer setting time ends. Furthermore, when preheating cooking is selected, the automatically set temperature (default temperature), current temperature, etc. are displayed. Note that the "remaining time" is displayed as 9 minutes and 59 seconds when the time becomes less than 10 minutes, and the remaining time is displayed in units of 1 second.

Similarly, the right display section 31R displays information regarding the operation of the right IH coil 17R. This right side display section 31R basically displays various information such as the timer setting time of the right side IH coil 17R, preheating temperature, and elapsed time, similarly to the left side display section 31L.

In FIG. 15, 40 is an input operation section. The input operation section 40 is disposed laterally long along the front edge of the top plate 15 at the rear BK of the frontmost portion of the decorative frame 25.
The operation board 41 (see FIG. 8) is horizontally long and installed in a strip shape. The input operation section 40 is arranged on the upper surface of this operation board 41.

Various electronic components are mounted on the operation board 41. The operation board 41 is made of a plastic material with high electrical insulation properties. On the rear side of the operation board 41 of the upper unit 100, there is a central operation board 32 supported by a holder 50. An integrated control device MC, which will be described later, is mounted on the back side of the central operation board 32.

Below the operation board 41, flat plate-shaped auxiliary support plates (not shown) are installed so as to overlap vertically so as to face the operation board 41 with a gap therebetween. In other words, it has a two-layer (two-layer) structure that faces each other with a gap between them, making it possible to mount as many electrical components and circuits as possible.

In FIGS. 8 and 9, the holder 50 is made of an insulating material, such as a plastic material. The holder 50 has a size corresponding to the entire area of the input operation section 40, the integrated display section 30, the right display section 31R, and the left display section 31L, and is provided in a long strip shape in the left-right direction. The central operation board 32 is attached to the bottom surface of this holder 50 so as to overlap with each other with a slight gap between them.

F2 is a second air path through which a portion of cooling air from a second cooling fan 61 (described later) flows, and is defined by a space between a cover 70 (described later) and a front vertical wall 16F in front of the upper case 16. (See FIGS. 8 and 20).

The second air passage F2 is formed by a horizontally long gutter-like member (referred to as a "groove member" or a "magnetic shield cover" when formed of a non-magnetic material) 340 whose vertical cross-sectional view has an "inverted U-shape". (not shown). In that case, the upper opening of the groove member 340 is not provided with a lid, leaving the upper open groove as it is.
Alternatively, the upper opening of the groove member 340 may be closed with a lid to form a tunnel-like passage using the groove member 340.

In any case, the inside of the groove member 340 can be used as a passage for cooling air. Therefore, power supply wiring may be passed inside this groove member 340. For example, a high-voltage electric wire (not shown) 350 may be passed through which high-frequency power is supplied to the IH coil 17L from an inverter circuit 82L, which will be described later. Since cold air passes around the high-voltage electric wire 350, an effect of suppressing temperature rise can also be expected. Note that the "groove member" or "magnetic shield cover" 340 is preferably formed of a non-magnetic metal material such as aluminum.

In FIG. 8, 16B is the rear vertical wall of the upper case 16. A lower case 101 and an upper case 16, which will be described later, are integrated at multiple locations with screws 51, respectively.

As is clear from FIG. 8, the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the upper end of the lower case 101 closely face each other within a range of about 20 mm to 30 mm (in the vertical direction), and the facing portion It is tightened and fixed by the screw 51. In addition to this screw 51, there is also a screw 51F (not shown) that fixes the opposing parts of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, and the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are connected at multiple points. There is.

16BX is a horizontal bent portion formed by further bending the upper end of the rear vertical wall 16B toward the rear BK. This horizontal bent portion 16BX and a flange 16A (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, are located on the same horizontal line. Therefore, when the kitchen furniture 2 supports the heavy objects of both the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, the flange 16A and the horizontal bent portion 16BX work together as a part that firmly supports such loads. It may work. In other words, a structure is realized in which the flange 16A, whose mechanical strength is increased by serially bending a metal plate, and the horizontal bent portion 16BX support the upper case 16 itself, and as a result, also reliably support the lower case 101. has been done. In addition, in this Embodiment 1, the heating cooker 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2 so that the horizontal bending part 16BX does not directly contact or abut the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2, as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 8, 104 is a cavity with a large depth and a large planar area. This cavity 104 is a space from the lower surface of the bottom wall (bottom surface) 16S of the upper case 16 to the upper surface of the rear bottom plate 101U of the lower unit 200, which will be described later. BH indicates the depth (vertical direction) dimension of the cavity 104.

As is clear from the structure shown in FIG. 8, the first embodiment includes a flat upper case 16 (constituting the outer shell of the main body 10) whose upper opening is closed by the top plate 15. ing. When this upper case 16 is placed on a lower case 101 which will be described later, the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 also serves as the ceiling surface of the lower case 101.

As explained in FIG. 8, the cavity 104 is the space in which the facing distance between the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 is the largest.
In the cavity 104, a waveguide 123 that constitutes a part of a microwave heating device 120, which will be described later, is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113.
Furthermore, behind the waveguide 123, a housing case C154 for housing the power supply circuit board 127, on which circuit components for supplying power to the microwave heating control section 130 are mounted, is disposed long in the left-right direction.

The microwave heating control section 130 is mainly composed of a microcomputer, and is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 inside the case C154. In other words, the power supply circuit board 127 housed inside the case C also serves as a control board on which the microwave heating control section 130 is mounted. Although such a control board and power supply circuit board 127 may be provided separately, in this first embodiment, they are integrated in order to minimize the installation space.

In FIG. 8, 101T is a front horizontal wall made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101. The front horizontal wall 101T is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F (see FIG. 11) of the lower case 101 backward.

Reference numeral 198 denotes a connecting support fitting formed from a metal plate, and includes a horizontal portion 198H and a vertical portion 198V. The horizontal portion 198H is fixed to the front horizontal wall 101T of the lower case 101.

One or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are box-shaped formed of thin metal plates, and the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are connected by fastening with the screws 51 and 51F (not shown). It is a single strong box-shaped structure.

In this first embodiment, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are tightly fitted together as described below.
That is, the vertical and horizontal dimensions (inner maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions) of the upper opening of the lower case 101 are the maximum width dimension D5 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 20) and the maximum width dimension W4 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 20) of the upper case 16. They have the same dimensions in design. Alternatively, it is larger (at most) by less than 0.2 mm than the maximum dimension D5 in the front-rear direction and the maximum dimension W4 in the left-right direction of the upper opening of the lower case 101.
Therefore, a little force is applied outward to the upper ends of the left and right vertical walls 101L, 101R and the rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) 101B, and the upper opening of the lower case 101 widens a little, so the upper case 16 is tightly placed inside. It can be fitted (tightly) into the

The term "fitting" used in this first embodiment does not necessarily refer to a state in which they fit tightly together as in the first embodiment described above. The outer dimension of the upper case 16 to be inserted inside may differ by about 1 mm at most from the inner dimension (in the front-rear and left-right directions) of the lower case 101 which becomes the outer part, and the whole case is in close contact with each other. It doesn't have to be the state. Furthermore, even if there is such a slight dimensional difference, the main body case HC can be made strong by fixing it with the screws 51 or the like.

Since the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are one strong box-shaped structure, the support structure for the door 114, which will be described later, can be made strong, which is useful for preventing microwave leakage in the door 114 portion.

In particular, since the top plate 15 of the upper unit 100 is supported by the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and receives the entire load of the lower unit 200, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 should have a structure that does not distort or deform as a whole. is important. In addition, since the cushion 26 is attached to the entire circumference of the lower surfaces of the decorative frames 21 and 25, it is the cushion material 26 that actually comes into contact with the upper surface of the lower part 2 of the kitchen.

In FIG. 8, 80 is an inverter circuit board, which is installed in the center of the upper case 16. The inverter circuit board 80 has a rectangular planar shape that is elongated in the left-right direction. The length W16 of the inverter circuit board 80 is 316 mm, and the length (width) W7 in the front-rear direction is 195 mm (see FIG. 21).

This type of inverter circuit board is used to create circuits using various electronic components, by fixing semiconductor integrated circuits, resistors, capacitors, transistors, and other components to an insulating substrate, and wiring between these components using copper foil. and form it. Because it is such a complicated and detailed work, it is currently mass-produced using automatic loading machines. Therefore, there are various restrictions on the shape and size of the circuit board, and even when used in this type of heating cooker, the circuit board is generally square or rectangular in shape. Therefore, in order to accommodate this type of inverter circuit board in the limited space in the upper unit 100, it is necessary to devise ways to avoid interference with, overlapping, etc. with surrounding components. Moreover, when the number of inverter circuits is increased, the number of components to be mounted also increases, and the area of the inverter circuit board inevitably increases.

The inverter circuit 81 mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 includes an inverter circuit 81L that supplies high frequency power to the left IH coil 17L, and an inverter circuit that supplies high frequency power to the right IH coil 17R. It is composed of a circuit 81R. These will be explained later with reference to FIGS. 20, 21, and 28.

A total of four heat sinks (radiation sinks) 82 made of aluminum are attached to the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. The heat sink 82 is shown in FIGS. 8, 11, and 22. That is, the two heat dissipating fins 82FN are arranged in two rows so as to face each other, and are placed close to each other by several mm to 10 mm so as to face each other.

As shown in FIG. 23, GP2 is a gap formed by the radiation fins 82FN of the two heat sinks 82 facing each other. The size of this gap (width in the front-rear direction) is the same throughout the two rows of heat sinks 82 in the left-right direction. For example, it is 8 mm. To distinguish from the (second) gap GP12 described later, this gap GP2 may be referred to as a "first gap".

As can be seen from FIGS. 8 and 22, the heat sink (radiation sink) 82 has power control circuits forming part of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R on the slopes on the sides facing each other and on the opposite side. switching elements 83 are respectively attached. Therefore, the heat generated during operation of the switching element 83 can be cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 passing around the radiation fins 82FN.

The power control switching element 83 is, for example, an IGBT (insulated gate bipolar transistor). The power control switching elements 83 on one of the inverter circuits 81L side are on the rear side of the heat sinks 82, which have two rows, front and back, and the power control switching elements 83 on the other inverter circuit 81R side are on the front side of the heat sinks 82, which have two rows on the front and back. It is attached to the side. Note that it may be attached to the opposite side.

In FIGS. 8 and 22, 70 is a cover integrally formed from a thin metal plate or plastic material that covers the entire upper part of the inverter circuit board 80. The left and right end portions of the cover 70 are open, and as shown in FIG. 20, the left side of the cover 70 serves as an inlet FI for the cooling air RF1 and RF2, which will be described later, and the right side of the cover 70 serves as an inlet FI for the cooling air RF1 and RF2. Configure the exit FO of

The cover 70 is located at a position that ensures a certain gap (in a straight line distance, about 1 mm to several mm at most) GP11 between the cover 70 and the lower surface of the coil base 17C that supports the IH coils 17L and 17R. In this first embodiment, the gap GP11 is 2 mm. Thereby, a space of at least 5 mm or more is secured between the lower surface of the IH coils 17L, 17R and the upper surface of the cover 70. This space has the effect of alleviating the magnetic influence on the cover 70 from the IH coils 17L, 17R, and facilitating the flow of cooling air between the cover 70 and the lower surface of the IH coils 17L, 17R.

The cover 70 has a size that ensures a constant gap GP12 between the uppermost surface of the inverter circuit board 80 and the uppermost surface of the inverter circuit board 80. In this first embodiment, GP12 is 20 mm.
To distinguish from the (first) gap GP2, this gap GP12 may be referred to as a "second gap".

H5 is the height dimension of the cover 70. H5 is 27mm.
H6 is the height dimension from the bottom surface 16S of the upper case (upper housing) 16, and is 28 mm. Similarly, H7 is the height dimension from the bottom surface 16S, and is 31 mm. Note that 71 is a support plate, which will be explained later. An insulating sheet or a magnetic shielding sheet (such as a thin aluminum plate) may be installed between the upper surface of the support plate 71 and the cover 70 or the inverter circuit board 80.

In FIG. 22, H9 is the maximum height dimension of the IH coil installation space CK. In other words, it is the straight-line distance from the lower surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom wall surface of the upper case 16. In this first embodiment, this height dimension is 44 mm or 44.5 mm. Note that the maximum height dimension H10 of (all) side wall surfaces of the upper case 16, which was explained with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13, is 40 mm. The reason why this height dimension H10 and the maximum height dimension H9 of the IH coil installation space CK do not match is because the top plate 15 is installed above the horizontal flange 16A and the like. Note that the maximum height dimension H1 (see FIG. 4) of this heating cooker 1 is 50 mm or less.

Since the cover 70 is located directly below and close to the IH coil 17L, if the cover 70 is expected to have a magnetic shielding effect, it is recommended that the cover 70 be made of a non-magnetic metal such as aluminum. . If the cover 71 is made of iron, magnetic stainless steel, or the like, there is a risk that the cover 71 will be heated by leakage magnetic flux and the temperature will rise. For example, it is recommended to use methods such as stacking aluminum sheets or pasting aluminum tape.

In addition, when the cover 70 is formed of metal, it is even better if it is electrically connected to the upper case 16. For example, metal screws (not shown) for attaching the cover 70 are set to reach directly to the screw holes of the cover 70.

Since the upper case 16 is connected to a lower case 101 (described later) using metal screws or the like, it is electrically connected to a ground terminal (not shown) provided on the lower case 101, and noise is absorbed by the ground. In this way, the magnetic shielding effect of the cover 70 can be expected to provide a noise shielding effect for various electrical components mounted on the inverter circuit board 80.

Further, by injection molding the cover 70 from a plastic material, the cross-sectional shape of the cover 70 can be determined relatively freely. Therefore, there is an advantage that the flow (direction) of the cooling air RF1 flowing through the first air path F1 can be adjusted. For example, a rib-shaped wind direction plate or the like may be integrally formed on the lower surface of the cover 70 so that a large amount of the cooling air RF1 flows particularly to a specific portion of the heat sink 82.

Next, the cover 70 will be explained in more detail.
In FIG. 22, FH is the height dimension of all the heat sinks 82 (82F, 82B), which is 20 mm.
A gap GP12 between the top surface of the inverter circuit board 80 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70 is approximately 21 mm, and the height of this gap GP12 is also the height of the first air path F1.

The distance (gap) dimension GP13 between the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the cover 70 and the lower surface of the top plate 15 is approximately 13 mm. A series of hanging walls 70B are formed below both the front and rear edges of the cover 70.

The opposing distance between the pair of front and rear hanging walls 70B, that is, the dimension W9 of the space in the front and rear direction (see FIG. 21) is 205 mm. The lower end surface of the hanging wall 70B is in contact with the upper surface of the support plate 71, but even if there is a small gap between the two, the guiding effect of the cooling air is not hindered.

In FIG. 22, GP16 is a gap formed between the upper surface of the radiation fin 82FN of the heat sink 82 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70. This gap GP16 is, for example, about 1 mm.

With the above configuration, the first air passage F1 is formed between the gaps GP12 and GP16 formed inside the cover 70 and the radiation fins 82FN. In addition, in FIG. 22, W7 is the width of the inverter circuit board 80 in the front-rear direction, which is 195 mm (see FIG. 21). Moreover, W9 is the opposing interval (dimension of the space in the front-rear direction) of the hanging walls 70B, and is 205 mm.

In FIG. 21, W10 indicates the distance from the right end surface of the cover 70, that is, the exit side end surface to the side vertical wall 16R of the upper case 16. This distance W10 is about 110 mm, and since there is a space of this distance, the power supply circuit board 55 is arranged using that space.

In FIG. 21, 70A is a front notch formed at the left edge of the cover 70, that is, at the entrance side end. This front notch 70A is for guiding a portion of the cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 to the outside immediately before the cover 70.
A plurality of front notches 70A may be formed.

In FIG. 21, GP14 indicates a gap between the first cooling fan 60 and the left end surface of the cover 70. This gap GP14 is about 40 mm. Note that a gap GP15 (not shown) may also be provided between the second cooling fan 61 on the front side and the left end surface of the cover 70. In FIG. 21, the gap GP15 is not shown because it is small.

In FIG. 21, XB indicates the point where the partition wall 11 intersects with the "air line" FL1 that passes through the center point of the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and is orthogonal to the tip surface of the air outlet 60A. It shows.
The air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is inclined by a predetermined angle θ1 with respect to a center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L and 17R in the left-right direction. Note that instead of the center line CL5 that crosses each center point of the IH coils 17L and 17R in the left-right direction, it may be inclined with respect to a straight line (corresponding to the reference line BL in FIG. 23) that simply crosses the partition wall 11.

XF indicates the point (intersection) where the partition wall 11 intersects with the "air line" FL2 that passes through the center point of the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and is perpendicular to the tip surface of the air outlet 61A. ing. These intersection points XB and XF will be explained in detail later with reference to FIG. 23. Note that the blowout line FL1 and the blowout line FL2 are imaginary straight lines provided for convenience in explaining the present invention, and the cooling air does not actually travel along the blowoff lines FL1 and FL2.

The air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 is inclined by a predetermined angle Θ2 with respect to the center line CL5.
The installation interval W14 between the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 measured at the center point is 150 mm.

As is clear from FIG. 23, the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the heat sink 82 (82B) are separated by a straight line distance (shortest distance) LD1. This straight line distance LD1 is about 110 mm.
Further, the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and the heat sink 82 (82F) are separated by a straight line distance (shortest distance) LD2. This straight line distance LD2 is about 100 mm.

With the above configuration, the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 connects the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink from behind with the straight line (reference line) BL passing through the center of the gap GP2 in between. It is directed toward the heat sink 82B. It is oblique (the angle is θ1) with respect to the straight line (reference line) BL.

Conversely, the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 is oblique (the angle is θ2) with respect to the straight line (reference line) BL from the front direction with the straight line (reference line) BL interposed therebetween.
Note that although the magnitude relationship between the angles θ1 and θ2 is “θ1>θ2”, they may be equal.

In this first embodiment, as can be seen from FIG. 23, the two intersections XB and XF are not at the same position. It changes depending on the positions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 and the directions of the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61.

As shown in FIG. 24, the heat sink 82 includes front FR side heat sinks 82F, 82F1 and 82F2. There are 82B1 and 82B2 as the heat sinks 82B on the rear BK side. Note that, when viewed from the front side of the cooking device 1, among the two rows of heat sinks 82, front and rear, the heat sink on the front left side is called the "front first heat sink" 82F1, and the heat sink installed a little apart on the front right side. is sometimes referred to as the "front second heat sink" 82F2.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 24, among the two rows of heat sinks 82 in the front and rear, the heat sink on the rear left side is called the "first rear heat sink" 82B1, and the heat sink installed a little distance on the front right side is called the "first rear heat sink" 82B1. 82B2.

In FIG. 22, reference numeral 11 denotes a partition wall integrally formed so as to protrude downward from the ceiling surface of the cover 70. If the cover 70 is injection molded from a plastic material, it can be integrally formed as described above, but a plate-like member separate from the cover 70 may be used, in which case it will be referred to as a partition member 11. Hereinafter, in order to simplify the explanation, they will be collectively referred to as the "partition wall" 11.

The partition wall 11 has a flat front surface and a back surface (rear surface) over the entire length from the right end to the left end. This is to minimize the air path resistance of the cooling air RF1, RF2 flowing through the first air path F1. The thickness of the partition wall is about 2.0 mm.
It is desirable that the partition wall 11 be made of a highly electrically insulating material (for example, a plastic material). Note that in FIGS. 8, 9, and 11, illustration of the partition wall 11 is omitted.

Returning to FIG. 20, D6 is the maximum width in the front-rear direction that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16. This dimension D6 is determined by the distance between the partition plate 52 and the front vertical wall 16F, which will be described later (see FIG. 8).
GP1 is a gap formed continuously in the lateral direction behind the partition plate 52.

D7 is the distance between the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the partition plate 52, which will be described later, and is a dimension that determines the size of the gap GP1 (see FIG. 9). W8 is the maximum (width) dimension in the left-right direction that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16.

The two IH coils 17L and 17 are supported from below by a component called a coil base 17C made of heat-resistant plastic (see FIGS. 8 and 9).
The coil base 17C may be provided for each of the two IH coils 17L and 17R, or may be formed from one structure common to the two IH coils 17L and 17R.

The coil base 17C has a structure that is placed directly on the upper surface of the cover 70 and fixed to the cover 70 with a fixing device such as a screw. Alternatively, an elastic body such as a compression spring is interposed between the cover 70 and the upper surface of the cover 70, so that the cover 70 is always supported in a pushed-up manner toward the top plate 15 side. A detailed explanation of these support structures will be omitted. In any case, the facing interval (distance) between the IH coils 17L and 17R and the back surface (lower surface) of the top plate 15 does not change over a long period of time.

Due to the above configuration, during induction heating cooking, the facing interval (distance) between the cooking container, which is the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15, and the IH coils 17L, 17R does not change. As a result, changes in the high frequency voltage and high frequency current generated in the inverter circuits 81L and 81R that supply high frequency current to the IH coils 17L and 17R can be suppressed, and the induction heating performance can be stabilized.

The IH coils 17L and 17R exist on one horizontal plane (second horizontal plane) HP2 (see FIG. 10).

As shown in FIG. 22, the cover 70 is in a position where it is not in contact with both the coil base 17C, which is disposed below the IH coils 17L and 17R, and the heat sink 82.

The cover 70 is fixed in close contact with the upper surface of a flat support plate 71 that is larger than the planar shape of the cover 70. And between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 20, a first air passage F1 that is long in the left-right direction is defined. That is, the cover 70 defines a "tunnel-shaped" first air passage F1 that is long from side to side. Note that the support plate 71 is made of an electrically insulating material, such as heat-resistant plastic.

In FIGS. 8 and 11, 102 is a metal exhaust duct through which the exhaust flow from the lower unit 200 is guided. An end portion 102E on the exhaust port side of the exhaust duct 102 passes through a gap GP1 formed between a partition plate 52, which will be described later, and a rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 (see FIG. 9). In other words, the exhaust duct 102 vertically passes through the gap GP1 like a chimney.

In FIG. 9, a horizontally long box-shaped water receiving member 86 with a bottom surface is installed at the right exhaust port 65 (see FIG. 15).
This water receiving member 86 is composed of an outer case 87 that is entirely made of plastic material, and an inner case 88 that is detachably inserted into the outer case 87 from above.
The inner case 88 can be taken out from the exhaust port 20 with the exhaust cover 19 removed. In this case, since the outer case 87 cannot be taken out, tableware and other foreign objects can be prevented from falling into the cooking device 1 through the exhaust port 20.

As shown in FIG. 9, the outer case 87 has a substantially U-shaped longitudinal section when viewed from the side, and the entire upper surface is open.
The inner case 88 also has a substantially U-shaped vertical cross-sectional shape when viewed from the side, and the entire upper surface is open.

A large number of ventilation holes 87A are formed on the front (wall) surface of the outer case 87 at positions facing the exhaust window 52B.
If foreign matter (liquid) such as water flows from above the exhaust cover 19 over substantially the entire bottom (wall) surface of the inner case 88, a drainage hole is provided to reduce the force of the foreign matter (liquid) and drain it downward. A large number of 88B are formed. Note that the drainage hole 88B is a circular hole with a diameter of several mm or less.

A vent hole 88A is formed in the front (wall) surface of the inner case 88 at a position facing the vent hole 87A. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9, the cooling air RF4R discharged from the exhaust window 52B passes through the exhaust holes 87A and 88A, and is discharged to the outside from the exhaust port 20.

The exhaust window 52B is close to the filter circuit board 54 when viewed from above (see FIG. 20). Therefore, if a liquid such as water splashes onto the exhaust cover 19, the water receiving member 86 has a waterproof structure that prevents such liquid (foreign matter) from reaching the filter circuit board 54 through the exhaust window 52B. is installed.

As shown in FIG. 9, the position of the exhaust window 52B is slightly higher than the position of the exhaust hole 87A. Therefore, even if foreign matter such as water temporarily accumulates in this water receiving member, it will not flow over the exhaust window 52B and into the filter circuit board 54 side.

A hole 87B for draining water is formed in the bottom (wall) surface of the inner case 87. Foreign matter such as water flowing down from this hole 87B is guided to the rear and lower part of the lower case 101 through a drainage channel (not shown), and is ultimately collected in a bottomed box-shaped water tray (not shown). It is configured so that it can be done. Note that this water receiving member 86 is omitted from illustration in FIGS. 20 and 21.

In FIG. 10, 16A is a horizontal flange formed by continuously bending outward at right angles from the upper ends of the side vertical walls 16L and 16R of the upper case 16.
101A is a horizontal flange formed by continuously bending outward at right angles from the upper ends of side vertical walls 101L and 101R of the lower case 101, which will be described later.

In the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, the above-mentioned flange 16A overlaps with the flange 101A. In this overlapping state, the side wall surface of the upper case 16 and the side wall surface of the lower case 101 are fixed with the aforementioned screws 51 (see FIG. 8) and screws 51F (not shown), respectively. Therefore, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 form a strong integral structure by fixing with screws 51 and the like and by tightly fixing the flanges 16A and 101A. In other words, the total weight of the upper case 16 is borne by the upper surface of the flange 101A of the lower case 101, so even if the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are formed of thin metal plates, they will not be in an integrated state. It is possible to create a box-shaped structure with mechanical strength.

The means for fixing the flanges 16A and 101A in an overlapping state may be other fastening means such as bolts and nuts, instead of the screws 51. Note that the flange 16A and the flange 101A do not contact the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2. Since these flanges 16A and 101A are made of a hard material (metal), there is a risk of damaging the kitchen furniture 2. Furthermore, if the flanges 16A and 101A come into contact with the kitchen furniture 2, the cushion material 26 cannot be installed while being compressed. If the cushioning material 26 is not in close contact with the cushioning material 26, there is a concern that the effect of preventing intrusion of water etc. will be impaired.

Next, the gap between the main body case HC, which is the outer shell (casing) of the cooking device 1, and the kitchen furniture 2 will be explained.
4 and 8 to 11, 311 is a lower gap formed between the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 constituting the outer shell of the main body case HC and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 10 mm. be.

In FIG. 10, 301R is a right side gap formed between the right side vertical wall 101R of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.
301L is a left side gap formed between the left side vertical wall 101L of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.

In FIG. 9, 302 is a front gap formed between the lower surface of the door 114 or the lower surface of the hinge part 176 and the kitchen furniture 2 when the door 114 is closed, and has a size of about 10 mm. . Note that the position of the lower surface of the front cover 112 is also the same as the position of the lower surface of the door 114 on the horizontal plane, so a gap of the same size as the front gap 302 is secured below the front cover 112. This is a configuration where there is

The size of the front gap 302 changes depending on whether the door 114 is opened or closed, but as shown in FIG. It would be good if it was secured. In addition, in the following description, "outside air" refers to the air that exists outside the heating cooker 1, and does not refer to outdoor air.

The lower cavity 311, the right cavity 301R, the left cavity 301L, and the front cavity 302 are in communication with each other. Therefore, when the heating cooker 1 starts operating and outside air is sucked in from the front gap 302, the sucked outside air is appropriately distributed to the lower gap 311, the right side gap 301R, and the left side gap 301L, respectively. Note that the void 303 described in FIG. 14 also communicates with each of the voids 311, the right void 301R, the left void 301L, and the front void 302.

The lower void 311, the right void 301R, the left void 301L, and the front void 302 may be referred to as a "third void." This is to distinguish between a first gap (GP2) and a second gap (GP12), which will be described later.

Next, FIG. 14 will be explained.
W3 is the maximum width dimension at the front part of the cooking device 1. This width dimension W3 is larger than the maximum width dimension W2 (560 mm) of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2, and is, for example, 595 mm. 303 is a gap formed between the inner surface of the right side wall material (hereinafter referred to as "right side") existing on the right side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2 and the right end surface of the front cover 112. This gap is ensured so that the heating cooker 1 does not collide with the kitchen furniture 2 when it is installed. The size may be about 1 to 2 mm.

In the left front cover 112 as well, a gap similar to the gap 303 is formed between it and the inner surface of the left wall material (hereinafter referred to as "left side") that exists on the left side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2. . Note that depending on the installation of the cooking device 1, the sizes of the left and right gaps 303 may differ somewhat. Furthermore, depending on the type of kitchen furniture 2, a resilient sealing material (cushioning material) may be placed on the stepped portion 2G (see Fig. 6), and the space 303 may be almost completely closed. However, even in such a state, there is no problem with the internal cooling function of this heating cooker 1.

As shown in FIG. 14, the front cover 112 of the kitchen furniture 2 extends further outward than the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L. Therefore, when the heating cooker 1 is installed, the front sides of the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L are covered by the two left and right front covers 112. Therefore, when the user views the kitchen furniture 2 from the front side, the user does not feel as if there is a large gap between the heating cooker 1 and the kitchen furniture 2. In the installed state of the heating cooker 1, the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L are secured, so outside air is introduced for the upper air passage AH of the upper unit 100 and the lower air passage UH of the lower unit 200, which will be described later. can be done reliably.

In FIG. 14, WS is the width dimension at which the door 114 faces the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. This width dimension is necessary so that the door 114 and the lower case 101 come into close contact with each other to prevent microwave leakage, and also to form choke chambers 194 (described later) at the front, rear, right and left positions of the opening 113A. (See Figure 11).

As shown in FIG. 20, a first cooling fan 60 (upper cooling fan) and a second cooling fan 61 (upper cooling fan) are installed near the side vertical wall 16L on the left side of the upper case 16, respectively. is set up. Rotating shafts 60T and 61T (see FIG. 23) located at the center of the many rotary blades 60F of the first cooling fan 60 and the many rotary blades 61F of the second cooling fan 61 each extend in the vertical (vertical) direction. ing.
The rotary blades 60F, 61F rotate on one horizontal plane (first horizontal plane HP1) that coincides with the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80.

As the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, centrifugal fans (blower) having a small dimension in the height direction are employed. In other words, it is a thin centrifugal fan. The reason for this is that the fan is suitable for cases where static pressure is high and ventilation resistance is large in a space with high packaging density.

Generally, some types of centrifugal fans have one suction port and two or more outlet directions. However, the first embodiment has only one air outlet 60A, 61A.

In FIG. 20, 60A is an air outlet formed integrally with the fan case 60C of the first cooling fan 60, and 61A is an air outlet formed integrally with the fan case 61C of the second cooling fan 61. The air outlet 60A is directed toward the inverter circuit board 80. Further, the air outlet 61A is also directed toward the inverter circuit board 80. In other words, the two air outlets 60A and 61A are both present on a common horizontal plane and are directed to the right. This horizontal plane is a first horizontal plane HP1 that will be described later.

The maximum height of fan cases 60A and 61A including fan motors 60M and 61M (both not shown) is preferably 25 mm or less, and in the first embodiment, it is set to one of 22 mm to 24 mm. .

The first horizontal plane HP1 described above has a height that coincides with the upper surface (surface) of the inverter circuit board 80. Therefore, various electronic components mounted on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 and a heat sink 82 (82F, 82B), which will be described later, are located above the first horizontal plane HP1.

Furthermore, the positional relationship between the first cooling fan 60 and the inverter circuit board 80 and the positional relationship between the second cooling fan 61 and the inverter circuit board 80 will be explained using FIGS. 24 and 25, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the air outlet 60A is directed toward the inverter circuit board 80. The diameter W11 of the air outlet 60A in the front-rear direction is 50 mm.
On the other hand, the vertical diameter (height dimension) H8 of the air outlet 60A is 20 mm.
Although the dimensions of the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 are also the same, they do not necessarily have to be the same.

The first cooling fan 60 is installed in an overlapping manner so that the fan case 60C is in direct contact with the bottom wall surface 16S of the main body 10. Note that a thin electrically insulating sheet of about 1 to 3 mm, an elastic sealing material, or the like may be interposed below the fan case 60C.

As is clear from FIG. 24, the air outlet 60A has a rectangular cross-sectional shape with a horizontal dimension W11 larger than a height dimension H8. Note that the second cooling fan 61 is also installed on the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 at the same height as the first cooling fan 60.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the IH control section 90 is mounted on the upper surface of the left end portion of the inverter circuit board 80. In other words, it is arranged on the left side of the heat sinks 82F and 82B. Therefore, among the cooling air immediately blown out to the right side from the first cooling fan 60, the cooling air that curves backward continuously cools the microcomputer that forms the core of the IH control unit 90, and prevents it from overheating. Prevented.

As shown in FIG. 24, the two inverter circuits 81L and 81R each include an output current detection section 77b. A signal line 39B from the output current detection section 77b is connected to an input terminal (not shown) of the IH control section 90 via the left end of the inverter circuit board 80. That is, the signal line 39B from the output current detection section 77b in the two inverter circuits 81L and 81R is connected to the input terminal (not shown) of the IH control section 90 via the left end of the inverter circuit board 80. ing.

In this way, the output current detection section 77b, the signal line 39B, and the microcomputer that constitutes the core of the IH control section 90 are arranged at the left end of the inverter circuit board 80 because the coils of the left IH coil 17L This is to avoid being directly under the line 17CL (not shown). As a result, the signal line 39B and the microcomputer forming the core of the IH control unit 90 are separated from the coil line 17CL (not shown), which is a source of noise when the IH coil 17L is driven. This can be expected to prevent the negative effects of noise. This allows accurate operation of the IH control section 90.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same "rated specifications", and are assumed to be operated at the same rotation speed during normal induction heating operation. . However, in the first embodiment, there are exceptional cases in which the IH control unit 90 changes the number of revolutions to change the amount of air blown. For example, there is a case where the difference in heating capacity between the IH coils 17L and 17R is increased. When increasing the driving power applied to only one of them to increase the heating capacity, or when it is detected that the temperature of the integrated display section 30 or the input operation section 40 is higher than normal, the cooling effect can be increased. In order to increase the rotation speed, the number of rotations may be increased to change (increase) the amount of air blown to the heat sinks 82B and 82F. Further, as a countermeasure against "whining noise" which will be described later, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may be operated at different rotation speeds.

The rated specifications include, for example, rated voltage, working voltage range, rated current, rated rotational speed, maximum air volume, maximum static pressure, and sound pressure level. The rotation speed can be changed by changing the applied voltage or voltage application time (on-duty time) within the working voltage range.

In contrast, in the first embodiment, a PWM control (Pulse Width Modulation) method is adopted, and the duty cycle of the pulse width (pulse width modulation) is changed depending on the magnitude of the input signal (DC level). The motor of the first cooling fan 60 is controlled by changing the ratio of H and L. This PWM control is also adopted by the second cooling fan 61.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have rotary blades 60F, 61F surrounded by fan cases 60C, 61C, and circular suction ports 60H, 61H ( (not shown).

Note that the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are formed with "the same dimensions" including the fan cases 60C, 61C and the air outlets 60A, 61A.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are formed of a large number of round or oval holes at positions directly below the respective suction ports 60H and 61H (none of which are shown). There is a ventilation hole 64 (see FIGS. 10 and 12). This ventilation hole 64 is formed in the bottom wall surface of the lower case 16. This ventilation hole 64 communicates with a ventilation hole 164 formed in the left side wall surface of the lower case 101, which will be described later. Therefore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 can directly introduce outside air from the outside of the lower case 101 through the ventilation holes 164.

In FIG. 10, 165 is a recess (intake duct), which is provided to directly communicate the ventilation hole 64 with the ventilation hole 164 of the lower case 101. This recess 165 is formed by recessing from the left side by a certain depth (dimension) DP1. Note that this dimension DP1 is 99 mm.

As shown in FIG. 10, the center point in the vertical direction of the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60, the center point in the vertical direction of the heat sink 82 (82B, 82F), and the upper surface of the power supply circuit board 55, which will be described later. The vertical center point of the mounted electrical component 85 is located several mm or more above one horizontal plane (first horizontal plane) HP1. In other words, the positional relationship is such that the cooling air RF1 blown out from the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 reaches the electrical component 85 when it passes through the first air path F1 and advances to the right. .

In FIG. 10, AC power from a commercial AC power source 99 is supplied to the power supply circuit board 55 via a filter circuit board 54, which will be described later. Then, in this power supply circuit board 55, AC is converted to DC. Therefore, electrical components 85 such as diodes and transformers 57 for converting alternating current to direct current are mounted.

When the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80 rises abnormally, the IH control unit 90 that controls induction heating cooking reduces the amount of heating of the IH coils 17L and 17R. In addition to this operation, the amount of air blown per unit time by the first cooling fan 60 may be temporarily increased. The temperature of the heat sink 82 is detected by contact type temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 (see FIG. 20), such as thermistors, which are tightly fixed to the surface of the heat sink 82.

When the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same rating specifications, the procurement cost during manufacturing can be reduced.
If cooling fans with the same specifications are placed and operated in parallel, there is a high possibility that humming noise will occur. Therefore, in the first embodiment, as a countermeasure against the whining noise, the rotational speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are controlled to different values in a range where the whining noise is likely to occur. There is. In other words, they are not always running at different rotational speeds.

In FIG. 20, reference numeral 52 denotes a metal partition plate that is installed long left and right at the rear of the upper case 16, and is fixed to the upper case 16. This partition plate 52 is a wall extending vertically so as to divide the internal space of the upper case 16 into front and rear sections. Note that "compartment" here does not mean strict shielding that completely blocks air circulation. It is sufficient that the cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 can be effectively suppressed to some extent from flowing backward beyond the upper end surface of the partition plate 52.

The upper air passage AH, which will be described later, refers to an air passage in the range from the ventilation hole 64 to the partition plate 52 inside the upper unit 100. The exhaust duct 102 from the lower unit 200 described above exists in the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52. Therefore, the lower air passage UH, which will be described later, does not pass through the upper air passage AH, but has a structure that substantially communicates with the outside of the cooking device 1.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, 52A is an exhaust window formed on the left half of the partition plate 52, and 52B is an exhaust window of a constant length formed on the right half of the partition plate 52.

The upper edges of the exhaust windows 52A, 52B are located above the upper edges of the air outlets 60A, 61A of the first cooling fan 60, second cooling fan 61. Further, the position of the ventilation hole 87A of the outer case 87 described in FIG. 8 is also located above the upper edge of the air outlet 60A, 61A.

53L is an exhaust port plate installed to cover the front side of the exhaust window 52A, and has a large number of through holes 53L1 formed therein so that cooling air directed toward the exhaust window 52A of the partition plate 52 passes through. . Note that the cooling air that has passed through the exhaust window 52A is discharged into the external space of the cooking device 1 via the exhaust cover 19.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, 53R is an exhaust port plate installed to cover the front side of an exhaust window 52B, which will be described later. A large number of through holes 53R1 are formed, and cooling air flows toward the exhaust window 52B of the partition plate 52. is allowed to pass. Note that the cooling air that has passed through the exhaust window 52B is discharged to the external space of the cooking device 1 via the exhaust cover 19.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, LF is an exhaust port dimension indicating the range (width dimension) of exhaust gas exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L, 17R through the exhaust window 52A. This exhaust port size is determined by the formation range of the through hole 53L1 and the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A. When the width of the exhaust window 52A is narrower than the range in which the through hole 53L1 is formed, the exhaust range LF is determined by the width of the exhaust window 52A.

20 and 21, reference numeral 12 denotes a partition plate, which is vertically installed in the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52. Reference numeral 13 also designates a partition plate, which is vertically installed in the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52.

The partition plate 12 partitions the inside of the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52 into left and right sides. On the left side of this partition plate 12, an exhaust duct 102 exists vertically from below. Further, on the right side of the partition plate 13, there may be provided a terminal end (exhaust port) of an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) that discharges air after cooling the magnetron 122 of the lower unit 200. However, in this first embodiment, such an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) is not provided.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, reference numeral 14 denotes a vertically installed partition wall in the form of a plate or a rib (in the form of a raised object). The partition wall 14 is integrally formed with or fixed to the upper surface of a support plate 29 (not shown) installed so as to overlap the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16.

The support plate 29 (not shown), like the support plate 71, is made of an electrically insulating plastic material.
The partition wall 14 is formed from the rear of the cover 70 to the front of the partition plate 52. However, the partition wall 14 does not extend vertically to a position where it contacts the lower surface of the top plate 15. That is, although the partition wall 14 extends close to the bottom surface of the top plate 15, the space behind the cover 70 is not completely partitioned into two left and right parts by the partition wall 14.

As shown in FIG. 21, a part of the cooling air RF4 guided to the right side of the cover 70 mainly via the first air path F1 is divided into two cooling air RF4L and RF4L by the partition wall 14. The air is separated and guided toward the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

52B is an exhaust window formed in the partition plate 52 in a range to the right of the partition wall 14.
As shown in FIG. 21, a part of the cooling air RF4 guided mainly to the right side of the cover 70 via the first air path F1 is divided into two cooling air RF4L and RF4L by the partition wall 14. It can be divided and guided toward the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

With the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 20, the cooling air RF4L and RF4R are exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L and 17R via the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.
In addition, in FIG. 20, the cooling air exhausted from the right side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4R, and the cooling air exhausted from the left side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4L. When these two types of cooling air are collectively referred to, RF4 will be used in the following description.

In FIG. 20, 54 is a filter circuit board placed at the rear right corner of the upper case 16. This filter circuit board removes noise in the power supply from the commercial power supply 99 and supplies it to the output terminal side, and conversely prevents noise from flowing (reverse flow) to the commercial power supply side on the input terminal side. A resistor and an inductor (choke coil) 56 (not shown), electrical components such as an inter-line capacitor, a relay, a current fuse (not shown), and a main power switch 97 are mounted. Note that the end of a power cable (power cord 106) (not shown) connected to the commercial power source 99 via a plug is connected to the filter circuit board 54 via the inside of the lower unit 200, which will be described later. ing.

When the cooling air RF4R guided to the right exhaust window 52B by the partition wall 14 passes above the filter circuit board 54, it passes through the resistor (not shown) and inductor (not shown) mounted on the filter circuit board 54. The choke coil 56) (not shown) can also be cooled to prevent overheating.

The power supply circuit board 55 is located on the opposite side (right side) of the first cooling fan 60 with the inverter circuit board 80 interposed therebetween. In other words, since the power supply circuit board 55 is located on the right side of the outlet FO of the first air passage F1 formed between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, the power supply circuit board 55 is cooled immediately after leaving the first air passage F1. Cooled by wind.

In FIG. 20, CL3 is a center line passing through the center point of the left IH coil 17L in the front-rear direction, and CL4 is a center line passing through the center point of the right IH coil 17R in the front-rear direction.
CL5 is a center line that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L and 17R in the left-right direction. As described above, CL2 is the center line of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 that passes through the rotation center of each of the rotary blades 60F and 61F in the front-rear direction. As is clear from FIG. 20, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are aligned on a straight line in the front-rear direction.

In FIG. 20, RF1 indicates cooling air blown out from the first cooling fan 60. RF2 indicates cooling air blown out from the second cooling fan 61.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, RF3 indicates the cooling air after exiting to the right side from the exit of the second air path F2. Further, a part of the cooling air RF4 that has exited to the right side from the exit FO of the first air path F1 changes its direction upward, and then proceeds to the left side. The two IH coils 17R and 17L, the coil base 17C, etc. are cooled by this cooling air RF4. A part of the cooling air RF4 that cools the IH coils 17R, 17L and the coil base 17C advances in the direction of the through hole 53L.

On the other hand, the cooling air RF4 after coming out of the outlet FO and the cooling air RF3 after passing through the second air passage F2 proceed diagonally backward, with some of them merging on the way. That is, before reaching the through hole 53R of the exhaust port plate 53, the cooling air RF4 and the cooling air RF3 merge (mix) to become the cooling air RF4R.

In FIG. 20, GP1 is a gap formed between the partition plate 52 and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16. The width of this gap GP1 in the front-rear direction is approximately 30 mm to 50 mm.

(input display section)
Next, referring back to FIGS. 15 and 16, the main parts of the input operation section 40 will be explained.
In FIG. 15, reference numeral 40 denotes an input operation section formed on the upper surface of the front side of the top plate 15, and as described below, the input operation section uses the change in capacitance when the user lightly touches it with a finger etc. Various types of input keys are arranged horizontally in a straight line.

The input operation section 40 includes three: a right operation section 40R, a center operation section 40M, and a left operation section 40L. Reference numeral 98 denotes an operation button or operation key (touch input type) of a main power switch 97 that can supply and cut off a commercial power source 99, which will be described later. This operation button or operation key 98 is arranged at a position adjacent to the right end of the right operation section 40R. The following description will be made on the assumption that this operation button or operation key 98 is within the range of the input operation section 40 (see FIG. 15).

The main power switch 97 is attached to the filter board 54 of the upper unit 100, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21. The commercial power source 99 is supplied to the power circuit board 55, the inverter circuit 81, and the power circuit section of the lower unit 200 (not shown in FIG. 21).

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, a total of five touch input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R are arranged on the right operation section 40R. These input keys 43R1 to 43R4, 44R are assigned one or more input functions as described below.

43R1 is an input key for selecting heating in the right heating section 17HR. Further, the operation of the right IH coil 17R that has started the heating operation can be stopped. Therefore, when it is pressed once for the first time, it exhibits the selection function of the right heating section 17HR, and when it is pressed once again, it has the function of instantly issuing a command to stop the heating operation. In this way, each time the input key 43R1 is touched, the contents of the command to the IH control unit 90, which will be described later, are automatically switched.

42R2 and 42R3 are a pair of input keys for specifying the thermal power (power consumption) during induction heating.
When the left input key 42R2 is touched, the firepower is lowered by one step each time the input key 42R2 is touched. For example, if the power is 3200W (maximum rated firepower: firepower level 9), if you touch this input key 42R2 once, it becomes 2500W (firepower level: 8).

When the right input key 42R3 is touched, the firepower is increased by one step each time the input key 42R3 is touched. For example, if the thermal power is 2500W (thermal power level 8), by touching this input key 42R3 once, 3200W (rated maximum thermal power: thermal power level 9) can be selected.

43R4 is an input key for selecting a timer cooking control menu. Timer cooking is a control method that allows the user to set a cooking time and perform induction heating only during the set time. For example, if you start timer cooking by specifying 10 minutes, a predetermined display will be displayed on the right display section 31R when 10 minutes have passed, and the voice synthesis device 95, which will be described later, will automatically notify you of the end of cooking. It will be held on. The induction heating automatically stops when the set time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, but the induction heating time can also be extended by performing an extension operation before the set time elapses.

44R is a touch type input key for selecting a "control menu" for induction heating cooking, and each time the key is touched, one can be selected from a plurality of control menus. Note that the "control menu" refers to the control mode of the induction heating source 9, in other words, the type of control, such as boiling water, boiling, preheating, frying (automatic cooking), etc., as shown in FIG. be. That is, for boiling water, frying food, etc., the driving time of the IH coil 17R, the heating power, the driving pattern for changing the heating power, etc. are different.

The "control menu" for the right heating section 17HR is different from the name of the final cooked product or food material obtained by induction heating. For example, "hamburger" and "tempura" are names of dishes, and are not "control menus" as referred to here. In other words, the "control menu" can be said to be a general expression of the type of heating, cooking method, conditions, etc. until cooking is completed.

Next, the left operation section 40L will be explained with reference to FIGS. 16 and 19. The left operation section 40L includes a total of five touch input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L.

43L1 is an input key for selecting cooking using the left heating section 17HL. Moreover, after the heating operation of the left IH coil 17L is started, the operation can be stopped at any time. That is, when pressed once for the first time, the function of selecting the left heating section 17HL is exhibited, and when pressed once again after induction heating has started, the heating operation can be stopped instantaneously.

43L2 and 43L3 are a pair of input keys for specifying the thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating section 17HL, similar to the input keys 43R2 to 43R3 of the right operation section 40R. Similarly to the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation section 40R, each touch selects the firepower that is increased by one level or the specific firepower that is decreased by one level in the data table of prescribed firepower values. You can choose the firepower.

43L4 is an input key for selecting timer cooking. This input key 43L4 can specify the induction heating cooking time similarly to the input key 43R4 of the right operation section 40R. Furthermore, when the timer cooking ends, the end of the timer cooking is displayed on the left side display section 31L similarly to the input key 43R4, and is also notified by the voice synthesizer 95.

44L is a touch input key that allows selection of a "control menu" for induction heating cooking. Similarly to the input key 44R of the right operation section 40R, one control menu can be selected from a plurality of "control menus." Note that the control menu that can be selected with the left input key 44L is exactly the same as the control menu that can be selected with the right input key 44R.

When a "cooperative cooking menu" to be described later is selected using the central operation section 40M, cooperative cooking can be executed using either the right operation section 40R or the left operation section 40L. In other words, specific cooking (for example, grilling a hamburger) can be performed using the cooperative cooking menu.

As is clear from FIGS. 15 and 18, a total of five touch input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L arranged on the left operation section 40L are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction.

In FIGS. 16 and 17, a total of 10 touch input keys are arranged on the central operation section 40M. These input keys are assigned one or more input functions.
The ten touch input keys will be explained below.

The input key 43KP located on the leftmost side is used to enable the user to set various operations, displays, etc. of the entire heating cooker 1 as desired.

When the input key 43KP is pressed, the integrated control device MC, which will be described later, switches to the "function mode" and displays the following "function setting menu" on the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30.
(1) Child lock setting (disable operation of various input keys)
(2) Ventilation fan interlock mode setting (3) Cleaning guide setting (automatic notification function setting for cleaning time of heating chamber 113 and exhaust cover 19)
(4) Peak cut setting (select one of the three maximum power consumption levels: 5700W, 4800W, and 4000W)
(5) Audio guide settings (6) Audio guide volume settings (7) Settings to prevent forgetting to take out food, cooking utensils, etc. from the heating chamber 113 (settings for the audio synthesizer 95 and integrated display unit 30) necessity of warning)
(8) HEMS registration settings (settings for devices with power usage restrictions by household power control equipment)
(9) Time unit setting for timer cooking (change setting from 1 minute unit to 5 minutes or 30 minutes)

By pressing the input key 43KP to switch the integrated display screen to the "function mode" and then operating the touch input keys 43M1 to 43M3, which will be described later, arranged on the central operation section 40M, the "function mode" of the cooking device 1 can be changed. The above nine types of individual functions defined in the "Settings Menu" can be changed individually.

At the stage where the control mode and control conditions (temperature, heat power, time, etc.) of the microwave heat source 189 and oven heat source 188 are selected on the integrated display unit 30, the input key 43KP is pressed so as not to switch the function mode. The input function is disabled. Therefore, the light emitting section 27M1 corresponding to the input key 43KP does not emit light during the setting work of the control mode and control conditions (see FIG. 41).

For example, the setting of the peak cut value of the cooking device 1 will be described. Even if the default value at the time of shipment from the manufacturer is 5400W, it can be set to either 4800W or 4000W when installed at the user's home. In this way, the functions of the heating cooker 1 can be changed according to the user's wishes, usage environment (power situation of the household where it is installed), and the like.

43MC is an input key for selecting a "cooperative cooking menu" to be described later, and is also an input key for selecting heating cooking in the heating chamber 113 using the oven heat source 188 and the microwave heat source 189.

When the input key 43MC is operated, the integrated display section 30 switches to a special display screen configuration. This point will be explained later.

The display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 is a single liquid crystal display screen in terms of hardware, but as shown in FIG. It is divided into 30R and displayed.

Among the three display areas, the display area 30L located on the left side will be referred to as the "first area" hereinafter. Further, the display area 30M located at the center will be referred to as a "second area" hereinafter. The display area 30R located on the right side will be referred to as the "third area" hereinafter. Note that this method of dividing and displaying one display screen into multiple sections has been proposed, for example, in Japanese Patent No. 5425171 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-172940, so a detailed explanation will be provided. Omitted.

43M1 is a pair of left and right input keys for switching the screen displayed in the first area 30L of the display screen 30D. The information displayed in the first area 30L is selected by the display drive circuit 63 according to the display program of the integrated control device MC.

When the left input key 43M1 of the two input keys 43M1 arranged on the left and right is operated, the display screen in the first area 30L moves forward, and the information displayed on the rear side is displayed in the front and back center. The display screen changes depending on the image displayed. That is, when the left input key 43M1 is operated once, one piece of desired display information can be selected from the display information group stored in the integrated control device MC. Note that the display screen itself does not actually move forward, but only visually appears to move forward.

Conversely, when the right input key 43M1 is operated once, the display screen in the first area 30L moves backwards, and instead, other information is displayed in the center of the front and back of the first display area. The display screen will change. In other words, even if the right input key 43M1 is operated, one of the "display information groups" defined by the display program of the integrated control device MC is selected, but the selection direction (selection order) of the information to be displayed is ) is reversed. The "display information group" here refers to the "control menu group" in the case of the first area 30L.

In this way, by operating either the right input key 43M1 or the left input key 43M1, the user can display desired information from the display information group in the center of the first area 30L. .

43M2 is a pair of input keys for switching the screen displayed in the second area 30M of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of the input keys 43M2, the display information in the second area 30M can be sequentially switched one by one, similarly to the input key 43M1.

43M3 is a pair of input keys for switching the screen displayed in the third area 30R of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of the input keys 43M3, the display information in the third area 30R can be sequentially switched one by one, similarly to the input key 43M1.

43MS is a touch input key that can command the start of microwave cooking and oven cooking using the heating chamber 113.
45MT is a touch input key that can conversely stop the microwave heating and oven heating operations. Note that, as is clear from FIG. 17, the ten input keys arranged on the central operation section 40M are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction.

When the operation key 98 of the main power switch is pressed to start cooking, for example, the five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R on the right operation section 40R do not always have an input function.

Similarly, in the left operation section 40L, the five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L do not always have an input function. The same applies to the central operation section 40M. In order to avoid unnecessary inputs, such as when the user touches something without recognizing it, the integrated control device MC immediately after starting the heating cooker 1, depending on the input process of cooking conditions and the progress of cooking, etc. Except for the input keys that require input, the input functions of other input keys are temporarily disabled so that no input is accepted.

Therefore, in order to show that the input function of each input key as described above is effective, as shown in FIGS. , 27M are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, in the right operation section 40R, individual light emitting sections 27R1 to 27R4 are arranged immediately behind five touch input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R. Since there is a pair of input keys 43R2 and 43R3, one individual light emitting section 27R2 is shared.

Each of the individual light emitting sections 27R1 to 27R4 has one or more light emitting diodes arranged below the right operation section 40R, and the display drive circuit 63 controls whether the individual light emitting sections 27R1 to 27R4 emit light or turn off the light. Ru. Alternatively, it is controlled to change the color of the emitted light.

For example, before the input key 43R1 (see FIG. 18) of the right operation section 40R is operated, the individual light emitting section 27R1 immediately adjacent to the rear of the input key 43R1 emits blue light. This indicates that operation input can be accepted.

When the user operates the input key 43R1 and the integrated control device MC accepts the input, the individual light emitting section 27R1 emits light in a unified color (red) to notify the user that the operation has been accepted. indicate. Control for this display is performed by the display drive circuit 63 based on commands from the integrated control device MC. Note that instead of emitting light in one color, the emitted light color may be changed from blue to red, for example, to indicate to the user that an operation is being accepted. This also applies to the individual light emitting sections 27M1 to 27M6 and 27L1 to 27L4, which will be described later.

Note that it is also possible to use a method in which the individual light emitting section 27R1 immediately adjacent to the input key 43R1 does not emit light before the input key 43R1 is operated, but starts emitting light when the input key 43R1 is operated, and continues emitting light. good. Alternatively, a method may be adopted in which only the fact that an operation input is possible is indicated by light emission in advance (at a stage before the operation), and the fact that the operation input has been accepted is not indicated by light. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the light blinks when an operation input is possible and is waiting for the input, and changes to continuous light emission when the operation input is accepted.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 19, in the left operation section 40L, individual light emitting sections 27L1 to 27L4 are arranged immediately behind the five touch input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L. Since there is a pair of input keys 43L2 and 43L3, one individual light emitting section 27L4 is shared.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, in the central operation unit 40M, individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are arranged immediately behind the ten touch input keys 43KP, 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, and 43MT. are doing.

The individual light emitting sections 27M1 to 27M6 each have one or more light emitting diodes arranged below the central operation section 40M, and the display drive circuit 63 allows the individual light emitting sections 27M1 to 27M6 to emit light in a unified color. The lighting and extinguishing of the light is controlled. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the light blinks when an operation input is possible and is waiting for the input, and changes to continuous light emission when the operation input is accepted. This will be explained in detail later with reference to FIG. 46.

The pair of input keys 43M1 share one individual light emitting section 27M3. Since each of the two input keys 43M2 and 43M3 is a pair, each of the individual light emitting parts 27M4 and 27M5 is shared. In the following description, when the individual light emitting parts in the central operation section 40M are collectively referred to, the reference numeral 27M is used.

As shown in FIG. 18, individual light emitting sections 27R5 are arranged. This individual light emitting section 27R5 is located adjacent to the right end of the right operating section 40R. Further, it is arranged directly behind the operation key (or operation button) 98 of the main power switch 97. The ON/OFF state of the main power switch 97 can be identified by the light emitted from the individual light emitting section 27R5.

The light emitting modes (continuous light emission, blinking, light emission color, etc.) of the light emission display parts 27R, 27L, and 27M as described above are different from the three operation input parts (40L, 40M, 40R) to avoid unnecessary confusion and misunderstandings by users. It is desirable to unify the Therefore, in the first embodiment, the light emission forms of the light emission display sections 27R, 27L, and 27M in the right operation section 40R, left operation section 40L, and center operation section 40M are unified.

In order to indicate that the input function of each input key is valid, there is a method to make the operation part of the input key itself emit light, but in that case, the light-emitting part is placed directly below the operation part of the input key, and the operation part It is necessary to manufacture it from a light-transmitting material, and there is also the issue of ensuring the sensitivity of the input key operation part, so there are many issues in terms of structure and cost. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the light-emitting display sections 27R, 27L, and 27M are provided at adjacent positions, avoiding the input key operation section, as described above. "Adjacent" here refers to a positional relationship where the two are close to each other when viewed from the user's perspective, such as the relationship between the input key 43R1 and the light-emitting display section 27R, and a one-to-one relationship can be instantly recognized. . Therefore, for example, the case where the space between the input key 43R1 and the light emitting display section 27R is partitioned off by a structure such as a wall projecting upward with respect to the surface of the input key 43R1 is excluded.

In FIG. 16, fire power display parts 67L and 67R are provided at rear positions of the right operating part 40R and the left operating part 40L to indicate the heat power level during induction heating cooking.
These thermal power display sections 67L and 67R indicate the thermal power level in the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL by emitting light (red). Nine levels of light are shown, from the minimum rated thermal power (firepower level 1: 150W) to the maximum rated thermal power (firepower level 9: 3200W).

The firepower display sections 67L and 67R are constituted by a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) installed in the space below the right operation section 40R and the left operation section 40L. The color of the emitted light may be changed depending on the amount of firepower. In the first embodiment, for example, firepower levels 1 and 2 are configured as follows.
(1) (Minimum) Firepower level 1: 1 red light, remaining 8 lights blue (2) Fire power level 2: 2 red lights, remaining 7 blue lights Note: The left end of fire power display sections 67L and 67R There is a heat retention display section that lights up an LED to display when the device is operated in the "warm retention mode" (see "display screen 3A" in Figure 41) that heats the object with a heat power lower than the minimum heat power level 1. 67H is provided.

On the left display section 31L, the heating power level value of the left heating section 17HL is displayed as numbers 1 to 9. When the minimum firepower level is 1, "1" is displayed, and when the maximum firepower level is 9, "9" is displayed. The firepower display on the left display portion 31L matches the firepower level displayed by the firepower display portion 67L, and is displayed at the same timing.

Also, on the right display section 31R, the heating power level value of the right heating section 17HR is displayed as numbers 1 to 9. The display conditions are exactly the same as those for the left display section 31L.

As can be seen from FIG. 16, the three light-emitting display sections 27L, 27M, and 27R and the two firepower display sections 67L and 67R are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction. Furthermore, the three light-emitting display sections 27L, 27M, and 27R and the two firepower display sections 67L and 67R are arranged in parallel also in the left-right direction.

In this way, the three light emitting display sections 27L, 27M, 27R and the two firepower display sections 67L, 67R are arranged in a straight line in the left and right direction behind the three input operation sections 40L, 40M, 40R. Because they are lined up, operability and visibility are good. Furthermore, the integrated display section 30, the left side display section 31L, and the right side display section 31R are also lined up in a straight line in the horizontal direction, making it easy to operate the entire cooking device 1 from the standpoint of a user standing in front of it. The design has good visibility and visibility.

In FIG. 16, reference numeral 68 denotes a heat source display section disposed behind the integrated display section 30.
Since a plurality of heat sources are used using the central operation section 40M, the heat source display section 68 displays the heat sources that are actually in operation using LED light.

In FIG. 17, the heat source display section 68 is composed of three display sections. The leftmost display section 68L is a display section that indicates that a microwave heating source 189 is being used, and near the front side there is a text indicating "Orange", making it easy to tell that the microwave heating is being used. I made it easy for you to understand.

The central display section 68M is a display section that indicates when "grill cooking" is being performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. The word "grill" is written on the front side to make it easy to tell that the food is grilled.

The rightmost display section 68R is a display section that indicates that "oven cooking" is being performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.

"Oven cooking" differs from grill cooking in that the temperature inside the heating chamber 113 is grasped and reflected (feedback) to the energization control of the upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B. These will be explained in detail later. Near the rightmost display section 68R, the word "oven" is displayed in letters, so that it can be easily recognized that cooking is being done in an oven.

In FIG. 16, numeral 69 is a high temperature alarm section provided immediately behind the heat source display section 68. The high temperature notification section 69 causes the LED light emitting section to emit light based on a command from the integrated control device MC, thereby indicating that the temperature monitoring target portion is at a high temperature.
The integrated control device MC issues a high temperature notification command based on temperature information from the heating chamber control unit 159 and a temperature detection circuit 93 that receives temperature detection signals from various temperature sensors, as will be described later.

Although the high temperature alarm section 69 is not shown in FIG. 15, it is shown in FIGS. 16 and 17.
The high temperature notification section 69 defines three temperature monitoring target parts: the left heating part 17HL, the heating chamber 113, and the right heating part 17HR, and displays the status of these temperature monitoring target parts individually. Therefore, for example, after induction heating cooking is performed in the left heating section 17HL, it is possible to alert the user that the area on the left side from the center of the top plate 15 corresponding to the left heating section 17HL is at a high temperature.

In order to shorten the period during which the high temperature notification section 69 is notifying the high temperature, for example, if the temperature of the top plate 15 is still high immediately after one induction heating cooking, the IH control section 90 The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 continue to operate to cool the internal space of the upper unit 100, that is, the upper space 300A, with outside air.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 15.
Reference numeral 47 is a touch-type input key for issuing an Internet connection command for requesting wireless communication from the integrated control device MC. Each time this input key 47 is pressed, the device is wirelessly connected to a home control device (not shown), which will be described later, and information from the outside can be obtained via the home control device.
46L and 46R are windows that transmit an infrared signal serving as a command signal for starting operation to a ventilation system (not shown) installed outside. An infrared transmitter 48 (see FIG. 25) is installed below this window. Note that, in reality, the windows 46L and 46R are covered with an inconspicuous surface sheet so that they cannot be seen from above the top plate 15. The sheet is naturally made of a material that is transparent to infrared signals.

In FIG. 15, 49 is a wireless communication unit (communication module), which is equipped with an antenna (not shown) and a transmitting/receiving circuit (not shown) for receiving radio waves from the outside and transmitting radio waves to the outside. . The wireless communication unit 49 is installed below the right end of the display board 41 with a slight distance from the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. The purpose of maintaining such a spacing is that if it comes too close to the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16, there is a concern that the reception sensitivity of radio waves will decrease.

In FIG. 15, CL1 is a center line passing through the left and right center points of the upper unit 100 in the front-rear direction, and AL is the range where the top plate 15 is exposed on the upper surface of the upper unit 100. Note that when installed on the kitchen furniture 2, the upper surface of the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 15 is exposed on the kitchen furniture 2. Therefore, the input operation unit 40 can also be operated from above, and the exhaust from the exhaust port side end portion 102E of the exhaust duct 102 can be similarly discharged above the kitchen furniture 2.

Next, the control means of the upper unit 100 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26.
In FIGS. 25 and 26, some of the configurations are omitted, and the filter circuit of the filter circuit board 54 is not shown.

FIG. 25 shows the control means of the upper unit 100 and the control means of the lower unit 200. In FIG. 26, only the main control means in FIG. 25 are extracted, and the exchange of control command signals, power supply relationships, etc. are indicated by arrows.

In FIG. 25, 97 is a main power switch that is opened and closed by the user, and is connected to a 200V commercial power source 99 via a power cord 106 (not shown) and a power plug (not shown). 91 is a power supply circuit to which electrical energy is supplied via the main power switch 97, and 92 is a DC power converter that converts AC power from a commercial power source into DC. This power supply circuit 91 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 55 (see FIG. 20).

MC is an integrated control device and has the function of a main controller or host computer. It is a control device mainly composed of a microcomputer. This integrated control device MC is supplied with a predetermined constant voltage current from the power supply circuit 91. Further, as described above, this integrated control device MC is located on the lower surface of the central operation board 32 (indicated by a broken line frame in FIG. 20). However, this may be arranged on the back (lower) side of the operation board 41. In any case, the integrated control device MC is built in the upper unit 100 and is not provided in the lower unit 200.

The integrated control device MC is composed of four parts: an input section, an output section, a storage section, and a CPU (arithmetic control section), and the storage section stores energization control programs for the three heating sources in advance. (stored). Furthermore, in addition to the storage section (ROM, RAM) of the microcomputer, a large-capacity storage device (main memory) MM for recording abnormality monitoring information is built-in.

Reference numeral 90 denotes an IH control section that controls control during induction heating, and is mainly configured with a microcomputer 90M1 (see FIG. 24). The IH control unit 90 stores in advance energization control programs corresponding to various cooking menus during induction heating. It also has a built-in storage device 90R for recording abnormality monitoring information.

Note that a second IH control section 90A (not shown) may be in charge of some of the functions of this IH control section 90. For example, a dedicated (second) microcomputer 90M2 (not shown) is mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 in addition to the first microcomputer 90M1, and the second microcomputer 90M2 The input and output control of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R may be made to be in charge.

Furthermore, in the upper unit 100, if another induction heating section (a central induction heating section, sometimes also referred to as a "center heating section") is added between the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL, , the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL mount the first microcomputer 90M1 on one inverter circuit board 80.
An inverter circuit board 80M (not shown) dedicated to the "central heating section" 17HM is provided. A second microcomputer 90M2 for the second IH control section 90A (not shown) may be mounted on this inverter circuit board 80M. In this case, an inverter circuit 81M (not shown) dedicated to the central heating section 17HM (not shown) is mounted on the inverter circuit board 80M (not shown). Therefore, a heat sink 82M (not shown) to which a switching element 83M (not shown) corresponding to a power control switching element 83 to be described later is mounted is also provided.

During all cooking operations such as induction heating cooking and microwave heating cooking, monitoring for the presence or absence of electrical abnormality is intensively carried out by the integrated control device MC.

In FIG. 25, 96 is a clock circuit also called a real-time clock, which is supplied with power from a dedicated power source (built-in battery) BT1 that is separate from the power supply circuit 91 connected to the main power switch 97, and is used for a long period of time. It is designed to be driven across the entire range. This may be a radio-controlled clock, for example, and always informs the current date and accurate time in seconds when requested by the integrated control device MC. There is. Therefore, even if the main power of the cooking device 1 is turned off and then turned on again, the time information of this clock circuit is not affected, and there is a function of always transmitting the latest correct time to the integrated control device MC. Therefore, the abnormality monitoring information recorded in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC is always recorded and saved at the same time with accurate time.

In FIG. 25, 72 is a power control section (also referred to as a "demand control section"). This power control unit 72 analyzes the command signal for induction heating or microwave heating from the integrated control device MC, and determines whether the total power consumption of the cooking device 1 is within the specified value or the upper limit individually set by the user. There is a function to monitor the total power consumption so that it does not exceed the specified value or an arbitrary set value, and there is a function to automatically limit the thermal power (power consumption) during induction heating or microwave heating so that the total power consumption does not exceed the specified value or arbitrary set value. .

Generally, a "demand control device" or "demand control device" refers to a device that controls the value of demand (power demand), automatically checks the power usage status, and if it is likely to exceed the set value, If you notify the user with an alarm, etc., and set the automatic stop of the equipment that can be stopped, the device itself will automatically stop the equipment that can be stopped as determined, and after a certain period of time, the electricity will be turned off. It is known as a device that automatically restores equipment, and is said to be very effective in managing power contracts with power companies in each household.

The power control unit 72 of the first embodiment is provided in order to provide the cooking device 1 itself with the power consumption suppressing function as described above. Note that the power control unit 72 may be provided as a control function in the integrated control device MC without providing any special hardware, or a demand control program may be built into the integrated control device MC from the beginning, or This can also be achieved by adding it later.

The power control unit 72 of the first embodiment can set the maximum power consumption of the cooking device 1 as a whole to only one out of three levels (5700W, 4800W, 4000W). Note that this setting can be made using the input operation section 40 while viewing the above-mentioned three-level numerical values displayed on the integrated display section 30 when a plurality of specific keys on the input operation section 40 are pressed at the same time. . Such a simple setting method is introduced in, for example, Japanese Patent No. 6012780. As explained in FIGS. 16 and 17, when the input key 43KP of the central operation section 40M is pressed, the integrated control device MC switches to the "function mode", and the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30 displays "peak mode". A display that allows you to perform "cut settings" and "HEMS registration settings" is displayed, so you can easily add additional settings for the total power consumption suppression function of the heating cooker 1, or change or cancel functions. You can do it.

73 is a signal transmission section provided for transmitting various control signals between the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200. For example, this applies to signal lines and connectors that can transmit signals by wire. Further, it may be an infrared communication unit, for example, so that signals can be sent and received wirelessly. Note that the signal transmission section 73 is also provided between the integrated control device MC and the IH control section 90.

The IH control section 90 obtains temperature information from the temperature detection circuit 93 and monitors whether the main parts of the upper unit 100 have an abnormally high temperature. For example, the central operation unit 40M is equipped with electronic components and semiconductor components corresponding to the various input keys 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, 43MT, etc., but since these components are relatively sensitive to heat, (for example, 60° C.) is monitored through a temperature detection circuit 93.

When the measured temperature exceeds the predetermined temperature, the IH control unit 90 determines that the device is in an "abnormal preliminary state." Note that the abnormal preliminary state is limited to cases where the detected temperature is in the range of 60°C to 65°C. When the temperature exceeds 65° C., the danger level increases and the IH control unit 90 recognizes it as a true abnormal state.

In this abnormal preliminary state, the induction heating operation does not stop immediately, but control is performed to lower the heating power of the induction heating. However, when the temperature exceeds 65° C., the IH control unit 90 determines that the temperature is abnormal and immediately stops the induction heating operation. Specifically, for example, when the IH coil being driven is the right IH coil 17R, the power supply of the inverter circuit 81R that is supplying high frequency power to the IH coil 17R is cut off.

In the abnormal preliminary state described above, the air blowing capacity of the motor 60M of the first cooling fan 60 and the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 cools the IH coil installation space CK of the upper unit 100 while maintaining the thermal power of induction heating. It may be improved by increasing each of them. Furthermore, it may be used in combination with measures to lower the heating power of induction heating.

Then, it shows the state of electrical and physical changes (temperature of the integrated display unit 30 mentioned above as an example) of the main parts during induction heating during at least the period from such an abnormal preliminary state to an emergency stop (abnormality monitoring). Information is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90.

In the above-mentioned abnormal preliminary state, the induction heating operation does not stop immediately, and the air blowing capacity of the motor 60M of the first cooling fan 60 or the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 is not increased (the rotation speed of the rotor blade is changed). Instead, it may be improved by forcibly lowering the heat power of the IH coils 17L and 17R.

The abnormality monitoring information stored in the storage device of the IH control unit 90 is acquired during a period from the time when the startup command is received from the integrated control device MC until the cooking is normally completed. Therefore, the "control menu" (for example, "boiling water," "boiling," "frying food," etc. in the case of the left operation unit 40L) and information on the heating power of induction heating are also recorded in chronological order. In the event of an emergency stop due to an abnormal condition, the abnormality monitoring information and information identifying the control menu up to that point will be stored in the storage device 90R in chronological order.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, in order to monitor the operation of the heating cooker 1 over a wider range and acquire data, all heating on the upper unit 100 and lower unit 200 sides is turned on after the main power switch 97 is turned on. The integrated control device MC acquires monitoring information regarding the cooking state. The integrated control device MC acquires monitoring information regarding the presence or absence of an abnormality from the heating chamber control section 159 and the microwave heating control section 130 via the signal transmission section 73.

In the inverter circuit board 80, one inverter circuit 81R dedicated to the right IH coil 17R and one inverter circuit 81L dedicated to the left IH coil 17L are mounted.

These two inverter circuits 81L and 81R are driven independently of each other by the IH control section 90. Note that when these inverter circuits are collectively referred to, the code "81" is used.

Details of the two inverter circuits 81L and 81R will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

In FIG. 25, reference numeral 95 denotes a speech synthesis device that synthesizes electronically created speech, and provides audio guidance to the user on operations and notifications when an abnormality occurs through a speaker 95S.

The temperature detection circuit 93 described above is connected to at least seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9. Specifically, temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 are used to detect the temperature of the top plate 15, the ambient temperature of the installation space CK of the IH coil 17, the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80, the temperature of the integrated display section 30, etc. There is. The temperature detection circuit 93 receives temperature detection information from each of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, and sends the temperature detection results to the IH control section 90.

The temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 may be of a non-contact type such as an infrared sensor or a contact type such as a thermistor, and may be used alone or in combination.

Among the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two temperature sensors TS3 and TS5 are non-contact sensors such as infrared sensors. These two temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 are arranged in respective gaps in the IH coils 17L and 17R, as shown in FIG. 15. Temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 receive infrared signals from the top plate 15 direction. That is, the temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 can measure the temperature of the bottom surface of the object N to be heated, such as a pot or a frying pan, without contact.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 use thermistors as contact sensors, and as shown in FIG. placed inside a cavity. These temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 are in direct contact with the lower surface of the top plate 15 or in contact with the lower surface of the top plate 15 via a thermally conductive inclusion. Thereby, the temperature of the top plate 15 can be measured.

Among the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, one temperature sensor TS7 (see FIG. 15) uses a thermistor as a contact type sensor, and is installed on the upper surface of the holder 50. Then, the ambient temperature of the integrated display section 30 and the input operation section 40 is detected. Further, the two temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 use thermistors. These two temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 are attached to the inclined surface of the heat sink 82 (front second heat sink 82F2, rear second heat sink 82B2), as described above.

The lower unit 200 side is also provided with at least two temperature sensors TS1 and TS2 in order to detect the internal space temperature of the lower unit 200, but the details will be explained later.

In FIG. 25, 62 is a cooling fan drive circuit, which controls the driving power of the driving motors 60M and 61M of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61. That is, under the control of the cooling fan drive circuit 62, the air blowing capacities of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are changed independently from each other in multiple stages.

In FIG. 25, reference numeral 63 denotes a display drive circuit, which can control the operations of the integrated display section 30, the left display section 31L, and the right display section 31R, and has a function of displaying necessary information.
The display drive circuit 63 may be configured by a dedicated microcomputer. Further, a control program (software) that performs the functions of the display unit drive circuit 63 may be incorporated into the integrated control device MC. The display drive circuit 63 is mounted on the upper surface of the operation board 41 (see FIG. 20).

In FIG. 25, 84 is a vibration sensing device that detects shaking when an earthquake occurs, and when it senses a seismic intensity (acceleration) or higher than a predetermined seismic intensity, it sends a vibration sensing signal to the integrated control device MC. Upon receiving this signal, it determines that an earthquake has occurred, and immediately shuts off the power to all heating means in use.

In FIG. 25, reference numeral 49 denotes the wireless communication section 49 also shown in FIG. 15, which transmits information in response to instructions from the integrated control device MC. Further, it receives instructions from the integrated control device MC and acquires information from the outside.

(Lower unit 200)
Next, the lower unit 200 will be explained.
In FIGS. 8 to 11, 101 is a lower case (lower housing) that constitutes the outer shell of the main body 110 of the lower unit 200. The lower case 101 is formed by pressing a single metal thin plate such as a galvanized steel plate, or by joining a plurality of metal thin plates together using spot welding, screws, or the like. In the first embodiment, as explained below, it is composed of three thin metal plates.

101H is a body that constitutes three surfaces (vertical surfaces) of the rear and left and right portions of the lower case 101, and 101U is a flat bottom plate that completely closes the bottom opening of the body 101U. Reference numeral 101C denotes a sloped portion, which is a wall surface that slopes forward as it goes downward so as not to hit the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 when the heating cooker 1 is installed on the kitchen furniture 2.

In FIG. 11, 101F is a front plate that constitutes the front surface of the lower case 101, and is a single flat plate as a whole. When the door 114 is closed, the front surface of the front plate 101F is in close contact with the rear surface of the door 114, and microwaves do not leak from the gap between the front plate 101F and the door 114.
Reference numeral 101B denotes a rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) that continues and stands up vertically from the upper end of the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101.

Lower unit 200 includes two independent heating sources. One of them is the microwave heating source 189 of the microwave heating device 120. The other is the oven heating source 188 of the oven heating device 140. The oven heat source 188 heats the heating chamber (oven chamber) 113 from the outside of its wall surface, but it may also be a source that exists inside the heating chamber 113 and directly heats the food to be cooked. In the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, the "microwave heating source 189" will be explained on the premise that the "inverter circuit board 121" described later is not included.

8, FIG. 10, and FIG. 11 show the main parts of the microwave heating device 120.
Starting from the front, they are installed in the following order.
An inverter circuit board 121 (see FIG. 10) on which an inverter circuit 121A (see FIG. 25) is mounted is arranged at the most forward side.

Behind this inverter circuit board 121, a magnetron 122 serving as a microwave generation source and a waveguide 123 surrounding an oscillation section 122A of the magnetron 122 are arranged.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11, an antenna case 124 connected to the waveguide 123 is arranged in front of the waveguide 123, and an antenna 125 is arranged inside this antenna case.
A motor 126 that rotates or rotates the antenna 125 during microwave heating is arranged behind the antenna case 124 (see FIG. 11).

In FIGS. 8 and 9, 127 is a power circuit board that supplies power to the magnetron 122, and includes a power circuit section 120P (not shown) that receives commercial power from the filter circuit 54, and a microwave heating circuit board to be described later. A control unit 130 (see FIG. 25) is mounted.

8 and 9, 128 is a third cooling fan (one of the lower cooling fans, sometimes referred to as "cooling fan A"), which is a box-shaped case that houses the inverter circuit board 121. It is located directly below A150. The entire lower surface of the case A150 is open. In other words, it is box-shaped with no bottom surface.

129 is a fourth cooling fan (one of the lower cooling fans; sometimes referred to as "cooling fan B"), which is arranged directly below the box-shaped case B151 in which the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 is mounted. has been done. Several heat radiating fins are formed in parallel in the heat radiating portion 122H, through which cooling air from the fourth cooling fan 129 passes. Case B151 has a box shape with the entire lower surface open and no bottom surface.

The case A150 constitutes one of the inlet ends of the lower air passage UH.
As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the case A150 has a vertical portion 308 that extends vertically away from the side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 at a position directly above the air intake port 152F.
The inverter circuit board 121 for the microwave heating source 188 is configured to be housed in the vertical portion 308 in the vertical direction.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are, for example, axial fans. The rotor blade is supported by the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 so that the rotation axis at the center of the rotor blade is in the vertical (vertical) direction.

When the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same rating specifications, the procurement cost during manufacturing can be reduced. Note that if cooling fans with the same specifications are arranged and operated in parallel, there is a high possibility that humming will occur, so as a countermeasure against humming, the rotation speeds of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are controlled to different values. It may be done.

As described above, the case A 150 and the case B 151 have their entire bottoms open, and the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are arranged to lie inside the openings, respectively.

In FIG. 8, the wind direction plates 199 provided in two rows inside the case A150 are integrally or separately formed inside the case A150. This wind direction plate 199 is installed to efficiently flow cooling air from the third cooling fan 128 to the inverter circuit board 121 and two communication ports 138A and 138B, which will be described later.

Reference numeral 152F indicates a front air intake port, which is formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. This intake port is composed of a large number of small circular through holes, or rectangular or oval through holes. This intake port 152F is for the third cooling fan 128.

Reference numeral 152B represents an intake port on the rear side, which is formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. This intake port is composed of a large number of small circular through holes, or rectangular or oval through holes. This intake port 152B is for the fourth cooling fan 129.

A ventilation hole (first intake port) 164 for introducing outside air for cooling the induction heating source 9 into the inside of the upper unit 100 and an outside air for cooling the microwave heating source 189 into the inside of the lower unit 200. The second air intake ports 152B and 152F are arranged on opposite sides of the heating chamber 113. That is, as is clear from FIG. 10, when the cooking device 1 is viewed from the front side, the second intake ports 152B and 152F are located on the right side with the heating chamber 113 in between, and the ventilation hole is located on the left side. There are a (first intake port) 164 and a ventilation hole 64.

A duct 153 is installed above the heat radiating section 122H, and guides the cooling air RF6 from the fourth cooling fan 129 that has passed through the heat radiating section 122H to the downstream side as shown in FIG. 12.

In FIGS. 8 and 9, 154 is a case C, which houses the power supply circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control unit 130 in a sealed state. This case 154 is made of a plastic material with high electrical insulation properties.
The case C154 is constructed by overlapping two parts: a lid 154A on the rear side and a container-shaped or box-shaped main body 154B on the front side. A large opening formed on the front side of the main body 154B is closed from the rear side by the lid 154A.

In the case C154, a power circuit board 127 and a board (not shown) to which a microwave heating control unit 130 (see FIG. 25) is attached are attached to a main body 154B on the front side. At the time of maintenance and inspection, the lid 154A is opened to allow various inspections and repairs of the power supply circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control section 130 inside.

This case C154 is installed as far away from the back of the heating chamber 113 as possible so as not to be affected by the heat from the heating chamber 113. It is also installed away from the bottom plate 101U, so that even if liquid such as water or cooking liquid enters the inside of the lower case 101 from the upper unit 100 side, the electrical insulation will not be impaired. ing.

As explained in FIG. 8, the cavity 104 is the space in which the facing distance between the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 is the largest.
The depth (vertical) dimension of the cavity 104 is indicated by the symbol BH in FIG.

In the cavity 104, a waveguide 123 that constitutes a part of a microwave heating device 120, which will be described later, is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113, and behind the waveguide 123, A case C154 for housing the power supply circuit board 127 on which circuit components for supplying power to the microwave heating control section 130 are mounted is arranged long in the left-right direction.

As explained in FIG. 8, the front horizontal wall 101T made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101 is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101 backward. The support fitting 198 on the lower case 101 side is fixed to the upper case 16.

To realize the closure detection section 139 shown in FIG. 25, as shown in FIG. 9, a door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 for preventing radio wave leakage during microwave heating is provided.
In order to ensure the safety of the microwave heating device, it is legally required to include a door opening/closing detection mechanism 131. A typical door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 of this type is known from patent documents such as Japanese Patent No. 4372099 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-214147.

According to the patent document, the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 includes three types of switches: a latch switch, a door switch, and a monitor switch, and these switches are linked to the opening/closing of the door to detect opening/closing with a time difference. It is proposed that.

Furthermore, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-214147, a first interlock switch and a second interlock switch are used to open and close the power supply of an inverter circuit, and when the first interlock switch is short-circuited, the first interlock switch is inserted into the power supply circuit. It has been proposed to provide a monitor switch in order to turn off the fuse.

8 and 9 show the main parts of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 employed in the first embodiment. In these figures, 132A is a latch switch, and 132B is a door switch. Although not shown, a monitor is provided to cut off the power to the inverter circuit 121A mounted on the inverter circuit board 121 when either or both of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B are not opened due to an abnormality. A switch 133 (not shown) is also provided.

The latch switch 132A is pressed by a protruding pin 134 fixed to the door 114 side, and a built-in contact is opened and closed. The door switch 132B is pushed by a protruding pin 135 fixed to the door 114 side, and a built-in contact is opened and closed.

136A is an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the latch switch 132A, and is biased toward the door by a compression spring so that it always returns to the door.
136B is an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the door switch 132B, and is biased toward the door by a compression spring so that it always returns to the door side.

In FIGS. 8 and 9, 137 is a support plate to which the latch switch 132A, door switch 132B, monitor switch 133 (not shown), interlocking rods 136A, 136B, etc. are collectively attached. This support plate 137 is fixed to the lower case 101 with a plurality of screws. The door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 is configured mainly of various switches mounted on the support plate 137 in this manner.

If variations occur in the mounting positions of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B during the manufacturing process, there is concern that the timing of operating each switch may deviate from the specified value. Therefore, in the first embodiment, a closure detection section 139 (see FIG. 25) for the door 114, which will be described later, is attached to the support plate 137, so that the entire support plate 137 can be removed. Specifically, as described above, the support plate 137 is firmly fixed to the lower case 101 with a plurality of screws. During manufacturing or after-sales service, the operation of the closure detection section 139 can be checked, adjusted, replaced, etc.

In FIGS. 8 and 10, 138A is a communication port formed in the upper part of the case A150 housing the inverter circuit board 121, and 138B is a communication port formed in the upper and lower intermediate portions of the case A150.

The communication port 138A guides a portion of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to a space 141, which will be described later, as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10, the communication port 138B guides a portion of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to a space 142, which will be described later, and is used for cooling an infrared temperature sensor 160, which will be described later. There is.

The temperature sensor 160 includes a hollow sensor case, a sensor board housed inside the sensor case, one or more infrared detection elements mounted on the surface of the sensor board, and a sensor facing the infrared detection elements. The main components include a lens that is attached and fixed to the sensor case. Note that the temperature sensor 160 may be provided at multiple locations in the heating chamber 113 to enable temperature detection over a wide range, or the direction of the temperature sensor 160 may not be fixed, but may be automatically swung within a certain angle range. It may also be possible to detect temperature at a wide angle. For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-54250, which is a Japanese patent document, proposes the use of a plurality of temperature sensors.

In FIG. 10, reference numeral 161 denotes a detection window through which the temperature sensor 160 is exposed, and a gap may be formed between the detection window and the outer peripheral surface of the temperature sensor 160 through which cooling air passes. In the first embodiment, a gap of approximately several mm is formed.

In FIGS. 10 and 11, 162 is a cooking plate made of porcelain or heat-resistant plastic. This cooking plate 162 is formed to have an external dimension such that it can be taken out or put in through the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

In FIG. 10, HV is the effective height dimension from the upper surface of the cooking plate 162 to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113.
In FIG. 11, HX is the maximum height dimension from the top surface of the cooking plate 162 to the ceiling surface of the recess 113T formed in the center of the heating chamber 113. In this first embodiment, the effective height dimension HV is 94 mm, and the maximum height dimension HX is 100 mm. This is just one example, and the present invention is not limited to this size configuration.

In FIG. 10, WH is the inner width dimension of the heating chamber 113. Since the heating chamber 113 is formed up to the front opening 113A with this inner width dimension, it can also be said that the frontage dimension determines whether or not an object to be cooked or a cooking utensil such as a frying pan can be inserted. This inner width dimension WH is 310 mm.

In FIG. 11, WB is the depth dimension of the heating chamber 113. Similar to the width dimension WH (see FIG. 10), it can be said that this dimension determines whether or not an object to be cooked, a cooking plate 162, a cooking utensil such as a frying pan, etc. can be inserted. This depth dimension WB is approximately 310 mm.

163 is an electric radiation type heater that heats the heating chamber 113 from the outside, and is, for example, a sheathed heater or a mica heater in the form of a heater wire (for example, carbon heater wire) wrapped around the entire thin mica support plate. .

The heater 163 is composed of two parts: an upper heater 163A and a lower heater 163B. The energization of these two heaters 163A and 163B is controlled independently of each other.
163A is an upper heater that is fixed tightly or close to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, and 163B is a lower heater that is fixed tightly or close to the bottom surface of the heating chamber 113. .

For the upper heater 163A, multiple levels of thermal power can be selected from a maximum thermal power of 1000W to a minimum thermal power of 50W. The lower heater also allows you to select multiple levels of heating power from a maximum heating power of 1000W to a minimum heating power of 50W.

In FIG. 10, 166R is a right partition plate vertically installed to form a gap GP5R with the right side wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is formed from a thin metal plate.
166L is a left side partition plate installed vertically to form a gap GP5L between it and the left side wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is formed from a thin metal plate.
A heat insulating material (not shown) is inserted into the gaps GP5L and GP5R on the left and right sides of the heating chamber 113 to suppress heat conduction (radiation) from the heating chamber 113.

Reference numeral 167 denotes an upper heat shield plate that covers the entire upper part of the upper heater 163A, and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.
GP6 is a gap formed between the upper heat shield plate 167 and the upper heater 163A, and its size is approximately several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP6 is a closed space so that there is no circulation of air with the outside. The peripheral edge of the upper heat shield plate 167 is tightly fixed to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, with the upper edges of the right side partition plate 166R and left side partition plate 166L sandwiched therebetween.

Reference numeral 168 denotes a lower heat shield plate having a longitudinal cross-sectional shape that is vertically symmetrical to the upper heat shield plate 167. This lower heat shield plate covers the entire lower part of the lower heater 163B, and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.

GP7 is a gap formed between the lower heat shield plate 168 and the lower heater 163B, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. This gap is a closed space so that air does not circulate with the outside. The peripheral edge of the lower heat shield plate 168 is tightly fixed to the bottom wall surface of the heating chamber 113 with the lower edges of the right partition plate 166R and left partition plate 166L sandwiched therebetween.

Reference numeral 169 denotes an upper case that is stacked on the periphery of the upper heat shield plate 167 so as to cover the entire upper part of the upper heat shield plate 167. Reference numeral 170 denotes a lower case that is stacked on the periphery of the lower heat shield plate 168 so as to cover the entire lower part of the lower heat shield plate 168.

As shown in FIG. 10, the upper case 169 and the lower case 170 have vertical cross-sectional shapes that are vertically symmetrical, and are made of thin metal plates or heat-resistant plastic. GP8 is a gap formed between the upper case 169 and the upper heat shield plate 167, and its size is approximately several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP8 is a closed space so that there is no circulation of air between it and the outside.

GP9 is a gap formed between the lower case 170 and the lower heat shield plate 168, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP9 is also a closed space so that there is no air circulation.

A sheet or plate-shaped heat insulating material 175A (not shown) is placed in the gap GP6. Similarly, a sheet or plate-shaped heat insulating material 175B (not shown) is placed in the gap GP8.

A sheet or plate-shaped heat insulating material 175C (not shown) is placed in the gap GP7. Similarly, a sheet or plate-shaped heat insulating material 175D (not shown) is arranged inside the GP 9. When each of these heat insulating materials 175A to 175D has a multi-layered structure instead of a single layer structure, the heat insulating performance is further improved. Note that the planar size (vertical and horizontal dimensions) of each of the heat insulating materials 175A to 17D is larger than at least the respective installation ranges of the upper heater 163 and the lower heater 163B.

In FIG. 10, reference numeral 171 denotes a partition plate that defines a passage 172 above the upper case 169 through which the cooling air RF5 flows. A communication port 173 is open in the upper part of the rear wall of the partition plate 171, and the inlet end of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to the communication port 173.

In FIG. 11, 174 is a communication port formed in the rear part of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, and the inlet of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to this communication port 174. 102E (see FIG. 11) is a terminal end serving as the final outlet of the cooling air.

As shown in FIG. 11, the exhaust duct 102 has two upper and lower independent internal passages 102A and 102B, of which the upper internal passage 102A is used to cool the inverter circuit board 121. After that, the cooling air RF5 flows.
In addition, cooling air RF6 whose temperature has been increased by being introduced into the heating chamber 113 flows through the other internal passage 102B.

As will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 27, the exhaust duct 102 has an internal passage (internal path) 102A passing through the outside of the heating chamber 113 and an internal passage (internal path) 102B passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113. This is the part that merges.

In the exhaust duct 102, the outlet of the cooling air RF5 has a small passage cross-sectional area, so the wind speed of the cooling air RF5 increases at the outlet. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 is attracted by the cooling air RF5 in the vicinity of the outlet. Due to this action, the gas inside the heating chamber 113 is sucked into the internal passage 102B.
As a result, both the two cooling air RF5 and RF6 are efficiently discharged to the outside of the cooking device 1 from the exhaust port 20. Note that such a guiding structure may not be employed, and a method may be adopted in which the cooling air RF5 and the cooling air RF6 are combined at an upstream stage before entering the exhaust duct 102.

In FIG. 11, 180 is a large power supply port formed on the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113, and 181 is a cover that closes the power supply port 180 from the outside, and is made of heat-resistant plastic that transmits microwaves. It is formed into a plate shape from heat-resistant glass.

The cover 181 is tightly fixed to the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B. The antenna case 124 is fixed to the back wall 113B of the heating chamber 113 so as to cover the entire back side of the cover 181. The cover 181 is inserted inside the front opening of the antenna case 124, as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11, 123 is a waveguide connected to the back side of the cover 181. The antenna driving motor 126 is thus fixed to the back side of the waveguide 123 via the heat-resistant sealing material 184.

126A is a rotation axis of the antenna drive motor 126, and is installed horizontally in the front-rear direction. The antenna 125 is fixed to the free end (front end) of the rotation shaft 126A. Note that the rotation shaft 126A is made of plastic or ceramic material. However, it is possible to change such materials and make only a certain range from the antenna 125 side made of metal, and from there to the antenna drive motor 126 be made of a material with high heat resistance and insulation such as plastic or ceramic. good.

In FIG. 11, reference numeral 185 is a radio wave sealing chamber formed around the rotating shaft 126A with predetermined dimensions. This radio wave sealing room has a so-called choke room structure. Furthermore, in order to more effectively prevent microwave leakage, a radio wave absorber (not shown) is placed closer to the antenna drive motor 126 than the choke structure, so that microwaves from around the rotating shaft 126A are absorbed. You may try to prevent leakage. The choke structure in a microwave heating device is described in Japanese patent documents such as JP-A No. 2011-174669, JP-A No. 2010-255978, and JP-A No. 63-172828 (1/4 wavelength choke structure). A detailed explanation will be omitted, as there are various cases such as the combined use of a chamber and a radio wave absorber), etc.

In FIG. 11, LA indicates the dimension from the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113 to the rearmost end of the antenna drive motor 126. Hereinafter, this dimension will be referred to as a "projection dimension." Although it is desirable to reduce this protrusion dimension LA, in reality, as mentioned above, the dimensions of the antenna case 124 and the radio wave seal chamber 185 are also required, and even if the external dimensions of the antenna drive motor 126 are reduced, there is a limit. There is. This protrusion dimension LA is 70 mm.

In FIG. 11, GP10 is a gap between the back surface of the antenna drive motor 126 and the inclined part 101C of the lower case 101, and is 69 mm at the upper end of the motor 126, and conversely, the gap between the lower end and the lower case 101C is 53 mm. That's about it. Due to the dimensions, it is impossible to arrange the case C154 in this gap GP10. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the case C154 is disposed so as to be shifted to the right from directly behind (behind) the antenna drive motor 126.
This makes it possible to house the microwave heating device 120 in a narrow space behind the heating chamber 113.

Next, the internal structure of the door 114 will be explained.
In FIG. 11, 190 is a frame made of metal or plastic that constitutes the outer shell of the door 114, and is shaped like a picture frame when viewed from the front side. Reference numeral 192 denotes an inner frame, which is made of a metal plate. An opening serving as a viewing window 192W is formed in the center of the inner frame 192.

191 is a cover whose outer peripheral edge is fixed between the inner frame 192 and the frame 190 so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 192; It is made of plastic, glass, etc.

Reference numeral 193 denotes an inner sealing frame in which countless small holes are formed in a portion corresponding to the viewing window 192W, the size of which does not allow microwaves to pass through. This inner seal frame is entirely formed by press-molding a thin metal plate, and a choke chamber 194 having an entrance (slit) formed on the heating chamber 113 side is formed at the outer peripheral edge.

195 is a seal plate made of a thin metal plate. The outer peripheral edge of the seal plate 195 is continuously curved toward the inner seal frame 193, as shown in FIG. The choke chamber 194 is a space surrounded by the outer peripheral edge of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193.

When the door 114 is completely closed, both the outer peripheral edge of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193 are in contact with the surface of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. Therefore, the microwaves supplied to the inside of the heating chamber 113 do not leak from the door 114 and the opening 113A at the front of the heating chamber 113.

Reference numeral 196 denotes a transparent seal plate provided inside a portion of the inner frame 192 corresponding to the viewing window 192W, and is made of heat-resistant glass. 197 is a metal upper shielding plate that extends along the upper surface of the door 114 and has a width dimension that is at least equal to the width of the door 114. This upper shielding plate 197 is provided in the shape of an eave close to the upper surface of the door 114, and is fixed to the lower case 101 with a fixing device such as a metal screw so as to be electrically connected to the lower case 101.

Since the lower portion of the door 114 is supported by the hinge 176 (see FIG. 8) on the lower case 101, the door 114 can be opened to a horizontal position by holding the handle portion 115 and pulling it toward you.
At the initial stage of opening, there is a concern that a gap may momentarily occur in the overlapping portion of the door 114 and the lower case 101, causing a portion of the microwave to leak. Accordingly, such unnecessary leakage of microwaves can be suppressed above the door 114.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, H10 is the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16, considering that the height dimension C1 of the front downward part 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 is recommended to be 40 mm or less, as explained in FIG. It is the height dimension from the bottom surface of the flange 16A. In this first embodiment, the distance is set to 40 mm.

As mentioned above, since the height C1 of the front lowered part 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 and the height H10 below the flange 16A of the upper case 16 are the same (40 mm), when installed on the kitchen furniture 2, The upper case 16 does not protrude below the lower front portion 2F. Therefore, the space below the upper case 16 is larger than that of the conventional case, which is also advantageous when installing the lower case 101 as described below.

Next, in FIG. 13, reference numeral 201 is an introduction port formed in the front part of the right side wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is formed of a large number of holes with a small diameter so that microwaves do not leak. The reason why the introduction port 201 is provided in the front part of the right side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 is to suppress fogging of the viewing window 192W of the door 114. From this inlet 201, a portion of the cooling air RF6 is supplied to the vicinity of the inside of the door 114. Therefore, fogging of the viewing window 192W of the door 114 is suppressed.
Cooling air RF6 after cooling the heat radiation part 122H of the magnetron 122 is guided to the introduction port 201 by the gap GP5R.

The temperature sensor 160 is located upstream of the inlet 201 in the flow of the cooling air RF6, and a portion of the cooling air RF6 is blown out into the heating chamber 113 at the temperature sensor 160. The amount of cooling air RF6 reaching the inlet 201 is small. However, the purpose of introducing air through the inlet 201 is to "suppress fogging" of the seal plate 196 inside the door 114, and there is no problem with a small amount of air. Note that it is not necessary to supply air from a narrow gap around the temperature sensor 160.

Next, details of various control means in the lower unit 200 will be explained with reference to the block diagram shown in FIG. 25 again.
The microwave heating control unit 130 controls the power supplied to the inverter circuit 121A of the inverter circuit board 121, the magnetron 122, the antenna drive motor 126, and the two cooling fans 128 and 129, and starts their operation. , to control stoppage, operating conditions, etc.

The power supply circuit of this microwave heating control section 130 is prepared separately from the power supply circuit 91 mounted on the power supply circuit board 55, and is a dedicated circuit for the microwave heating device 120. Note that power may be supplied from the power supply circuit 91.
The power supply circuit of the microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 8). Various electric components (diodes, etc.) for converting AC power into DC are mounted on the power supply circuit board 127, and are housed in a sealed state in the case C154.

When the microwave heating control unit 130 receives a command signal from the power control unit 72, it operates to reduce the total power consumption of the microwave heating device 120 in accordance with the command signal, and reduces the output of the magnetron 122. It has a function of transmitting a command signal to lower the inverter circuit 121A.

The microwave heating control section 130 is equipped with a temperature sensor TS1 that detects the temperature of the heat radiation section 122H of the magnetron 122.
If the temperature of the heat radiation part 122H of the magnetron 122 is higher than a specified value even after the microwave cooking is finished, the microwave heating control unit 130 issues a command to continue operating the fourth cooling fan 129 until the temperature drops. A signal is transmitted to the fourth cooling fan 129.

Reference numeral 139 denotes a closure detection unit for the door 114. The closure detection unit 139 detects the opening/closing status of one or more of the latch switch 132A, the second door switch 132B, and the monitor switch 133 (not shown) based on the current flowing through each circuit or the opening/closing signal. .

Since the circuit board constituting the closure detection section 139 is attached to the support plate 137, the support plate 137 can be removed and inspected, or the circuit board can be measured while it is installed to check whether it is operating normally. can be inspected (see Figures 8 and 9).

In FIG. 25, 158 is a non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, and is connected to the temperature sensor 160 and this temperature sensor. The sensor is comprised of a circuit (not shown) that analyzes the measurement signal and converts it into temperature information.

The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the electric power supplied to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and controls the start and stop of their operation, operating conditions (thermal power, ie, amount of heat generated), etc. The control circuit of this heating chamber control section 159 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 9).

When the heating chamber control unit 159 receives a command signal from the power control unit 72, it operates in accordance with the command signal to reduce the total power consumption of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. That is, the heating chamber control unit 159 has a function of transmitting a command signal to lower the output of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163. In addition, in order to lower the output of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163, the heating chamber control unit 159 also changes the energization rate per unit time to change the substantial thermal power.

Next, a configuration example of a drive circuit for the IH coils 17L and 17R of the cooking device 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 28.
To simplify the explanation, FIG. 28 is an example of a circuit in which only one IH coil 17R is shown. That is, the inverter circuit 81R and drive circuit 74 of the right heating section 17HR are shown as one induction heating section. The inverter circuit 81L (not shown) and drive circuit 74 (not shown) of the left heating section 17HL also employ the same configuration as in FIG. 28.

In the heating cooker 1, the drive circuit 74 supplies high frequency power to each IH coil 17L, 17R, thereby performing an induction heating operation.
The drive circuit 74 is provided for each IH coil. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the drive circuit 74 of the IH coil 17R. The drive circuit for the left IH coil 17L may be the same or different. The following description will be made on the assumption that they are the same.

As shown in FIG. 28, the drive circuit 74 includes a DC power supply circuit 75, an inverter circuit 81R, a resonance capacitor 76, an input current detection section 77a, and an output current detection section 77b.
Current detection data from the input current detection section 77a and the output current detection section 77b are sent to the IH control section 90.

The input current detection section 77a and the output current detection section 77b are generally called a "current transformer". 39A is a signal line that transmits the current value detected by the input current detection section 77a, and is connected to the IH control section 90. 39B is a signal line that transmits the current value detected by the output current detection section 77b, and is connected to the IH control section 90. Note that the currents (signals) transmitted from the input current detection section 77a and the output current detection section 77b to the IH control section 90 via the signal lines 39A and 39B are low voltages of several volts or less. Further, these signal lines 39A and 39B are not independent electric wires, but wiring formed by printing on the surface (upper surface) of the inverter circuit board 80.

The input current detection unit 77a detects the current input from the AC power supply 99 to the DC power supply circuit 22, that is, the current input to the drive circuit 74, and sends a voltage signal indicating the detected value, that is, the input current value to the IH control unit 90. Output to. 99 is a commercial AC power supply.

The DC power supply circuit 75 includes a diode bridge 78a, a reactor 78b, and a smoothing capacitor 78c. The DC power supply circuit 75 converts the AC voltage input from the AC power supply 99 into a DC voltage, and outputs the DC voltage to the inverter circuit 81R.

The inverter circuit 81R is a so-called half-bridge inverter in which the IGBTs 79a and 79b as the switching elements 83 are connected in series to the output of the DC power supply circuit 75.

In the inverter circuit 81R, diodes 79c and 79d as flywheel diodes are connected in parallel with the IGBTs 79a and 79b, respectively.
The inverter 81R converts the DC power output from the DC power supply circuit 75 into high-frequency AC power of about 20 kHz to 80 kHz, so-called high-frequency power, and supplies it to a resonant circuit including the IH coil 17R and the resonant capacitor 76.

The resonant circuit including the resonant capacitor 76 has a resonant frequency depending on the inductance of the IH coil 17R, the capacitance of the resonant capacitor 76, and the like.

With this configuration, a high-frequency current of about several tens of amperes flows through the IH coil 17R, and the high-frequency magnetic flux generated by the flowing high-frequency current causes the object to be heated N on the top plate 15 directly above the IH coil 17R (see Fig. (not shown) is heated by induction.

The IGBTs 79a and 79b are made of, for example, a silicon-based semiconductor, but may also be made of a wide bandgap semiconductor such as silicon carbide or gallium nitride-based material.

The power control switching element 83 explained in FIG. 8 is the IGBT 79a, 79b in FIG. 23.
By using a wide bandgap semiconductor for this IGBT, it is possible to reduce the conduction loss as a switching element. Further, even if the switching frequency, that is, the driving frequency is set to a high frequency and the switching operation is performed at a high speed, heat dissipation becomes good. Therefore, the radiation fins of the heat sink 82 to which the switching elements (IGBTs) 79a and 79b are attached can be made smaller, and the drive unit can be made smaller and lower in cost.

The output current detection section 77b is connected to a resonant circuit including an IH coil 17R and a resonant capacitor 76. The output current detection unit 77b detects, for example, the current flowing through the IH coil 17R, that is, the current output from the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal corresponding to the detected value to the IH control unit 90. Although this configuration has been described using a half-bridge type inverter, the circuit that drives the IH coil 17R may be a full-bridge type inverter. Further, although the circuit explained with reference to FIG. 28 is a current resonance type, a voltage resonance type may be adopted.

In FIG. 28, the wireless communication unit 49, as described in FIG. It is a wireless communication means for communicating and can send and receive wireless signals.

The home control device can also be connected to a high-performance portable information terminal such as a smartphone, a tablet-type terminal device, etc. via a public wireless communication network such as the Internet. Note that an example of a home control device is a power management device called a HEMS controller. In this first embodiment, as explained in FIGS. 15 and 16, the integrated control device MC can be switched to the "function mode" by pressing the input key 43KP of the central operation section 40M. Then, while viewing the "HEMS registration settings" on the integrated display screen 30, the cooking device 1 can be registered as a device to be controlled by the HEMS.

The wireless communication unit 49 is connected to the integrated control device MC by communication wiring, but the longer the wiring is, the more susceptible it is to noise, so the wireless communication unit 49 and the integrated control device MC are placed close together, and It is desirable to shorten the wiring connecting the communication section 49 and the integrated control device MC.

Considering the influence of noise described above, in the first embodiment, the wireless communication section 49 is installed at the right end of the input operation section 40. Specifically, the wireless communication section 49 is installed at the right end of the operation board 41. Further, the integrated control device MC is installed at the left and right center of the input operation unit 40 (see FIGS. 15 and 21).

The wireless communication unit 49 has an internal antenna unit that transmits or receives wireless signals, or transmits and receives wireless signals.In order to make it easier to transmit and receive wireless signals, the antenna unit of the wireless communication unit 49 is located directly below the top plate 15. It is desirable to arrange it so that

Next, the configuration of the cooling air passage, which is one of the features of the present invention, will be explained.
In the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the inside of the main body case HC installed in the kitchen furniture 2 is formed by the bottom wall surface 16S of the metal upper case 16 into an upper space 300A and below the partition wall. It is divided into two spaces: a lower space 300B and a lower space 300B. In other words, the bottom wall surface functions as a "partition wall" 16S, dividing the inside of the main body case HC into two spaces, upper and lower (see FIG. 8).

The upper air passage AH that guides cooling air to the IH coils 17L and 17R accommodated in the upper space 300A and the inverter circuit board 80 for the IH coils is connected to the ventilation hole 64 that passes through the partition wall 16S. Outside air is introduced from the outside of the lower case 101 through the lower case 101 .

On the other hand, a lower air passage UH for guiding cooling air for the microwave heating device 120 is formed in the lower space 300B. The heat radiation section 122H of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged in the lower air passage UH. The heat radiation section 122H is cooled by outside air introduced from the second air intake port 152B formed at the right end of the bottom surface of the lower case 101. Further, the inverter circuit board 121 of the microwave heating device 120 is cooled by the outside air introduced from the second air intake port 152F formed at the right end of the bottom surface of the lower case 101.

The cooling air flowing through the upper air passage AH and the cooling air flowing through the lower air passage UH do not merge in the middle. The cooling air inside the upper unit 100 is discharged into the gap GP1 located behind the partition plate 52, and is discharged to the outside of the cooking device 1 from the exhaust port 20.

On the other hand, the cooling air from the lower unit 200 passes through the exhaust duct 102 extending vertically into the same gap GP1, and is finally discharged to the outside of the cooking device 1 from the exhaust port 20.

Next, the entire route of the cooling air passage will be explained with reference to FIG. 27.
As is clear from FIG. 27, the air (outside air) in the external space of the cooking device 1 passes through the main body case HC of the cooking device 1 in two paths.

First route: from the ventilation hole 164 formed on the left side of the lower case 101, through the ventilation hole 64 on the bottom of the upper case 16, and from the first cooling fan 60 to the inverter circuit board 80 and IH coils 17L, 17R. A path for cooling and reaching the exhaust port 20. In FIG. 27, this is indicated as "upper air passage" AH.
Second path: Outside air is sucked in from two air intake ports 152F and 152B formed at the right end of the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. Then, one of the outside air cools the inverter circuit board 121 via the third cooling fan 128. The other outside air cools the heat radiation section 122H of the magnetron 122 via the fourth cooling fan 129. Although there are two second paths as described above, they ultimately enter the common exhaust duct 102 and reach the exhaust port 20. In FIG. 27, this is described as "lower air passage" UH.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the inside of the main body case HC is divided into an upper space 300A formed by the bottom wall surface 16S of the metal upper case 16 and a lower space 300B formed below the partition wall. It is divided into two spaces, each of which has independent air passages (an upper air passage AH and a lower air passage UH), and each air passage is equipped with dedicated cooling fans 60, 128, and 129. It is the composition.
Note that the upper unit 100 also includes a second cooling fan 61, which cooperates with the first cooling fan 60 to cool the inside of the upper unit 100.

(Control menu of central control panel)
Next, the control menu that is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 and selectable by the central operation unit 40M will be described with reference to FIG. 29.

As described above, the "control menu" for induction heating that can be selected using the left operating section 40L and the right operating section 40R includes, for example, boiling water, boiling, frying (automatic cooking), etc., as shown in FIG.
However, as shown in FIG. 29, there are 11 types of control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M. These 11 types of control menus may be collectively referred to as a "control menu group" of the central operation unit 40M.

The “control menu” that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M uses one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. For this reason, this is fundamentally different from the control menu for induction heating, in which food is indirectly heated through an object to be heated N (not shown) such as a pot.

The "control menu" that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M is different from the final cooking name or name of the food obtained by heating with the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188. For example, "hamburger" and "tempura" are names of cooked foods, and are not the "control menu" referred to here.
The "control menu" by the central operation unit 40M can be said to be a broad classification based on the type, method, conditions, etc. of heating until cooking is completed, so the name of the control menu may be, for example, "warming" or " It is conceptual and general, such as "Oven (cooking)".

The control menu that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 29.
The “left display area” in FIG. 29 means the first area (display area) 30L of the integrated display section 30. The "center display area" also refers to the second area 30M, and the "right display area" similarly refers to the third area 30R.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation section 40M is operated, the control menu "Warming" in the left display area of FIG. 29 is always displayed first in the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30. This is because the control menu "warming" is set as the default.

As is clear from the "left display area" in Figure 29, in addition to "warming", there are a total of 11 controls, including "manual range", "boiling leafy vegetables", "RG cooking", "grill", and "oven". There is a menu. However, the "center heater" described at the bottom of the "left display area" in FIG. 29 is not supported by the upper unit 100, so it is not actually displayed. This "center heater" corresponds to the case where another induction heating section (center induction heating section) is added between the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL in the upper unit 100. Moreover, "RG" is an abbreviation for range grill.

The contents described in the "center display area" in FIG. 29 indicate the contents displayed in the second area (display area) 30M of the integrated display section 30. The contents of the default settings for the "center display area" are listed in the column to the right of the "center display area."

The content described in the “right display area” in FIG. 29 indicates the content displayed in the third area (display area) 30R of the integrated display unit 30. The contents of the default settings for the "right display area" are listed in the column to the right of the "right display area." A blank area means that nothing is displayed.

A database of control menus is created according to the rules described above.
Therefore, when the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is operated, "Warm" is displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30, and "80°C" indicating the temperature condition is displayed in the second area 30M. No control conditions are displayed in the third area 30R. Therefore, in this embodiment, information useful for heating cooking (hereinafter referred to as "guidance information 30P") is displayed in the third area 30R. This will be explained later with reference to FIGS. 42, 44, etc.

When the user displays one "control menu" in the center of the first area from among the "control menu group" of the central operation unit 40M, the control conditions (temperature, firepower, time, etc.) corresponding to this control menu are displayed. , are simultaneously displayed in the second area 30M and third area 30R. After that, when the user operates the input key 43MS for instructing the start of the heating operation, the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 is started.

Detailed data such as the specific contents of the control menu shown in FIG. 29, control conditions, additional information, display programs, etc. are stored in the storage section of the integrated control device MC.
The main control menus will be explained below.

(1) Warming: refers to heating food using the microwave heating source 189. This "warming" method is also suitable for reheating food. Since the default setting is 80 degrees Celsius, the microwave irradiation will automatically stop when the food reaches 80 degrees Celsius. Note that "80° C." is a target temperature, and this temperature can be adjusted by the user before starting heating. As shown in FIG. 29, the temperature can be set in 5°C increments in the range of 0°C to 90°C. When heating frozen products, the temperature can be set in the range of -10 to 0°C in 2°C increments. Note that the microwave heating output is fixed at 500W.

(2) Manual microwave oven: This refers to heating food using the microwave heating source 189, and this is done by setting the heating time. Furthermore, the microwave heating output can be selected from three levels: 500W, 200W, and 100W. The default value for the heating time is 1 minute, but at a 500W output, it can be set between 10 seconds and 15 minutes.

(3) Boiled leafy vegetables: The microwave heating source 189 is suitable for boiling foods, especially vegetables whose leaves are edible, such as spinach and Chinese cabbage. The microwave heating output value is not displayed, and "standard" is displayed as a default display in the second area. A non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 measures the temperature rise and automatically stops heating.

(4) Boil root vegetables: This is suitable for boiling foods using the microwave heating source 189, especially root vegetables such as potatoes whose roots, rhizomes, etc. are edible. The microwave heating output value is not displayed, and "standard" is displayed as a default display in the second area. Note that the heat power value is determined in advance on the heating cooker 1 side, so when adjusting the heat power, change the default display of "Standard" in the second area to "Weak" or "Strong" etc. (choose) is necessary.

(5) Meat thawing: This is a control menu suitable for thawing various types of frozen meat.
(6) RG cooking: This is suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is cooking by combining microwave heating and oven heating. In addition, there are patterns in which microwave heating is performed first, the food is heated to a certain extent, and then heated by the upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B, a pattern in which the food is heated in the reverse order, and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously. There are three types of patterns. The heating power value (watts) during microwave heating is not displayed, and the user can select the heating intensity by looking at the display in the second area 30M and selecting one of "weak", "strong", etc. .

(7) RG recooking: This is suitable for reheating cooked food using the heating chamber 113.
(8) RG manual: This is suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is for cooking by combining microwave heating and oven heating. In addition, there are patterns in which microwave heating is performed first, the food is heated to a certain extent, and then heated by the upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B, a pattern in which the food is heated in the reverse order, and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously. There are three types of patterns.

(9) Grill: This grill uses the heating chamber 113 to heat food, and uses one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B as a heat source. As described above, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is not controlled, and the heating operation is not stopped by detecting a rise in the temperature of the food. The heating power of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is determined in advance by the heating chamber control unit 159 on the cooking device 1 side. A typical example of applicable cooking is grilled fish. Incidentally, the rated thermal power of the upper heater 163A is 1000W, and the rated thermal power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000W.

(10) Oven: This oven uses the heating chamber 113 to heat food, and one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is used as a heat source. The temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured by the temperature measurement section 158, and the heating chamber control section 159 performs energization control so that the temperature reaches the set target temperature. As shown in FIG. 29, the default temperature is 180° C., so the user can change this target temperature if necessary. In addition, as explained in the "Grill" section, the rated thermal power of the upper heater 163A is 1000W, and the rated thermal power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000W. The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the energization rate to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, thereby controlling the amount of heat generated by the two heaters 163A and 163B.

(Operation of heating cooker)
Next, an outline of the operation of the heating cooker 1 having the above configuration will be explained with reference to FIGS. 30 to 38.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart for explaining the entire control operation of the heating cooker 1 before the start of cooking. FIG. 31 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation during induction heating cooking in the heating cooker 1. FIG. 32 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation when microwave heating is performed during induction heating cooking in the heating cooker 1. 33 to 35 are flowcharts for explaining the control operation of the cooking device 1. FIG. FIG. 36 is a list showing the correspondence between the cooling fan of the heating cooker 1 and the type of heating cooking. FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing the main parts to be cooled by the cooling fan of the upper unit of the cooking device 1. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 30 will be explained.
A basic operation program from power-on to the start of cooking preparation is stored in a storage device MM within the integrated control device MC.
In the built-in cooking device 1, the power plug 106A (not shown) is always connected to the commercial (AC) power source 99 from the time the kitchen furniture 2 is installed, so the user can press the operation button of the main power switch 97. 98 (see FIGS. 16 and 25) to turn on the power (step ST1 in FIG. 30).

Then, a predetermined low power supply voltage is supplied to the integrated control device MC via the DC power converter 92 in the power supply circuit board 55, and the integrated control device MC is activated. The integrated control device MC starts diagnosing its own abnormality using its own control program.

Then, the IH control unit 90, heating chamber control unit 159, and microwave heating control unit 130 that centrally control the induction heating source 9 are checked for abnormalities.

The temperature detection circuit 93 of the upper unit 100 includes a total of seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 to detect the temperature of the top plate 15, the temperature of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, and the temperature near the integrated display section 30. Since they are connected, the temperatures detected by these temperature sensors are transmitted to the temperature detection circuit 93. Thereby, the IH control unit 90 can determine the presence or absence of an abnormality (ST2).

Further, the heating chamber control section 159 and the microwave heating control section 130 can also determine whether there is an abnormality by acquiring the detected temperatures from the temperature sensors TS1 and TS2.

In step ST2, "Send startup information to the outside" is sent from the wireless communication unit 49 to a device called an "integrated information management device" or "integrated power control device" (HEMS controller) in a living space such as a kitchen. This means giving advance notice of the start of operation of the heating cooker 1 to a home control device (not shown). This will be explained later.

Since the IH control section 90 collects temperature information of the main components built into the upper unit 100, the IH control section 90 performs abnormal heating determination processing as abnormality monitoring control before starting cooking. For example, if the temperature detected by the temperature sensor TS7 is higher than the allowable temperature limit (for example, 70° C.) of electronic elements such as the liquid crystal display screen 30D in the integrated display section 30, the IH control section 90 determines that the temperature is abnormally high. Then, it notifies the integrated control device MC of the abnormality and executes processing such as displaying or notifying that the operation cannot be started.

If no abnormality is found, the IH control unit 90 transmits a signal to the integrated control device MC. Then, the integrated display unit 30 is activated and displays a message that "there is no abnormality and cooking can be started" (ST3). Note that the display screen at this initial point will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.
At the same time, the speech synthesizer 95 notifies the user of the same content as that displayed on the integrated display section 30 by voice (ST3).

In step ST3, the wireless communication unit 49 accesses the "home control device" and acquires information such as cooking menus and recipe information useful for health management within the range set by the user in advance. For example, information that the user of the heating cooker 1 has previously sent to the "home control device" via the Internet using a mobile information terminal device etc. can also be obtained when the integrated display section 30 is activated. . In addition, when some information is acquired, a dedicated caution information lamp (not shown) provided near the input operation section 40 of the upper unit 100 is turned on to notify the user.

Next, after the abnormality determination is completed as described above, the integrated control device MC uses the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 to provide notification and voice guidance to prompt selection of the heating means (ST4).

Then, the IH control section 90 determines whether the heating source for the lower unit 200 has been selected based on the operation information of the central operation section 40M in the input operation section 40 (ST5).

If no selection is made within a certain grace period (for example, 30 seconds), or immediately after step ST4, the user operates at least one of the left operation section 40L or the right operation section 40R. In this case, it is determined that only the heating source of the upper unit ST6, that is, the IH coils 17L and 17R, has been selected ("Yes" in step ST6).

As described above, if step ST6 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step ST10. The subsequent induction heating control steps will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

On the other hand, if the heat source for the lower unit 200 is selected in step ST5, the integrated control device MC proceeds to step ST8 for menu selection of two heat sources included in the lower unit 200. Note that this step ST5 is performed when the central operation section 40M is operated.

In step ST8, as shown in FIG. 30, four menus (ST9A to ST9D) are displayed in list form on the integrated display section 30. Or they are displayed sequentially in a certain order.

In the menu displayed in step ST8 in FIG. 30, the following four menu selection sections are displayed on the premise that the heating source of the lower unit 200 is used.
(1) Menu for cooking using at least one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B (ST9A). This corresponds to "grill" and "oven" in the control menu shown in FIG. 29.
(2) In addition to the above (1), a cooking menu that uses the microwave heating device 120 (ST9B). This corresponds to "RG cooking" in the control menu shown in FIG. 29.
(3) Cooking menu using microwave heating device 120 (ST9C). This corresponds to "manual microwave", "boil leafy vegetables", etc. in the control menu shown in FIG. 29.
(4) Cooking using a combination of at least one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, at least one of the microwave heating device 120, and the induction heating source (IH coils 17L, 17R) of the upper unit 100 Menu (hereinafter referred to as "cooperative cooking menu") (ST9D). This is not included in the control menu shown in the first area 30L of FIG.

Note that the route from step ST10 to step ST9D is shown by a broken line, but after proceeding with the operation to select the heating source for the upper unit 100, it is necessary to select induction heating or cooperative cooking from the middle. If the menu is found to be better, the induction heating or cooperative cooking menu may be selected without returning to step ST5.

Further, from the step ST4, it is possible to proceed to the cooperative cooking menu. This will be explained later.

FIG. 31 shows the operation steps of the integrated control device MC after the step (ST11) in which the induction heating menu is selected.

Next, control operations during induction heating will be described with reference to FIG. 31.
Note that the following description will be made using an example in which the right heating section 17HR is used.
When the input key 43R1 on the right side is touched, the IH control unit 90 determines that the user has instructed a heating preparation operation.

It is estimated whether an object to be heated (metal pot, frying pan, etc.) N (not shown) is placed above the IH coil 17R, or whether the bottom area of the object to be heated is larger than a predetermined value. The estimation result is transmitted to the IH control unit 90, and it is determined whether the heating treatment is suitable for a standard diameter pot or a large diameter pot (step MS1).
If the pot is compatible but has a large diameter, or if the pot is not suitable for heating, it will be treated differently from the standard pot.

In response to the command from the IH control section 90, the integrated control device MC displays a prompt on the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30 to select the "control menu" for the desired cooking (MS2).

When the user selects and inputs the cooking "control menu", heat power, cooking time, etc. using the right operation section 40R (MS3), the induction heating operation is started in earnest in the right heating section 17HR (MS4).
The "control menu" displayed on the integrated display unit 30 includes "high-speed heating,""frying,""boiling,""preheating,""cooking,""boiling,""boiling + keeping warm," and "cooperative heating." There are eight. However, in order to simplify the operability, the above-mentioned "function settings" may be set so that some or all of the eight control menus cannot be selected.

When the user selects any one of these eight control menus, the control conditions corresponding to those control menus are automatically selected by the built-in program of the IH control unit 90, and the energization amount of the IH coil 17R ( (heating power), energization time, etc. are set. Depending on the cooking menu, a display prompting the user to set arbitrary heat power, energization time, etc. is displayed on the display unit (MS5).

Unless the user operates the key 43R1 to stop using the key 43R1 within a certain period of time (for example, 15 seconds or 30 seconds) after the above display is displayed, the IH control unit 90 will stop the induction heating after that period has elapsed. The inverter circuit 81R of the circuit 94R is driven to start induction heating (MS6).

In the case of "large diameter pot", steps MS1 to MS6 are basically the same, but some of the eight control menus shown in step MS3 in FIG. 31 cannot be selected as control menus.
For example, the "fast heating menu" is defined as one of the exclusive menus for the left IH coil 17L by setting the outer diameter of the left IH coil 17L to be larger than that of the right IH coil 17R. In this case, the large-diameter IH coil 17L on the left side can be used to heat only a "regular pot" or a "large-diameter pot." In the first embodiment, a small pot refers to a pot with a bottom diameter of less than 10 cm, which is detected as being unsuitable for induction heating and cannot be heated by induction.

Next, an integrated power control operation when two or more different types of heating sources, such as induction heating and microwave heating, are used simultaneously will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. Note that the examples described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33 do not apply to the "cooperative cooking menu" described above.

The example shown in FIG. 32 is a case where the user attempts to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 while the upper unit 100 is initially performing induction heating cooking. Note that even when performing oven cooking, grill cooking, etc. using both or either of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B during the period of induction heating cooking, the basic method as shown in FIG. Total power control (over the entire cooking device 1) is performed by the integrated control device MC and the power control unit 72.

When a user attempts to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 during induction heating cooking, the user first uses the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40 to activate the lower unit 200. There are ways to select the heating source.
However, the easiest way to do this is to simply open the door 114. That is, in the first embodiment, when the upper unit 100 is in operation (when the main power switch 97 is in the ON state), cooking by the lower unit 200 can be started as is. Therefore. It is not necessary to turn on the main power switch 97 as in the upper unit 100.

When the door 114 is opened, as explained in the main part of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131, there is a latch switch 132A and a door switch 132B that open and close according to the opening and closing of the door 114. The integrated control device MC may monitor the opening of both or either of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B by appropriate means (such as a sensor or a switch).

In FIG. 32, when receiving a signal indicating that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 has been opened as described above, the integrated control device MC provides voice guidance to the user (step S2). The content of the audio guide is, for example, "To start heating, please press the start button."

The default setting for microwave heating is a target temperature of 80°C, so even if the door 114 is closed and heating starts, it will automatically stop when it is detected that the temperature of the food to be cooked has reached 80°C. In addition, when changing 80 degrees Celsius (for example, 75 degrees Celsius), it is sufficient to change the temperature condition and then press the input key 43MS (see FIG. 17).

When the user issues an instruction to "start heating" using the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, the consumption of the third cooling fan 128, fourth cooling fan 129, etc. will be increased to the rated power consumption value determined by the magnetron 122. Using a power consumption value that is known in advance and also reflects electric power, the integrated control device MC determines whether the total power regulation value is exceeded in step S3.

For example, since the integrated control device MC has data such as the heating power value of the induction heating cooking that has started earlier and the power consumption of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, the power consumption of the upper unit 100 is stored as data. and the total power consumption of the microwave heating device 120 can be calculated. Note that the integrated control device MC may acquire the power consumption data of the inverter circuit 81 at the stage when the central operation unit 40M is operated.

If step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to reduce either the output of the operating IH coil 17R or the heating power of the microwave heating. In step S3, the current induction heating cooking priority is determined from the induction heating control menu and the cooking process. For example, when the upper unit 100 is cooking rice (particularly the "boiling process"), priority is given to the rice cooking (boiling process), and the thermal power of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

Furthermore, when "frying" food is being performed in the upper unit 100, the frying is controlled to automatically increase the heat power so that the temperature of the cooking oil does not drop excessively as ingredients are added. Therefore, even in such a case, the thermal power of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

In step S5, if it is determined that induction heating has priority, in order to reduce the power consumption of microwave heating, if the microwave rated output is 500W (power consumption is 900W), power consumption is temporarily lowered. For example, set the output to 300W. Then, the user is notified that such a restriction will be implemented. The notification is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the speech synthesizer 95 (S6).

Then, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start microwave heating at low heat (S7).
Since it has a non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, it is possible to check whether the food has been heated and reached the target temperature. The microwave heating control unit 130 monitors (S8).

If the target temperature has not been reached, it is determined whether the induction heating operation of the upper unit 100 has ended (S9). The steps S8 and S9 are repeated until the target temperature is reached.

When the target temperature is reached, a signal is output from the microwave heating control section 130 to the integrated control device MC. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S12, and a notification that the microwave heating has been completed is provided.

When the induction heating is completed, the process proceeds to step S10, and a command is issued to the microwave heating control unit 130 to return to the set heating power initially intended by the user and continue the microwave heating (S10). Then, monitoring of the temperature of the heated object is continued (S11).

When the target temperature is reached, the integrated control device MC receives a signal from the microwave heating control section 130, proceeds to step S12, and notifies that the microwave heating has ended.

The example shown in FIG. 32 shows that the power priority between microwave cooking and induction cooking is determined by the control menu being executed in induction cooking (e.g. "Fry") and the cooking process (e.g. The premise was that the priority with induction heating was determined at that point from the "boiling step" of rice cooking.

Therefore, if the power priority between microwave heating cooking and induction heating cooking is always set to the microwave heating side, the command "Start heating" can be input using the input key on the central operation unit 40M. 43MS, for example, a warning message is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and furthermore, a warning message is output from the speech synthesizer 95. Furthermore, even if microwave heating is started thereafter, the heating power value will not be forcibly lowered as in the above example.

The power priority of the induction heating source 9, oven heating source 188, and microwave heating source 189 in the entire heating cooker 1 can be set in the above-mentioned "function settings", and once Once set, even if the main power switch 97 is turned off, the setting conditions will be stored in the integrated control device MC and will be carried over to the next heating cooking.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, the temperature of the object to be heated is monitored, and when the target temperature is reached, the microwave heating is terminated. However, there is also a control method that measures the microwave irradiation time and ends the cooking when a set time has elapsed, so FIG. 33 will be described next.

FIG. 33 shows an example of a case where a control method is adopted in which cooking is ended according to the microwave irradiation time.
Since the steps up to step S6 are the same as those in FIG. 32, the explanation will be omitted.

When starting microwave heating in step 7, the microwave heating control unit 130 calculates the correction (extension) of the heating time when the output of the magnetron 122 is lowered to a certain value. Then, in step S8, the time after the extension is determined as "set time 1" (S8), and steps 9 and 8 are repeated.

In the process, when the induction heating of the upper unit 100 is completed, the required operation time (set time 2) is recalculated again, taking into consideration the elapsed time from the start of heating (step S7).

Then, when the set time 2 has elapsed, the microwave heating is ended and this is notified (S12). Note that temperature monitoring by the non-contact temperature measuring section (infrared temperature measuring section) 158 may also be used until the set time 2 elapses.

Next, FIGS. 34 and 35 will be explained.
34 and 35 are flowcharts for explaining the control operation of the cooking device 1. FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the user attempts to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 while the upper unit 100 is performing induction heating cooking. This is the case. Even in this case, the basic total power control (over the entire heating cooker 1) as explained in FIG. 32 is performed by the integrated control device MC and the power control unit 72.

34 and 35, unlike in FIGS. 32 and 33, between the integrated control device MC and the induction heating device consisting of the microwave heating device 120, IH coils 17L, 17R, inverter circuit 81, etc. It also shows the transmission and reception of signals.

In FIGS. 34 and 35, L1 to L10 indicate the timing of generation of each operation signal, command signal, etc. When the main power switch 97 is turned on in the upper unit 100, an activation signal is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (L1).

After that, when the input operation unit 40 determines the heating power, control menu, etc. of the IH coils 17L and 17R (see steps MS2 and MS3 in FIG. 31), information indicating the contents is transmitted via the integrated control device MC (L2). . That is, the IH control unit 90 receives information indicating conditions such as maximum thermal power and operating time during induction heating from the integrated control device MC. If there is an induction heating start command from the input operation section 40, the IH control section 90 causes the inverter circuits 81L and 81R to start the heating operation.

A case where induction heating cooking is started in this manner and microwave heating is also started will be described. It is assumed that the induction heating is started at the maximum thermal power of 3200 W of the left IH coil 17L.

When the user opens the door 114, the latch switch 132A and/or the door switch 132B open as described in FIG. A signal indicating the release of is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (L3).

When the user inputs the thermal power using the central operation unit 40M, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start operation. Then, the process advances to the next step S3.
Alternatively, when the user simply issues an instruction to “start heating” using the central operation unit 40M, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start operation.

If there is no abnormality on the side of the microwave heating control section 130, the microwave heating control section 130 sends a "notice signal" to start cooking to the integrated control device MC (L4). For example, in the case of a microwave output of 500 W, if the rated power consumption of the entire microwave heating device is 1000 W, the "advance signal" includes information to use 1000 W, as shown in FIG. 34.

Next, in response to the information from the integrated control device MC, the power control unit 72 reflects the power consumption of the third cooling fan 128, fourth cooling fan 129, etc. in the rated power consumption value determined by the magnetron 122 in advance. Using the known power consumption value, calculate the total power consumption when microwave heating and induction heating are performed simultaneously, and determine whether this total value exceeds the total power regulation value. (Same as step S3 in FIGS. 32 and 33). The results are then sent to the integrated control device MC.

In addition, as another method, the upper limit value of the total electric power of the lower unit 200 (induction heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) is determined (for example, 2000 W), and the lower unit 200 and the upper unit 100 (induction heating source 9) are It may also be possible to determine whether or not the total power regulation value is exceeded when both are used at the same time.

If step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to reduce either the output of the operating IH coil 17R or the heating power of the microwave heating. In the next step S4, the integrated control device MC determines the current induction heating cooking priority from the induction heating control menu and heating process.

In the example of FIG. 34, since microwave heating is set to have priority, the thermal power of microwave heating is not reduced.

If it is determined in step S5 that microwave heating has priority, in order to reduce the power consumption of induction heating, the IH control unit 90 is commanded to lower the target thermal power of the IH coil 17R, and the power consumption is temporarily reduced. lower the target. The user is notified that such restrictions will be implemented. The notification operation is performed by the integrated display section 30 and the speech synthesizer 95.

Then, the IH control unit 90 instructs the inverter circuit 81R to change the induction heating to a lower heating power (L5).

When the power reduction process on the inverter circuit 81R side is completed, the IH control section 90 determines that the power has been reduced from the current values of the input current detection section 77a and the output current detection section 77b. Then, a message indicating that the power reduction has been completed is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (L6). Upon receiving this transmission, the integrated control device MC transmits a permission signal to start the heating operation to the microwave heating device 120 (L7).

The inverter circuit 121A includes a current detection section (not shown) such as the input current detection section 77a and the output current detection section 77b used in the inverter circuit 81R of the upper unit 100.

Therefore, when the microwave heating ends, the microwave heating control unit 130 determines that the heating operation has ended from the current detection value of the inverter circuit 121A, and notifies the integrated control device MC of the heating operation with a specific signal ( L8). Furthermore, microwave heating may be performed for a certain period of time depending on the timer setting, and in that case, the microwave heating control unit 130 detects the elapse of that time and notifies that the heating operation has ended (L8).

After the microwave heating is completed, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the IH control unit 90 to return to the set thermal power (for example, maximum thermal power of 3200 W) that the user initially desired (L9). Then, increase the heating power to the initial target level and continue induction heating (S10)

Then, when the set cooking time and target temperature are reached, the IH control unit 90 ends the induction heating. Then, the integrated control device MC is notified that the operation has ended (L10).

(Basic operation of induction heating cooking)
Next, basic operations of each part when performing induction heating in the heating cooker 1 according to the first embodiment will be explained.

When the input operation unit 40 issues a command to start induction heating cooking, the IH control unit 90 issues a drive command to the inverter circuits 81L and 81R corresponding to the designated heating unit, and turns the IH coils 17L and 17R on. drive

An operation command signal is issued from the IH control section 90 to the cooling fan drive circuit 62.
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 start operating at the same time as the inverter circuits 81L and 81R start driving, or at a slightly delayed timing.

The air blowing capacities of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may not be fixed. For example, depending on the temperature of the temperature sensor TS8 of the heat sink 82 and the temperature sensor TS that detects the temperature in the vicinity of the integrated display section 30, the air blowing capacity may be automatically changed between weak operation and strong operation.

Generally, when a cooling fan is changed from weak operation to strong operation, the wind noise of the fan becomes louder, which may cause noise. Therefore, the temperatures detected by the two temperature sensors TS7 and TS8 and the operating strengths of the cooling fans 60 and 61 are determined in a correspondence table (data table) from data such as preliminary air blow tests, and this correspondence table is It is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90. Then, the IH control unit 90 may change the operating conditions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 at any time according to the data table.

When the first cooling fan 60 is operated, air is sucked through the ventilation hole 64 located directly below the first cooling fan 60. Cooling air RF1 is forced into the first air path F1 from the air outlet 60A as shown by the arrow in FIG.

When the second cooling fan 61 is operated, air is sucked through the ventilation hole 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 61. Cooling air RF2 is forced into the first air path F1 from the air outlet 61A as shown by the arrow in FIG.

Here, one of the features of this first embodiment will be explained. In particular, the supply of cooling air to the inverter circuit board 80 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 21, 23, and 24.
The first cooling fan 60 has a flat rotary blade 60T that rotates in a counterclockwise direction RD1. Then, the outside air sucked into the fan case 60C travels to the air outlet 60A while rotating as shown in FIG. 23, and is blown out from the air outlet 60A toward the inverter board 80.

The wind speed distribution of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A will be described.
The wind speed of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A is not uniform throughout the front and back direction of the air outlet 60A. The cooling air that has swirled around the outermost side inside the fan case 60C has the highest velocity, and the velocity decreases toward the inside. This situation is schematically shown in FIG. 23 by three solid line arrows.

As shown in FIG. 23, the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A advances in the direction of the air outlet line FL1, but the rotational direction RD1 of the rotary blade 60F of the first cooling fan 60 and the cooling air 60FL itself Due to the speed difference, the cooling air gradually changes its direction toward the rear as it moves toward the heat sink 82, as shown in FIG.

The main component of the cooling air 60FL just blown out from the air outlet 60A is concentrated on the rear surface (rear surface) side of the partition wall 11 located at the center of the heat sinks 82 arranged in two rows, front and rear. Then, it moves to the right while being restricted from moving forward by the rear surface of the partition wall 11. In FIG. 23, what is indicated by a broken line arrow is the flow of the cooling air RF1 flowing around the radiation fins 82FN.

Since the cover 70 is installed so as to surround the front, rear, and upper portions of the heat sink 82 in a tunnel-like manner, the main component of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A does not diffuse into the surroundings, but instead flows into the partition wall. It is pushed into the narrow space of the radiation fin 82FN of the heat sink 82 located on the rear side of the heat sink 11.

In addition, since the first air path F1 starts from the point where it passes through the left end of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 60FL that has just been blown out from the air outlet 60A enters the inlet F1 of the first air path F1. is introduced and is carried straight to the right outlet FO as cooling air RF1.

However, since the air outlet 60A and the left end surface of the cover 70 are not directly connected and there is a gap GP14 and a front notch 70A, a portion of the cooling air 60FL immediately blown out from the air outlet 60A is It turns backward before reaching the entrance FI of the first air passage F1. It then flows to areas with relatively low pressure. Therefore, cooling air flowing in the direction of the rear exhaust port plate 53L is also generated.

The flow of cooling air from the second cooling fan 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21, 23, and 24.

The flat rotary blade 61T rotates in the counterclockwise direction RD2. Then, the outside air sucked into the fan case 61C moves toward the air outlet 61A while rotating as shown in FIG. 23. The air is then blown out toward the inverter board 80 from the air outlet 61A.

The wind speed of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 61A is not uniform throughout the front and back direction of the outlet 61A. The cooling air that has swirled around the outermost side inside the fan case 61C has the highest velocity, and the velocity decreases toward the inside. This situation is shown in FIG. 23 by three solid line arrows.

As shown in FIG. 23, the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A advances in the direction of the air blowing line FL2, but the rotation direction RD2 of the rotary blade 61F of the first cooling fan 61 and the cooling air 61FL itself Due to the speed difference, the cooling air gradually changes its direction toward the rear as it moves toward the heat sink 82, as shown in FIG.

The main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A is concentrated on the front side of the partition wall 11 located at the center of the heat sinks 82 arranged in two rows, front and rear. Then, it moves to the right while being restricted from moving forward in front of the partition wall 11. In FIG. 23, what is indicated by a broken line arrow is the flow of the cooling air RF2 flowing around the radiation fins 82FN.

A cover 70 is installed so as to surround the front, rear, and upper portions of the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape with a slight gap between them.
Therefore, the main component of the cooling air 61FL that has just been blown out from the air outlet 61A does not diffuse to the surroundings, but is pushed into the narrow space of the radiation fins 82FN of the heat sink 82 located in front of the partition wall 11. .

Note that, since the first air path F1 starts from the point where it passes through the left end of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 61FL that has just been blown out from the air outlet 61A is delivered to the inlet FI of the first air path F1. is introduced and is carried straight to the right outlet FO as cooling air RF2.

However, since the air outlet 61A and the left end surface of the cover 70 are not directly connected and there is a gap (not shown) and a front notch 70A, the cooling air 61FL immediately blown out from the air outlet 61A A portion of the air also leaks forward before reaching the inlet FI of the first air passage F1. It then flows to areas with relatively low pressure. Therefore, the cooling air flows as a branched cooling air in the spatial direction directly below the front input operation unit 40, and becomes the cooling air RF2A (see FIG. 21).

The ventilation holes 64 located directly below the first cooling fan 60 and the ventilation holes 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 60 are individually provided adjacent to each other on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, but there are many. A group of small holes may be provided and the group of small holes may be shared.

On the top surface of the inverter circuit board 80, a diode 79c (see FIG. 28) that generates heat as the power is controlled and other heat generating electrical components are mounted. Cooled by

Two IGBTs 79a and 79b (power control switching element 83) are used for one IH coil 17L. Furthermore, the power control switching element 83 is similarly used in the other IH coil 17L.

These two power control switching elements 83 generate heat during induction heating operation, but are continuously cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

The cooling air RF2A flowing from the second cooling fan 61 into the space below the input operation section 40 also cools various switches arranged on the input operation section 40, the liquid crystal display screen of the integrated display section 30, the display section drive circuit 63, etc. cooled down. The cooling air RF2A travels to the right.

As shown by the arrow in FIG. 20, some of the cooling air RF1 changes its direction upward after exiting the outlet FO of the cover 70, but there is also cooling air RF2A that joins from the front side, so the cooling air RF4 There are two types of cooling air: those that move upside down to the left over the cover 70, as shown in FIG.

The cooling air RF4 flows below the IH coil 17R on the right side, and then flows to just below the IH coil 17L on the left side. In this process, those two IH coils 17R and 17L are cooled. Generally, the temperature of this type of IH coil increases to around 250° C. to 300° C. during induction heating operation. Therefore, cooling is performed using the cooling air RF4 generated from the cooling air RF1 and RF2 as described above.

As described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 20, after the cooling air RF4 passes through the filter circuit board 54, it is guided by the partition wall 14 and is discharged from the exhaust window 52B formed in the partition plate 52.

A part of the cooling air RF4 that has cooled the IH coil 17R also changes direction and advances toward the exhaust window 52R, which becomes the final exhaust port, passes through the through hole 53R, and is discharged from the exhaust window 52B.
As a result, the cooling air RF4 and RF4L flowing inside the upper case 16 reach the exhaust port 20. Then, it is discharged into the room from the exhaust cover 19.

As described above, the IH coils 17L, 17R, the inverter circuit board 80, and other parts are the parts that should be cooled inside the upper unit 100. The space for cooling these parts is located in front of the exhaust windows 52A, 52B. In other words, downstream of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B, there is a gap GP1 that communicates with the exhaust port 20, but inside this gap GP1 there are no parts to be cooled, so the upper unit There are no more than 100 cooling spaces.

The exhaust windows 52A and 52B are installed at a position slightly away from the filter circuit board 54 to the left. Therefore, even if cooking liquid or water overflowing from a pot or the like (hereinafter referred to as "foreign matter") flows onto the exhaust cover 19 during operation, the foreign matter will pass through the exhaust port 20 and This can prevent the particles from reaching the filter circuit board 54. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical leakage and malfunction. As described above, the filter circuit board 54 and the gap GP1 are separated by the partition plate 52 except for the exhaust windows 52A and 52B. Note that the term "separation" used herein does not mean separation that can completely block air circulation, but rather separation that can prevent the intrusion of foreign matter dripping or flowing down from above.

(Basic operation of microwave heating cooking)
Next, the basic operation of each part in the heating cooker 1 according to the first embodiment when microwave heating is performed will be explained.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, microwave cooking can be started even if the upper unit 100 is not actually performing induction heating cooking. However, once the main power switch 97 is turned off, it is necessary to first turn on the main power switch 97 in order to start microwave heating cooking.

For safety reasons, the main power switch 97 is automatically reset after a certain period of time (for example, 30 minutes) after the last use of microwave heating, oven (heating chamber 113) heating, or induction heating. and released. Alternatively, the main power switch 97 is automatically opened when the temperatures of the top plate 15, the heating chamber 113, etc. all fall below the specified values. We have adopted such safety measures.

Next, after opening the door 114 and putting the food or other food to be cooked into the heating chamber 113 and closing the door 114, the input key 43MS (see FIG. 16) is pressed in the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40. When commanded to start microwave cooking, integrated control device MC issues a drive command to microwave heating control unit 130 to start operation of third cooling fan 128 and fourth cooling fan 129.

The microwave heating control section 130 drives the inverter circuit 121A of the magnetron 122 to cause the oscillation section 122A to radiate microwaves. Note that the microwave referred to here refers to radio waves of 2450 MHz±50 MHz.

The generated microwaves are guided from the waveguide 123 into the antenna case 124. Since the driving motor 126 of the antenna 125 starts operating at the timing when the microwave is oscillated, the microwave introduced into the antenna case 124 is caused by the action of the rotating antenna 125 and the rotating shaft 126A. It can be uniformly propagated inside the heating chamber 113. Note that the operation of this type of antenna and rotating shaft 126A is explained in detail in, for example, Japanese Patent No. 4836965 and Japanese Patent No. 5674914, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, outside air is sucked into the case A150 through the intake port F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101, and becomes cooling air RF5. The cooling air RF5 first cools the inverter circuit board 121, and then cools various electrical components mounted on the circuit board.

The cooling air RF5 then passes through a communication port B138B and a communication port A138A provided at two locations above and below the case A150, and the cooling air RF5 that has passed through the communication port B138B hits the back surface of the temperature sensor 160.

The temperature sensor 160 is installed in the mounting hole of the right partition plate 166A. A minute gap of several mm or less exists between the outer case of the temperature sensor 160 and the edge of the mounting hole. The cooling air RF5 passes through this gap and is blown out from the detection window 161 of the temperature sensor 160 into the heating chamber 113.

On the other hand, most of the cooling air RF5 that has cooled the inverter circuit board 121 is guided to the passage 172 from the communication port A138A. That is, it is guided to a passage 172 formed between an upper case 169 covering the upper part of the heating chamber 113 and a partition plate 171. This passage has the effect of preventing the high heat from being transmitted to the upper unit 100 side even if the upper heater 163A located above the heating chamber 113 reaches a high temperature exceeding 300°C.

When looking at the position of the communication port 173 from the communication port A138A in a plan view, the communication port 173 is located at a position diagonally across the passage 172 backward. In other words, the communication port is located at the farthest position.
Therefore, the entire air in the passage 172 is guided to the communication port 173, passes through the communication port 173, and is introduced into the exhaust duct 102 that extends horizontally rearward (see FIG. 11).

When the cooling air RF5 exits the exhaust duct 102, it merges with the cooling air RF6 rising from below and is discharged into the room from the exhaust port 20.

Next, the flow of the cooling air RF6 by the fourth cooling fan 129 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.
When the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated, outside air is sucked into the case A151 through the intake port B152B formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101, and becomes cooling air RF6. The cooling air RF6 first cools the heat radiation section 122H of the magnetron 122, passes through the heat radiation section 122H, and reaches the duct 153.

The cooling air RF6 then enters the gap GP5R adjacent to the right side of the heating chamber 113 from the duct 153, and advances toward the front side. Then, as shown in FIG. 13, it is introduced into the heating chamber 113 through the introduction port 201.

Since the introduction port 201 is located close to the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113, a portion of the cooling air RF6 also reaches the inside of the door 114, eliminating fogging that occurs on the heating chamber 113 side of the seal plate 196. .

The cooling air RF6 introduced into the heating chamber 113 has the purpose of discharging water vapor, smoke, etc. generated from an object to be heated such as food inside the heating chamber 113. Specifically, the cooling air RF6 moves rearward from the front of the heating chamber 113, as shown in FIG. 11, and finally reaches the communication port 174 formed in the rear ceiling.

The cooling air RF6 is introduced from the communication port 174 into the exhaust duct 102 that extends horizontally rearward. When the cooling air RF6 exits the exhaust duct 102, the cooling air RF6 merges with the rising airflow of the cooling air RF5 and is discharged into the room from the exhaust port 20.

In order to forcibly discharge the cooling air RF5 and RF6 from the exhaust duct 102, an exhaust fan may be provided in the middle of the exhaust duct 102. In the first embodiment, since such an exhaust fan is omitted, it can be realized at low cost, and is advantageous when considering the arrangement of components inside the upper unit 100.

(Basic operation of oven heating cooking)
Next, the basic operation of the oven heating device 140 in the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment will be explained.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC assumes that some kind of cooking is to be started and performs a preliminary activation. Therefore, even if the upper unit 100 does not actually perform induction heating cooking or microwave heating cooking, oven heating cooking can be started as is. However, once the main power switch 97 is turned off, it is necessary to turn on the main power switch 97 first in order to start oven heating cooking.

Next, the door 114 is opened, food or other food to be cooked is put into the heating chamber 113, and then a control menu for cooking using the heating chamber 113 is selected using the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40. For example, when cooking fish or meat, set the heating time and heat. However, when the automatic baking control menu is selected, the heating chamber control unit 159 automatically sets the heat power. Note that selecting this control menu will be explained later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46.

The heating chamber control unit 159 receives a command signal from the integrated control device MC, and controls whether or not the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized, the time period of energization, the energization pattern (intermittent heating), the heating power, etc.

The temperature sensor TS2 detects the temperature inside the heating chamber 113 using an infrared signal, and transmits the detected temperature data to the heating chamber control section 159. The heating chamber control unit 159 checks the difference between the target temperature and the detected temperature and controls the energization of both or one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.

Furthermore, when the timer cooking control method is input through the central operation unit 40M, both or one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is energized for a set time. That is, the heating chamber control unit 159 does not limit the energization time according to the temperature data detected by the temperature sensor TS2.

After closing the door 114, when a command is given to start cooking in the oven (heating chamber 113) using the central operation unit 40M (input key 43MS) of the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC starts microwave heating control. A drive command is issued to the unit 130, and the third cooling fan 128 and fourth cooling fan 129 start operating. Note that the drive command signal may be directly output from the heating chamber control unit 159 to the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, air is sucked into the case A150 from the air intake port F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. However, unlike the case of microwave cooking, the inverter circuit board 121 does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF5 enters the communication port B138B and the communication port A138A, respectively, without cooling the inverter circuit 121 board.

The cooling air RF5 that has passed through the communication port A138A is blown out into the heating chamber 113 through the detection window 161 from the gap between the outer case of the temperature sensor 160 and the edge of the mounting hole.

The cooling air RF5 that has passed through the communication port A138A is guided to the passage 172. Then, it reaches the communication port 173 while cooling the upper case 169, and is then introduced into the exhaust duct 102 (see FIG. 11).

On the other hand, the cooling air RF6 generated by the fourth cooling fan 129 passes through the heat radiation section 122H of the magnetron 122 and reaches the duct 153. However, since the magnetron 122 is not driven, it does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 enters the gap GP5R with almost no temperature rise.

The cooling air RF6 is then introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the inlet 201 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 reaches the inner portion of the door 114.

An object to be cooked such as food placed in the heating chamber 113 may generate steam, oil smoke, etc. due to the radiant heat of the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B. Such water vapor, oil smoke, etc. are carried to the communication port 174 by the cooling air RF6 that moves rearward from the front of the heating chamber 113, as shown in FIG.

Thereafter, the cooling air RF6 is introduced from the communication port 174 into the exhaust duct 102 that extends horizontally rearward. When the cooling air RF6 exits the exhaust duct 102, it passes through the exhaust port 20 and is discharged into the room while being attracted by the cooling air RF5 rising upward.

Next, FIG. 36 will be explained.
FIG. 36 shows the correspondence between the four cooling fans of the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 and the types of cooking.
As shown in FIG. 36, in the case of cooking using the induction heating source 9, only the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.

In the case of cooking using the microwave heating source 189, only the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 in the lower unit 200 are operated. This is because, in the case of cooking using the microwave heating source 189, heat generating components such as the IH coils 17L and 17R and the inverter circuits 81L and 81R do not generate heat.

In the case of cooking using the oven heat source 188, only the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are operated. This is because, in the case of cooking using the oven heat source 188, heat generating components such as the IH coils 17L and 17R and the inverter circuits 81L and 81R do not generate heat.

As described above, the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 of the upper unit 100 and lower unit 200 can be operated independently because the upper air passage AH and the lower air passage UH are independent. It is. In other words, the upper air passage AH and the lower air passage UH do not merge in the middle.

Next, FIG. 37 will be explained. FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing main parts to be cooled by the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 of the upper unit 100 of the cooking device 1. As shown in FIG.
An outline of the above-mentioned upper air passage AH is shown.

In FIG. 37, the "left exhaust port" refers to the part of the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52 that is continuous to the exhaust port 20 by the space on the left side of the partition plate 12 (as shown in FIG. 20). (See Figure 21).

In FIG. 37, the "right exhaust port" 65 is a space surrounded by the partition plate 12 and the partition plate 13 in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52, and is finally connected to the exhaust port 20. (See Figures 20 and 21). FIG. 15 shows the position of the right exhaust port 65.
The right exhaust port 65 is provided with the water receiving member 86 described in FIG. 9 .

This FIG. 37 shows the components that are mainly cooled by the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, and in reality, components not shown in FIG. 37 may also be cooled.

The cooling air RF1 of the first cooling fan 60 cools the left IH coil 17L, the heat sink 82 (82B1, 82B2) arranged on the top surface of the inverter circuit board 80, and further the "electronic components etc." that constitute the inverter circuit 81L. do. Here, "electronic components, etc." correspond to a choke coil (noise filter) 78b, a smoothing capacitor (rectifier component) 78c, and a resonance capacitor 76 as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 37, the cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 is depicted as reaching the left IH coil 17L from the beginning in parallel with cooling the heat sink 82. This is because the cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 is not forcibly introduced into the first air path F1 from the left end opening of the cover 70, as explained in FIGS. 21 and 23. It is.
A portion of the cooling air immediately blown out from the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 does not enter the first air path F1 and reaches the IH coil 17L located directly above the air outlet 60A. and let it cool.

Furthermore, in FIG. 37, it is indicated by a broken line frame that the central IH heat radiation fin 82MF (not shown) and the central IH electronic component 81M (not shown) are cooled. This is a case where the configuration of the first embodiment is changed.
In the first embodiment, the central heating section 17HM was not provided in the induction heating section 17H. However, it is also possible to install a (second) inverter circuit board 80M at a rear position of the inverter circuit board 80 exclusively for the central heating section 17HM. When installed in this way, cooling can be achieved through the cooling air path as shown in FIG. 37.

In FIG. 37, the cooling air RF2 of the second cooling fan 61 flows through the left IH coil 17L, the heat sink 82 (82F1, 82F2) arranged on the top surface of the inverter circuit board 80, and further the inverter circuit 81R of the right heating section 17HR. Cools the constituent "electronic parts, etc." Here, "electronic components, etc." correspond to a choke coil (noise filter) 78b, a smoothing capacitor (rectifier component) 78c, and a resonance capacitor 76 as shown in FIG.

Further, a part of the cooling air RF2 of the second cooling fan 61 does not pass through the first air path F1, but passes below the central operation board 32 as cooling air RF2A. That is, as described above, the cooling air RF2A flows through the space directly below the input operation section 40 in the front. Therefore, electric/electronic components such as the integrated display section 30 are cooled. The cooling air RF2 and RF2A of the second cooling fan 61 further flows along the upper surfaces of the power supply circuit board 55 and the filter circuit board 54.

On the other hand, cooling air also flows around the IH coil 17R of the right heating section 17HR.
Most of the cooling air is guided by the vertically installed plate-shaped or rib-shaped partition wall 14, reaches the exhaust window 52B, and exits from the right exhaust port 65 (see FIG. 15). released.

In the first embodiment described above, after turning on the main power switch 97, the integrated control device MC controls the entire situation of the heating cooker 1 up to a certain stage, and then temporarily controls the left operation section 40L or the right operation section. When the section 40R is operated, subsequent induction heating control is entrusted to the IH control section 90. However, the range controlled by the integrated control device MC may be changed with the IH control unit 90.

Similarly, the range controlled by the integrated control device MC may be changed between the heating chamber control section 159 and the microwave heating control section 130.

For example, after a cooking menu of induction heating, microwave heating, or oven (heating chamber) heating is selected, either the IH control section 90, the heating chamber control section 159, or the microwave heating control section 130 Basically, control operations related to heating may be performed.

In that case, if a new input is made on the input operation unit 40 (including stopping heating), the integrated control device MC will temporarily control the control, but if no input is made, IH control will be performed as it is. The cooking may be performed by either the heating chamber control section 90, the heating chamber control section 159, or the microwave heating control section 130.

A specific example of the control operation by the IH control unit 90 will be described below with reference to FIG. 38.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the IH control unit 90 when frying (automatically), which is a type of induction heating cooking, is performed in the heating cooker 1.

When "Fried food (automatic cooking)" is selected in the cooking menu for induction heating cooking, the temperature of the cooking oil placed in the pot is monitored by the temperature detection circuit 93, and the temperature of the IH coils 17L and 17R is automatically monitored. Firepower is controlled.

When the user selects the control menu for deep-fried food cooking (automatic), the IH control unit 90 sequentially executes a preheating process, a deep-fried food cooking process, and a heat power up process, as shown in FIG. Further, on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30, information indicating necessary information and reference information (for example, estimated time required for preheating, etc.) appears in the form of characters, figures, etc. It is also displayed that this is priority cooking in which the power is not limited (suppressed) by the power control unit 72.

Therefore, the user can recognize that electric power is preferentially secured during the frying process even if microwave heating or oven heating is used.

In the preheating process, if the target oil temperature set by the user is 180°C, the inverter circuit 81R (or 81L) starts driving at a predetermined thermal power value (maximum 1500W), and the oil temperature rapidly decreases. The temperature rises from room temperature (for example, 20°C) to the target temperature T1 of 180°C.

This temperature rise is monitored in real time by the temperature detection circuit 93 described above, so when the temperature detection circuit 93 detects that the target temperature T1 (first temperature) has reached 180°C, the IH control unit 90 attempts to maintain the target temperature by adjusting the amount of induction heating, that is, the inverter output (a control operation that automatically adjusts the high-frequency heating power to approach the target temperature based on such temperature detection information) (hereinafter referred to as "temperature feedback control").

Thereafter, a display request command is issued to the integrated control device MC, and a voice guidance message such as "The oil temperature has reached the appropriate temperature. Please add the ingredients" is given to the user via the voice synthesizer 95.

When a user places an ingredient, such as a frozen croquette, into oil, the oil is rapidly cooled by the cold ingredients from the time of insertion, causing a sudden drop in temperature as shown in FIG. 38. However, since the temperature detection circuit 93 monitors this movement of temperature drop, it immediately increases the thermal power of the inverter circuit 81R (81L) to a predetermined thermal power of 1500 W or 1800 W and drives the oil, so that the oil temperature rises again. (temperature feedback control). As soon as the target temperature T1 is reached again in this way (or after a predetermined time has elapsed), the frying process is shifted to the heating power increasing process.

In the heating power up step, the oil temperature is controlled to be maintained between a second temperature T2 of 225°C which is higher than the target temperature T1 and an upper limit temperature (third temperature) T3 of 230°C which is higher than this. Device 90 controls inverter circuit 81R (81L).

As shown in FIG. 38, the heating power is intermittently driven at about 900W.
The process after reaching the first temperature T1 is called the "fried food finishing process" and is an important process for finishing fried food crispy. If sufficient heat is not applied during this heat-up process, the fried food will not be cooked properly. In addition, since the frying process is not limited within a predetermined time, if the user presses the input key 44R (or input key 45L), the frying process will be completed.

As shown in FIG. 38, in the (automatic) frying cooking control menu, the period from the frying cooking process to the heat power up process is defined as the "priority cooking menu execution time period", and during this execution time period, other Power is not reduced by starting a heating source or changing operating conditions. In other words, the induction heating IH control unit 90 always knows whether the cooking menu being executed is in the "priority cooking menu execution time zone" and if it is in the execution time zone, It has a function to notify the outside party.

As is clear from the above explanation, when a specific heating process is entered, the integrated control device MC does not issue a control signal to the IH control unit 90 each time, and the progress of the heating process is entirely controlled by that IH control unit 90. This is left to the control of the control section 90.

Next, the relationship between the integrated display section 30 and the various input keys of the central operation section 40M, right operation section 40R, and left operation section 40L will be explained with reference to FIGS. 39 to 45.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display unit 30. FIG. 40 is a plan view of the left operating section 40L and the left display section 31L before and after the start of induction heating cooking. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display section 30 and the left side display section 31L. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing changes in display contents of the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display section 30. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing changes in display contents of the integrated display section 30.

FIG. 39 will be explained. When the main power switch 97 is turned off, the integrated display section 30 is not activated and therefore does not display any information.
When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC displays the display screen 1 of FIG. 39 on the integrated display section 30 after performing self-diagnosis to determine whether there is an abnormality as described above.

In the display screen 1 of FIG. 39, 30A is a display message notifying that the power is on. 30B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for guiding the user to a dedicated recipe publication site via the Internet. 30C is a text explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code. This two-dimensional information 30C and the display text 30A are one type of "standby common information" 30N.

After display screen 1 in FIG. 39 is displayed, display screen 2A or 2B may be automatically displayed. On the display screen 2A, "Bumping warning" is one of the warning displays. This "bumping" is when a viscous food (liquid) such as curry or stew is being heated, and the inside of the food is overheated to a temperature above the boiling point, causing sudden boiling. A phenomenon that causes intense boiling. As steam is emitted from the heated liquid, hot liquid droplets may fly out and be dangerous. The timing and cause of bumping are said to be the introduction of foreign matter or impact from the outside. Therefore, as shown on display screen 2, when a metal pot or the like containing food to be cooked is placed on the top plate 15 and heated by induction, a warning is given when stirring the food. ing. The information displayed in this alert is a type of "standby common information" 30N.

In the display screen 2B, 30E is a warning display warning that the inside of the heating chamber 113 is at high temperature and not to touch it carelessly. After performing oven cooking in the heating chamber 113, if the integrated control device MC detects that the heating chamber 113 has not yet cooled down sufficiently, it automatically switches to the state of the display screen 2. Although the display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed at the same time, they may be displayed alternately at intervals of several seconds to call attention to both bumping and high temperature alarms. Note that the voice synthesizer 95 may also alert the display screens 2A and 2B by voice in parallel.

As is clear from display screen 1 to display screen 2A and 2B in FIG. 39, these displays are performed using the entire display screen 30D. In other words, in order to ensure as wide a display area as possible rather than partially displaying in any of the first area 30L to third area 30R mentioned above, three areas from first area 30L to third area 30R cannot be distinguished. The image is displayed in an integrated manner, so that it appears to the user that the entire integrated display section 30 is displayed.

The display screens 1 to 2A and 2B are at the stage ST3 in terms of the operation steps in FIG. 30.
After a certain period of time, for example 10 seconds, has elapsed since the display of these display screens 1 to 2A and 2B, the display changes to prompt the selection of a heating source (heating means) (corresponding to operation step ST4 in FIG. 30). .

Next, a case where induction heating is performed in the upper unit 100 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a plan view of the left display section 31L and left operation section 40L for the left heating source 17HL. Before the input key 43L1 for selecting cooking by the left heating section 17HL is pressed, the state is as shown in FIG. 40(A).

When the input key 43L1 is pressed, the integrated control device MC detects that the user has selected the left heating source 17HL, causes the individual light emitting section 27L3 to emit light, and receives the operation input, as shown in FIG. Display that it has been accepted.

Since the input key 43L4 for selecting timer cooking is also waiting for an input, the individual light emitting section 27L1 blinks. Further, since the control menu selection is also in a state of waiting for input, the individual light emitting section 27L2 located directly behind the input key 44L is blinked. In FIG. 40(B), the star symbol indicates that the light emitting display section 27 is turned on or blinking.

If the default firepower is set to "3", the firepower display section 67L that indicates the firepower level during induction heating cooking will cause the light emitting part of the firepower display section 67L to emit light continuously from the left side until the firepower 3 is indicated (or (changes blue to red) and displays the amount of firepower to the user.

When the user wants to change the firepower to a firepower other than the default firepower setting, by pressing the input key 43L2 or 43L3, the firepower will decrease or increase by one step each time the input key 43L2 or 43L3 is pressed. or red light emitting part) expands from the left to the right or contracts to the left to display the adjustment state of the firepower to the user.

Next, FIG. 41 will be explained.
FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the left operation section 40L and the left display section 31L of the cooking device 1. It also shows the operation of the integrated display section 30.
In FIG. 41, the diagrams (A) to (C) drawn on the left side are schematic diagrams of the left operating section 40L and the left display section 31L, and the state before the start of operation is shown in FIG. 41(A). It is.

As explained in FIG. 40, when the input key 43L1 is operated, the light emitting display section 27L3 emits light as shown in FIG. 41(B).
In the state of FIG. 41(B), the light emitting display section 27L4 is also lit, indicating that the input functions of both the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are valid. Therefore, pressing this left input key 43L2 twice reduces the firepower. Incidentally, the increase or decrease in the firepower can be seen by the lighting state of the firepower display section 67L located immediately behind.

Furthermore, when the input key 43L2 is pressed once at the stage of firepower level 1, the firepower level below 1 is specified, but the integrated control device MC determines that the "keep warm" control mode has been designated, and the 41 display screen 3A is displayed on display screen 30D.

As can be seen from the display screen 3A, the display screen 30D displays a "diagram of a container such as a pot" in the first area 30L, and the second area 30M and third area 30R are combined to form a horizontally wide display area. The words "keep warm (left IH)" are displayed in the space where the second area 30M and third area 30R are combined, indicating that the keep warm temperature is about 80°C. An explanatory text 30F indicates that the control menu is recommended for soups and the like. Note that at this stage of the display screen 3A, characters 80° C. are displayed on the left display section 31L.

Next, when the input key 44L is pressed in the state 41(B), each time the input key 44L is pressed, one control menu is selected from the control menu group and displayed as shown on the display screen 3B. The example of display screen 3B shows that "fried food" has been selected. After a certain period of time has elapsed in the state of FIG. 41(B), the control menu for the left heating section 17HL is determined to be "fried food", and the driving of the IH coil 17L is started.

In the case of the display screen 3B, the default temperature is set to 180°C, so the words "Fried food 180°C" are displayed on the left display section 31L, as shown in FIG.
This temperature of "180 degrees Celsius" means that the cooking oil is heated by the IH coil 17L and maintained at around 180 degrees Celsius, and when the temperature reaches 180 degrees Celsius, a sound is announced by the voice synthesizer 95. In addition to this, the integrated display section 30 displays that the "preheating temperature has been reached" and prompts for the addition of ingredients.

If it is desired to change the preheating (target) temperature of the fried food, the temperature can be lowered using the input key 43L2 or raised using the input key 43L3.

As can be seen from the display screen 3B, on the display screen 30D, the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined to form a horizontally long wide display area, and the second area 30M and third area 30R are combined. In the space provided, a warning message 30G indicating the start of preheating and not leaving the cooking device 1 unattended during the preheating operation is displayed.

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 41(B), if the input key 44L is pressed and "appropriate temperature" is selected as another control menu, the display screen 3C is displayed. As shown in this display screen 3C, the control menu "appropriate temperature" is a control mode recommended for warming a pot etc. to a set temperature (default temperature is 180° C.) and for frying eggs. The recommended sentence 30H is shown so that the meaning can be understood. Note that at this stage of the display screen 3C, text information "Preheating 180° C." is displayed on the left display section 31L.

Next, FIG. 42 will be explained.
FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the cooking device 1 is operated.
The display screen 4ST is a default display screen determined by the integrated control device MC.

As described with reference to FIG. 17, when the input key 43MC is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG. 42 is displayed on the integrated display section 30.
As is clear from the display screen 4ST, a specific sentence 30J indicating the name of the control menu "Warming" is displayed in a large size at the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction.

Behind the specific sentence 30J of "warming" displayed in the center of the first area 30L, the words "oven" are displayed, and conversely, the words "microwave manual" are displayed in a slightly smaller size in front.
Then, when the user selects the control menu, it can be seen that the next options are "oven" and "manual range." If, at this stage, the (left) input key 43M1 located at the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once, the text "warming" (specific text 30J) changes to "range manual".
Further, when the (right side) input key 43M1 located at the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once, the word "warming" changes to "oven".

In FIG. 42, on the display screen 4ST, which is the default display screen, target temperature information 30T of "80° C." is displayed in the second area 30M. When microwave heating is performed at this target temperature, the microwave heating is automatically stopped when the temperature sensor TS1 detects that the food temperature is 80°C.

In order to raise the target temperature (80° C.) of the second area 30M to 85° C., the right input key 43M2 located immediately before the second area 30M is operated once. Conversely, if you want to lower the temperature to 75° C., you only need to operate the left input key 43M2 once.

A chevron-shaped symbol 30UP is displayed above the number of the target temperature (80° C.) of the second area 30M. Similarly, below the number 80° C., a downwardly pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed.

In order to increase the temperature, firepower, etc., the input key 43M2 on the right side may be operated.
Conversely, in order to lower the temperature, firepower, etc., the left input key 43M2 may be operated. This correspondence rule is also applied to the relationship between the display in the third area 30R and the pair of left and right input keys 43M3. In this way, we are trying to avoid operational errors (wrong input keys) during user input operations.

In FIG. 42, 30K is a heating source display section in which characters indicate that the heating source is the microwave heating source 189. Note that, as described above, 30P is reference information indicating that the control menu is recommended for warming side dishes and the like. Note that the content of this reference information may be another additional information 30Q, or two or more types of information may be displayed alternately for several seconds each on the display screen 30D.

Next, FIG. 43 will be explained.
FIG. 43 is another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the cooking device 1 is operated.
When the control menu is set to "range manual", the display screen 5ST is the default display screen determined by the integrated control device MC.

As described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 42, when the input key 43MC is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG. 42 is displayed on the integrated display section 30. Next, when the input key 43M1 on the left side of the central operation section 40M is operated several times, the specific sentence 30J changes to "range manual" and the display screen 5ST of FIG. 43 is displayed on the integrated display section 30. Ru.

As is clear from the display screen 5ST, a specific text 30J of the control menu "Range Manual" is displayed in a large size in the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction.

In the display screen 5ST, microwave output value (watt value) information 30X of "500W" is displayed in the second area 30M. Moreover, microwave heating time information 30Y of "1 minute 00 seconds" is displayed in the adjacent third area 30R. As can be seen from this display screen 5ST, it is known from the beginning that the microwave heating source 189 is to be used in this "range manual" control menu, so the microwave heating source 189 as shown in FIG. The heating source display section 30K (in which certain information is displayed in text) does not need to be displayed.

If the microwave output value (watt value) of 500 W in the second area 30M of the display screen 5ST is desired to be lowered by one level to 200 W, the left input key 43M2 may be operated once.

Similarly, in order to lengthen the heating time of the second area 30R to 1 minute and 10 seconds, the right input key 43M3 located immediately before the third area 30M is operated once. Conversely, if you want to shorten the heating time by one level to 50 seconds, you only need to operate the left input key 43M3 once.

In the display screen 5ST of FIG. 43, the chevron-shaped symbol 30UP is not displayed above the output (500W) number of the second area 30M. Also, below the number 500W, a downwardly pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed.

The display screen 5DNN in FIG. 43 shows the minimum firepower (100W) and the shortest time (10 seconds), and the display contents of the first area 30L are omitted.
The symbol 30UP is displayed only above the minimum thermal power (100W) on the display screen 5DNN, indicating that only thermal power greater than this thermal power can be selected. Similarly, the symbol 30UP is displayed only above the number of the shortest time (10 seconds), and the symbol 30DN is not displayed. That is, here again, the symbol 30UP indicates that a shorter time cannot be selected.

Next, FIG. 44 will be explained.
FIG. 44 is yet another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display section 30 when the central operation section 40M of the cooking device 1 is operated.
When the input key 43M1 on the left side corresponding to the first area 30L is operated once in the state of the display screen shown in FIG. ” can be changed to

Display screen 6ST in FIG. 44 is the default display screen. In the first area 30L, a specific sentence (name) 30J of the control menu, ``Boiled leafy vegetables,'' is displayed in a large size.
In the second area 30M, information 30V indicating the microwave output level is displayed as "standard", and if cooking is started in this state, heating will be performed at 500W. Note that the microwave output value in the case of "standard" may be 500 W, but may be other than this. In other words, the "standard" heating power level when using the microwave heating source 9 differs depending on each control menu, and is not always the same output (for example, 500 W).

In the first area 30L of FIG. 44, as explained in FIG. 42, a heating source display section 30K is displayed which displays in text that the heating source is the microwave heating source 189. Note that, as described above, 30P is a recommendation sentence indicating that the control mode is recommended for warming side dishes and the like. Note that the content of this recommendation sentence may be another additional information 30Q, and two or more types of information may be displayed alternately for several seconds each on the display screen 30D.

Next, FIG. 45 will be explained.
FIG. 45 is yet another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the cooking device 1 is operated.
FIG. 45 shows a scene where a control menu called "RG cooking" is selected.

As mentioned above, the "RG cooking" refers to the "range grill cooking" in which cooking is performed using the heating chamber 113 by combining microwave heating and oven heating. There are two patterns: a pattern in which microwave heating is performed first, the food is heated to a certain extent, and then heated by the upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B, a pattern in which the food is heated in the reverse order, and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously. There are three types. Note that "simultaneously" as used herein does not mean that the heating start and end timings are exactly the same, but also includes cases where there is a time period in which the heating operations overlap.

On the display screen 7ST1 shown in FIG. 45, heating control is performed in which both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are first driven simultaneously to heat for 1 minute, and then the oven heating source 188 alone is heated for 5 minutes. It can be seen that this is a time-controlled pattern.
Note that the reason why the term "range &grill" is not used and the abbreviated form "RG" is used is to minimize the number of characters that can be displayed in the first display area 30L. This is because if an attempt is made to display a larger number of characters, the exclusive area of the first area 30L will increase.

In the display example shown in FIG. 45, heating time information 30S is displayed in minutes in the second area 30M, and heating time information 30GY for subsequent grill cooking is also displayed in minutes.
The heating time information 30S shown in the first area 30L and the heating time information 30GY in the third area 30R can be changed as appropriate using the input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation section 40M.

In FIG. 45, the display screen 7ST2 shows a heating control (time control) pattern in which the microwave heating source 189 is first used alone to heat for 1 minute (microwave output 500W), and then the oven heating source 188 is used alone for 5 minutes. This is the case. This display screen 7ST2 is a default display screen.

Next, FIG. 46 will be explained.
FIG. 46 is a schematic plan view illustrating the display contents of the display screen 6ST shown in FIG. 44 and the operation of the central operation section 40M.

As shown in FIG. 46, the individual light emitting sections 27M1 to 27M6 are arranged in the central operation section 40M, and when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display drive circuit 63 controls the individual light emitting sections 27M1 to 27M6. 27M4 emits light in a unified color.

Thereafter, when the control menu selection input key 43MC is operated, the display screen 6ST shown in FIG. 44 is displayed by default in the first area 30L.
At this display stage, all four input keys 43M1 to 43M2 corresponding to the first area 30L and the second area 30M can accept input. Therefore, the two individual light emitting sections 27M3 and 27M4 corresponding to the four input keys 43M1 to 43M2 continue to emit light.

On the other hand, after the display screen 6ST, display screens 6UP1, 6DN1, etc. are displayed as shown in FIG. 46, the individual light emitting section 27M6 corresponding to the start input key 43MS changes from continuous light emission to blinking. do. Then, the presence of the input key 43MS is highlighted with light. When the user touches this input key 43MS, the heating cooking operation is started.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the respective input functions of the input key 43M1 serving as the menu selection section and the input key 43MS serving as the start selection section are enabled, the first light emission mode (continuous light emission) is activated. A light emitting means (display drive circuit 63) is provided for causing the individual light emitting sections 27M1 to 27M6 to emit light.
The integrated control unit MC is configured to cause only the light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the start selection unit (input key 43MS) to emit light in a second light emission mode (blinking) when the reference information 30P is displayed. be.

With the above configuration, the user can easily identify the state in which the cooking apparatus is waiting for a command to start cooking by blinking the light emitting section 27M6. Note that the light emitting section 27M6 also supports the touch type input key 43MT that can stop the operation of microwave heating and oven heating, so when the light emitting section 27M6 is emitting light, the input key 43MT is also compatible. The input function is valid, and a command to stop heating can be sent by touch operation.

Note that at the stage when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display unit driving circuit 63 may cause only the light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS serving as the start selection unit to blink from the beginning. Further, the other light emitting sections 27M1 to 27M4 may emit light continuously, and may emit light in a manner different from that of the input key 43MS of the start selection section.

Summary of Embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, a heating cooker to which the first invention is applied is disclosed in the following form. That is,
It has a flat main body 10 equipped with a top plate 15 on the top on which an object to be heated is placed,
Inside the main body 10, there are two or more IH coils 17L and 17R for heating the object on the top plate 15, one inverter circuit board 80 disposed below the coils, and the IH coil. A cover 70 that partitions a first air passage F1 above the inverter circuit board 80 below 17L and 17R, and a first cooling fan 60 and a second cooling fan 61 that introduce outside air for cooling from the outside of the main body 10. and,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have rotary blades that rotate around a vertical axis, and are arranged on the same horizontal plane (first plane SP1) as the inverter circuit board 80. It faces the entrance of 1 Wind Route F1,
The first air passage F1 is formed in a horizontally long manner inside the main body, and another circuit board (power supply circuit board 55) to be cooled is disposed on the exit side of the first air passage F1.

For this configuration, the thin and horizontally long main body 10 is used to connect the first air passage F1 formed above the inverter circuit board 80 from its right or left end (as shown in the first embodiment). The cooling air RF1 and RF2 are forced to pass toward the opposite side, so that the upper part of the inverter circuit board 80 can be cooled.

Furthermore, the cooling air that has passed through the first air path F1 can also cool another circuit board (power supply circuit board 55) to be cooled, and it is also possible to prevent abnormalities and malfunctions of important power supply circuits.

In addition, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have rotary blades that rotate around vertical axes, and can force cooling air into the inlet of the first air path F1.

Furthermore, the air outlets 60A and 61A of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 supply cooling air from different directions to the entrance of the first air path F1, so that It is possible to supply more cooling air to the interior, which can be expected to improve the cooling effect.

Furthermore, inside the first air path F1, a pair of heat sinks 82F and 82B, to which the switching element 83 mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 is attached, are arranged such that the heat dissipation fins 82FN portions face each other with a gap GP2 in between. Since they are installed in a matching shape, cooling air can be concentratedly flowed around the gap GP2, and it is expected that the cooling effect will be enhanced.

Furthermore, since a partition wall 11 is installed inside the gap GP2 to divide the first air passage F1 into two air passages, front and rear, both of the pair of heat sinks 82F and 82B can be equally cooled. I can do it.

Further, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are installed in an overlapping manner so that the fan cases 60C and 61C are close to or in close contact with the bottom surface of the main body 10,
The air outlet ports 60A and 61A were formed in a rectangular cross-sectional shape with a horizontal dimension larger than a height dimension.
Therefore, even if the first air passage F1 partitioned by the cover 70 has a flat cross-sectional shape, it can be expected that cooling air can be efficiently introduced into the first air passage F1.
Furthermore, since the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not have a high structure upward from the bottom surface of the main body 10, interference with the IH coil located above can be avoided, and the height of the main body 10 can be avoided. The size can be kept small, and a thin heating cooker 1 can be realized.

Furthermore, the positions of the lower end surfaces of the air outlets 60A and 61A are below the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. Therefore, even if the cooling air RF1 and RF2 naturally rise as they advance, they can be introduced into the first air passage F1.

Furthermore, in the case of having the left IH coil 17L and the right IH coil 17R,
The center point of the right IH coil 17R is located on the right side of the outlet of the first air passage F1, and is cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 coming out of the first air passage F1.
Therefore, the right IH coil 17R can also be effectively cooled.

Furthermore, the ceiling surface of the cover 70 was configured to be located close to the ceiling surfaces of the heat sinks 82F and 82B via the gap GP16.
Therefore, the cooling air RF1 and RF2 blown out from the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 fill the space below the cover 70 with heat sinks 82F and 82B. While in contact with each other, the switching element 83 is effectively cooled by blowing straight from one side to the other.

Further, heat sinks 82F and 82B having a plurality of radiation fins in the horizontal direction are arranged below the second horizontal plane HP2,
The switching element 83 was mounted on the heat sinks 82F and 82B.
Due to this configuration, the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B have their radiation fins 82FN portions concentratedly affected by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 flowing together from the upstream side of the first air path F1. cooled down.

In the first embodiment, a heating cooker to which the second invention is applied was disclosed in the following form. That is,
A horizontally long and flat upper case 16 is provided with a top plate 15 on which an object to be heated is placed,
Inside the upper case 16, there are a plurality of IH coils 17L and 17R that can respectively heat objects to be heated at two locations on the top plate 15, and two inverter circuits 81L that supply high frequency power to each of these coils. , 81R, an inverter circuit board 80 on which the plurality of inverter circuits 81L, 81R are mounted, and a first air path F1 between the IH coils 17L, 17R and the inverter circuit board 80. a cover 70 that partitions the upper case 16; and two cooling fans that introduce outside air for cooling from outside the upper case 16.
The cover forms a first air path between the cover and the inverter circuit board,
The inverter circuit board has a horizontally long rectangular planar shape,
The two cooling fans are a first cooling fan 60 having rotary blades 60F for centrifugal air blowing, and a second cooling fan 61 having rotary blades 61F for centrifugal air blowing,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are installed near the left side wall surface 16L or the right side wall surface 16R of the upper case 16, and the rotor blades are connected to the rotary blade through a ventilation hole 64 formed at the bottom of the upper case 16. Cooling air is introduced by rotating 60F and 61F, respectively.
The first air path F1 into which the first cooling air RF1 from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling air RF2 from the second cooling fan 61 are combined and introduced is the inverter circuit board 80. It extends in a straight line in the left and right direction above the
The first cooling air RF1 and the second cooling air RF2 that have passed through the first air path F1 cool the IH coils 17L and 17R, and then pass through the exhaust window 53A formed at the rear of the upper case 16. , 53B disclosed a configuration in which it is released to the outside.

For this configuration, a horizontally long inverter circuit board is installed horizontally using the horizontally long upper case 16, and the right or left end of the inverter circuit board 80 (as shown in the first embodiment) is Cooling air RF1 and RF2 pass through the first air passage F1 toward the opposite side.

Therefore, the radiation fins 82FN of the first heat sink 82F and the radiation fins 82FN of the second heat sink 82B located upstream of the first air path F1 are intensively cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

Furthermore, since the two cooling fans 60 and 61 have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around vertical axes, it is possible to increase the height of the installation space for the two cooling fans 60 and 61. do not have. Therefore, a great effect can be expected in that the entire upper unit 100 can be made thinner.

Furthermore, the cover 70 covering just above the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B allows the tunnel-shaped first air path F1 that surrounds the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B to be easily formed. The structure can be easily formed without complicating the structure.

Furthermore, the cooling air RF4 that has come out downstream from the first air passage F1 flows above the power supply circuit board 55 and the filter circuit board 54 and is discharged from the right exhaust window 53B, and the left exhaust window 53A. It is divided into those that are released to the outside.
Therefore, the temperature rise in the IH coil installation space CK of the upper case 16 is suppressed, and the electronic components (for example, the transformer 57, the choke Since the coil 56) can also be cooled, breakdowns and abnormal operations of these electronic components can be prevented.

In addition, since the cooking device 1 has a horizontally elongated shape, when the user cooks while facing the top plate 15, it is easy to move the pot or cooking utensils horizontally on the top plate 15, and the user's operability is improved. It can also be expected to have a positive effect.

Furthermore, if the two cooling fans 60, 61 have the same dimensions and the same rating specifications, the procurement cost of the cooling fans 60, 61 can be reduced, or quality control can be facilitated. Furthermore, if the rotational directions of the rotary blades 60F and 61F are made the same, it is expected that production and quality control will become easier.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, a built-in composite heating cooker, which is the fourth invention, was disclosed in the following form. That is,
A top plate 15 exposed to the top surface of the kitchen furniture 2 is provided on the top of the main body case HC,
The main body case HC is connected to a horizontally long and flat upper case 16 having the top plate 15 on its upper part, and a box-shaped case HC having a heating chamber 113 inside. It has a lower case 101,
The lower case 101 includes a door 114 that opens and closes the front opening of the heating chamber 113, a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and a heat radiation source of the microwave heating source 189. a lower air passage UH through which outside air is introduced to cool the section 122H;
Inside the upper case 16, there are IH coils 17L and 17R arranged in heating parts 17HL and 17HR provided at two places on the top plate 15, respectively, and two IH coils that supply high-frequency power to each of the IH coils. The inverter circuits 81L, 81R, one inverter circuit board 80 on which the inverter circuits 81L, 81R are mounted, and the IH coils 17L, 17R and the inverter circuit board 80 are installed. A cover 70 that partitions one air passage F1, and two cooling fans 60 and 61 that introduce outside air for cooling from the outside of the case 16,
The inverter circuit board 80 has a horizontally long rectangular planar shape,
The two cooling fans 60, 61 are a first cooling fan 60 having rotary blades 60F for centrifugal air blowing, and a second cooling fan 60 having rotary blades 61F for centrifugal air blowing,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are installed near the left or right wall surface of the upper case 16, and the rotor blades 60F, Cooling air is introduced by the rotation of 61F,
The first air path F1 into which the first cooling air RF1 from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling air RF2 from the second cooling fan 61 are combined and introduced is the inverter circuit board 80. It extends in a straight line in the left and right direction above the
The first cooling air RF1 and the second cooling air RF2 that have passed through the first air path F1 cool the IH coils 17L and 17R, and then pass through the exhaust window 53A formed at the rear of the upper case 16. , released to the outside from 53B,
A third gap GP1 formed at the rear of the upper case 16 has an outlet side end portion of the lower air passage UH,
A configuration was disclosed in which the cooling air RF6 after cooling the heat radiation part 122H is guided to the third gap GP1 without passing through the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L and 17R in the upper case 16. .

For this configuration, cooling is provided in the first air passage F1 that extends linearly in the left-right direction from the right or left end of the inverter circuit board 80 (as shown in the first embodiment) to the opposite side. Wind RF1 and RF2 pass through efficiently.

Therefore, the radiation fins 82FN of the first heat sink 82F installed in the first air path F1 and the radiation fins 82FN of the second heat sink 82B located upstream of the first air path F1 are connected to the cooling air RF1, It is intensively cooled by RF2.

Furthermore, since the two cooling fans 60 and 61 have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around vertical axes, it is possible to increase the height of the installation space for the two cooling fans 60 and 61. do not have. Therefore, a great effect can be expected in that the entire upper unit 100 can be made thinner.

Furthermore, the cover 70 covering just above the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B allows the tunnel-shaped first air path F1 that surrounds the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B to be easily formed. The structure can be easily formed without complicating the structure.

Furthermore, if the two cooling fans 60, 61 have the same dimensions and the same rating specifications as in the first embodiment, the procurement cost of the cooling fans 60, 61 can be reduced, or quality control can be facilitated. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, since the rotation directions of the rotary blades 60F and 61F are aligned in the same manner, effects such as ease of production and quality control can be expected.

Furthermore, the built-in composite heating cooker of Embodiment 1 discloses kitchen furniture to which the sixth invention is applied in the following form. That is,
It has an installation port 2 on the top surface, and the composite heating cooker of the third invention is installed in the installation port 2,
A right side gap 301R and a left side gap 301L formed between the side wall surface of the main body case 16 and a lower gap 311 formed between the bottom wall surface of the main body case 16 are a front gap formed below the door 114. Disclosed is a kitchen furniture that communicates with the outside via 30220.

Due to this configuration, the entire heating cooker 1 is made thinner, so that the volume occupied in the kitchen furniture 2 can be made smaller than before. Therefore, when installing other cooking equipment below this heating cooker 1, it is possible to install a larger cooking equipment than before. Alternatively, if the lower part of the cooking device 1 is used as a food storage or the like, the storage capacity can be increased.

In addition to the above, the first embodiment discloses the following characteristic features.
Characteristic configuration 1:
a first inverter circuit 81L having a first switching element;
a second inverter circuit 81R having a second switching element;
an inverter circuit board 80 on which the first inverter circuit and the second inverter circuit are mounted;
a first heat sink 82F to which the first switching element is attached;
a second heat sink 82B to which the second switching element is attached;
Two (first and second) cooling fans 60 and 61 that supply cooling air to the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B,
The first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are arranged on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 with their respective radiation fins 82FN facing each other with a gap GP2 in between,
A cover 70 is provided to cover the upper part of the inverter circuit board 80 and define a tunnel-shaped first air passage F1,
The two cooling fans 60 and 61 each have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around a vertical axis, and fan cases 60C and 61C surrounding the rotary blades,
The air outlets 60A and 61A formed on the peripheral surfaces of the fan cases 60C and 61C are separated from the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B, and are connected to a straight line (reference line) passing through the center of the gap GP2. ) A heating cooker is disclosed in which the cooking device is configured such that both sides of the BL are directed toward the gap GP2.

Due to this configuration, the heat radiation fins 82FN of the first heat sink 82F located upstream of the first air path F1 and the radiation fins 82FN of the second heat sink 82B located upstream of the first air path F1 are used for cooling air. It is intensively cooled by RF1 and RF2.

Furthermore, since the two cooling fans 60 and 61 have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around vertical axes, it is possible to increase the height of the installation space for the two cooling fans 60 and 61. do not have. Therefore, a great effect can be expected in that the entire upper unit 100 can be made thinner.

Furthermore, the cover 70 covering just above the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B allows the tunnel-shaped first air path F1 that surrounds the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B to be easily formed. The structure can be easily formed without complicating the structure.

Furthermore, if the two cooling fans 60, 61 have the same dimensions and the same rating specifications, the procurement cost of the cooling fans 60, 61 can be reduced, or quality control can be facilitated. Furthermore, if the rotational directions of the rotary blades 60F and 61F are made the same, it is expected that production and quality control will become easier.

Characteristic configuration 2:
a first inverter circuit 81L having a first switching element;
a second inverter circuit 81R having a second switching element;
an inverter circuit board 80 on which the first inverter circuit and the second inverter circuit are mounted;
a first heat sink 82F to which the first switching element is attached;
a second heat sink 82B to which the second switching element is attached;
(two) cooling fans 60 and 61 that supply cooling air to the first heat sink and the second heat sink,
The first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are arranged on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 with their respective radiation fins 82F facing each other with a gap GP2 in between,
A cover 70 is provided to cover the upper part of the inverter circuit board 80 and define a tunnel-shaped first air passage F1,
The (two) cooling fans 60, 61 have rotary blades 60F, 61F that rotate around vertical axes, and fan cases 60C, 61C surrounding the rotary blades 60F, 61F, respectively.
The air outlets 60A and 61A formed on the circumferential surfaces of the fan cases 60C and 61C are connected to the first heat sink 82F (at different angles) in the gap GP2 with a straight line BL extending in the longitudinal direction of the gap GP2 in between. A configuration was disclosed in which the second heat sink 82B was oriented obliquely.

Due to this configuration, the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are intensively cooled by cooling air RF1 and RF2 from the radiation fins 82FN on the upstream side of the first air path F1.

Furthermore, since the two cooling fans 60 and 61 have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around vertical axes, it is possible to increase the height of the installation space for the two cooling fans 60 and 61. do not have. Therefore, the entire upper unit 100 can be made thinner.

Furthermore, the cover 70 covering just above the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B allows the tunnel-shaped first air path F1 that surrounds the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B to be easily formed. The structure can be easily formed without complicating the structure.

Furthermore, if the two cooling fans 60, 61 have the same dimensions and the same rating specifications as in the first embodiment, the procurement cost of the cooling fans 60, 61 can be reduced, or quality control can be facilitated. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, since the rotation directions of the rotary blades 60F and 61F are aligned in the same manner, effects such as ease of production and quality control can be expected.

Characteristic configuration 3:
Inside a flat upper case 16 with a horizontally long rectangular planar shape,
A first inverter circuit 81L having a first switching element, a second inverter circuit 81R having a second switching element, a front heat sink 82F to which the first switching element is attached, and the first inverter circuit 81R having a second switching element. a rear heat sink 82B to which a second switching element is attached, and an inverter circuit board 80 on which the first inverter circuit 81L and the second inverter circuit 81R are mounted,
The rear heat sink 82B and the front heat sink 82F are installed such that their respective radiation fin 82FN and 82BN portions face each other with a gap GP2 in between,
A partition wall 11 is installed in the gap GP2 to partition the respective radiation fins 82FN of the rear heat sink 82B and the front heat sink 82F,
A first cooling fan 60 and a second cooling fan 61 are provided,
The two cooling fans 60 and 61 supply cooling air RF1 and RF2 toward one end surface of the rear heat sink 82B and the front heat sink 82F, respectively,
The cooling air RF1 from the first cooling fan 60 is directed toward one surface (back surface) of the partition wall 11,
The cooling air RF2 from the second cooling fan 61 is directed toward the other surface (front surface) of the partition wall 11 and is supplied to each of them.

Due to this configuration, the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are intensively cooled by cooling air RF1 and RF2 from the radiation fins 82FN on the upstream side of the first air path F1.

In addition, the cooling air RF1 and RF2 from the two cooling fans 60 and 61 are separated by the partition wall 11 that vertically partitions the front heat sink 82F and the rear heat sink 82B, and the cooling air flows through the first air path F1. Since it travels linearly inside and is emitted from the downstream outlet, the heat exchange efficiency at the radiation fin 82FN portion is high, and even if the heat sinks 82B and 82F are small, a sufficient cooling effect can be expected. Therefore, it can be expected that the heat sinks 82B and 82F can be made smaller, thereby reducing costs and installation space. As a result, the upper unit 100 can be expected to be made smaller and thinner.

Characteristic configuration 4:
a first inverter circuit 81L having a first switching element;
a second inverter circuit 81R having a second switching element;
an inverter circuit board 80 on which the first inverter circuit 81L and the second inverter circuit 81R are mounted;
a first heat sink 82F to which the first switching element is attached;
a second heat sink 82B to which the second switching element is attached;
two cooling fans 60 and 61 that supply cooling air to the first heat sink and the second heat sink;
A control device (integrated control device MC, IH control unit 90) that controls the first inverter circuit 81L and the second inverter circuit 81R and controls the operation of the cooling fans 60 and 61;
The first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are arranged on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 with their respective heat dissipation fin portions facing each other with a gap GP2 in between,
A cover 70 is provided to cover the upper part of the inverter circuit board 80 and define a tunnel-shaped first air passage F1,
The cooling fans 60 and 61 are separated from the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B, and are connected to the air gap from both sides with a straight line (reference line) BL passing through the center of the air gap GP2 in between. Blows out cooling air in each of the two GP directions,
The control device disclosed a configuration in which the cooling fans 60 and 61 are operated during a period when either or both of the first inverter circuit 81L and the second inverter circuit 81R are driven.

Due to this configuration, the radiation fins 82FN and 82BN portions of the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are intensively cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 from the upstream side of the first air path F1. .

In addition, the two cooling fans 60 and 61 continue to operate during the period when either or both of the first inverter circuit 81L and the second inverter circuit 81R are driven, so that the two cooling fans 60 and 61 perform induction heating operation. Regardless of changes in the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, cooling air is always supplied to the heat sinks 82B and 82F to perform the cooling operation. Therefore, operation can be continued while avoiding abnormal temperature rise.

Characteristic configuration 5:
two inverter circuits 81L and 81R that supply high frequency power to each of the two IH coils 17L and 17R;
(one) inverter circuit board 80 on which the two inverter circuits 81L and 81R are mounted;
a cover 70 that is located between the IH coils 17L, 17R and the inverter circuit board 80 and defines a first air passage F1 extending in the left-right direction;
A first cooling fan 60 and a second cooling fan 61 that introduce outside air for cooling,
The first air passage F1 has an inlet FI on one left and right side, and an outlet FO on the other side,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 each have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around a vertical axis,
The air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 face the inlet FI in different directions,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 supply cooling air RF1 and RF2 from different directions toward the inlet FI, and connect the plurality of switching elements 83 constituting the inverter circuits 81L and 81R to the inlet FI. A configuration has been disclosed in which cooling is performed by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 flowing inside the first air path F1.

Due to this configuration, the switching elements 83 of the two inverter circuits 81L and 81R are efficiently and intensively cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 from the upstream side of the first air path F1.
In other words, the overall structure of the inverter circuit board 80 can be made smaller.

Furthermore, the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 are located above the first horizontal plane HP1,
The IH coils 17HL and 17HR are located on a second horizontal plane HP2 that is located above and apart from the first horizontal plane HP1,
The switching elements 83 were each located on the first horizontal plane HP1.
Therefore, the cooling air RF1 and RF2 blown out from the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 linearly move the upper side of the first horizontal plane HP1 from one side to the other. On the other hand, the switching element 83 is effectively cooled.

Furthermore, the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 is located at a position below the first horizontal plane HP1,
The ceiling surface of the cover 70 was configured to be located below the second horizontal plane HP2.
Therefore, the cooling air RF1 and RF2 blown out from the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 linearly move through the space below the cover 70 from one side. On the other hand, the switching element 83 is effectively cooled.

As a result, the sizes of the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B themselves are made smaller than before, and the air blowing capacity of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is changed to be smaller than before. It may be possible to do so. Therefore, it is possible to expect the installation space to be minimized and costs to be reduced.
Characteristic configuration 6:
A top plate 15 exposed to the top surface of the kitchen furniture 2 is provided on the top of the main body case HC,
Inside the main body case HC, there is a heating chamber 113 whose front opening is openable and closed by a door 114, a microwave heating device 120 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and an upper part of the top plate 15. an induction heating source 9 that heats an object to be heated placed in the
A first air intake port 164 introduces outside air for cooling the induction heating source 9 into the main body case HC, and a first intake port 164 introduces outside air for cooling the microwave heating source 189 into the main body case HC. The two air intake ports 152 (153F, 152B) were arranged on opposite sides of the heating chamber 113.

According to this configuration, in one cooking device, both microwave heating and induction heating can be performed, resulting in a highly convenient heating device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

In addition, the positions where the outside air for heating the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9 are introduced are separate from each other, so that the introduction of outside air from each other can be prevented from being adversely affected or interfered with. Furthermore, even if the rotational speed of the blower fan is the same, the generation of humming noise can be avoided, and a cooking device with quiet operating noise can be provided.

It is even better if the upper unit 100 housing the induction heating source 9 and the lower unit 200 housing the microwave heating device 120 are vertically partitioned by a partition wall (bottom surface 16S of the upper case 16). If the upper and lower parts are divided by the structure in this way, it is possible to prevent a part of the cooling air from flowing in an unintended direction between the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200, and the cooling effect of the target area is not impaired. do not have.

Furthermore, when the central operation section 40 and the integrated control device MC are arranged in the upper unit 100 as in the first embodiment, it is even better if the partition wall 16S is formed of a metal material. That is, due to the presence of the metal partition wall 16S, there is no fear that unnecessary noise or radio waves will adversely affect the other between the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9. Therefore, even if microwaves leak from around the microwave oscillation section 122, for example, electronic components on the upper unit 100 side can be prevented from being adversely affected by the microwaves. Therefore, for example, the microcomputer that constitutes the integrated control device MC, which is an important control means on the upper unit 100 side, the detection circuit of the touch switch that constitutes the input operation section 40, etc., may malfunction due to the leaked microwaves. This prevents detection failures and unstable operation.

Characteristic configuration 7:
The main body case HC is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B by a partition wall 16S,
The upper space 300A further includes an input operation section 40 for selecting a heating source, and an integrated control device MC that receives an input signal from the input operation section,
The input operation section 40 includes a right operation section 40R that specifies the operating conditions of the right heating section 17HR, a left operation section 40L that specifies the operating conditions of the left heating section 17HL, and the oven heat source 188 and the microwave. A central operation section 40M for specifying operating conditions for both of the heating sources 189,
Outside air introduced from the first air intake port 164 by a second cooling fan 61 passes below the input operation section 40 .

According to this configuration, since the central operating section 40M is used for both the oven heat source 188 and the microwave heating source 189, the operating area for input keys, etc. in the central operating section 40M is secured even in a narrow installation space. can.
Furthermore, since the outside air passes below the input operation section 40, overheating of the electrical components constituting the input operation section 40, as well as malfunctions and damage caused by the overheating, can be prevented.
In addition, since the partition wall 16S is made of metal in the first embodiment, even if microwave leakage or electromagnetic noise occurs in the lower space, the propagation to the upper space 300A side can be suppressed, and the upper space 300A This has the advantage that it is possible to prevent an adverse effect on the control part of, for example, the integrated control device MC.

Characteristic configuration 8:
A top plate 15 that is exposed to the top surface of the kitchen furniture 2 is provided on the top of the main body case HC,
Inside the main body case HC, there is a heating chamber 113 whose front opening is openable and closed by a door 114, a microwave heating device 120 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and an upper part of the top plate 15. an induction heating source 9 that heats an object to be heated placed in the
The interior of the main body case HC is divided into two parts, upper and lower, by a bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. In other words, the bottom surface 16S (which serves as a partition wall) of the metal upper case 16 partitions the upper space 300A and the lower space 300B.
Further, the upper space 300A accommodates the IH coils 17L and 17R of the induction heating source 9, and an inverter circuit board 80 on which an inverter circuit 81 for the IH coils 17L and 17R is mounted,
The lower space 300B accommodates the microwave heating device 120,
The upper air passage AH that guides the cooling air for the induction heating source 9 passes through the bottom wall surface 16S serving as the partition wall (via the ventilation hole 64) to introduce the cooling outside air from the outside of the lower space 300B. was introduced,
A lower air passage UH guiding cooling air for the microwave heating source 120 is formed in the lower space 300B,
The heat radiation part 122H of the microwave heating source 189 is arranged in the lower air passage UH.

According to this configuration, in one cooking device, both microwave heating and induction heating can be performed, resulting in a highly convenient heating device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, since the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9 are vertically partitioned by a metal partition wall (bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16), it is not necessary to provide a dedicated partition plate. Due to the presence of the partition wall, there is no fear that unnecessary noise or radio waves will adversely affect the other between the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9. Furthermore, in the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9, it is possible to prevent the introduction of outside air from being adversely affected or interfering with each other.
Furthermore, since an upper air passage and a lower air passage are separately provided in both the upper space 300A and the lower space 300B, overheating of electric circuit components, heat generating parts, etc. of both the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9 can be prevented. This can be prevented and the lifespan can be extended.

Characteristic configuration 9:
A top plate 15 exposed to the top surface of the kitchen furniture 2 is provided on the top of the main body case HC,
Inside the main body case HC, there is a heating chamber 113 whose front opening is openable and closed by a door 114, a microwave heating source 120 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber, and a microwave heating source 120 located above the top plate 15. An induction heating source 9 that heats a placed object to be heated,
The interior of the main body case HC is divided into two spaces, an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B formed below the partition wall 16S, by a metal partition wall (bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16). ,
The upper space 300A accommodates the heating coils 17L, 17R of the induction heating source 9 and an inverter circuit board 80 on which an inverter circuit for the heating coils is mounted,
The lower space 300B accommodates the microwave heating source 120,
The upper air passage AH that guides cooling air to the upper space 300A penetrates the partition wall (ventilation hole 64) and introduces outside air from the outside of the lower space,
A lower air passage UH that guides cooling air to the lower space 300B is formed in the lower space 300B and introduces outside air from a different position from the upper air passage AH,
The lower air passage UH has a heat dissipation section 122H of the microwave heating source 120 disposed downstream of the outside air inlet (second intake ports 152F, 152B), and is configured to cool the heat dissipation section 122H after cooling the heat dissipation section 122H. The structure is such that wind is discharged to the outside through an exhaust duct 102 isolated from the upper air passage AH.

According to this configuration, in one cooking device, both microwave heating and induction heating can be performed, resulting in a highly convenient heating device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, since the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9 are vertically divided by a metal partition wall (bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16), it is not necessary to provide a dedicated partition plate. Due to the presence of the partition wall, there is no fear that unnecessary noise or radio waves will adversely affect the other between the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9. Furthermore, in the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9, it is possible to prevent the introduction of outside air from being adversely affected or interfering with each other.

Furthermore, the air after cooling the heat radiation part 122H of the microwave heating source 120 flows inside the upper space 300A (cooling space), and separate upper and lower air passages are secured in both the lower space 300B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent overheating of electric circuit components, heat generating parts, etc. of both the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9, and a longer life can be expected.

In the first embodiment, there is one exhaust duct 102, but the cooling air in the internal route and the cooling air in the external route explained in FIG. 27 are routed through individual exhaust ducts provided at different positions. It may also be configured to emit. In addition, an exhaust duct is not necessarily limited to one formed of a dedicated cylindrical member, but is one that utilizes the space between two adjacent members (for example, the side of a metal plate and the surface of a metal case). It may be a passageway.

Characteristic configuration 10:
A top plate 15 exposed to the top surface of the kitchen furniture 2 is provided on the top of the main body case HC,
Inside the main body case HC, there is a heating chamber 113 whose front opening 114A is openable and closed by a door 114, a microwave heating device 120 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and a top plate 115. An induction heating source 9 that heats an object placed above,
The interior of the main body case HC is divided into two spaces, an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B, by a metal partition wall 16S,
The upper space 300A accommodates IH coils 17L and 17R and an inverter circuit board 80 for the IH coils,
The lower space 300B accommodates the microwave heating device 120,
The upper space 300A has first cooling fans 60 and 61 that introduce outside air for cooling the induction heating source 9 from outside the lower space 300B,
The lower space 300B has cooling fans 128 and 129 that introduce outside air for cooling the microwave heating device 120,
This configuration is characterized in that the cooling fans 128 and 129 are operated independently and independently of the heating operation by the induction heating device 120.

According to this configuration, in one cooking device, both microwave heating and induction heating can be performed, resulting in a highly convenient heating device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

The main body case HC further includes an oven heat source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113, and the lower cooling fans 128, 129 to cool the lower space 300B during the heating operation of the oven heat source 188. It was configured to drive.
Therefore, oven cooking is also possible, and since the cooling configuration of the lower unit 200 can be shared, a highly convenient composite heating cooker can be provided even for kitchen furniture where installation space is limited.

Furthermore, it includes an IH control section 90 and a microwave heating control section 130 that controls the microwave oscillation section 122A of the microwave heating device 120,
During a period in which only the heating operation by the microwave heating device 120 is being performed, the microwave heating control unit 130 operates the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, and the IH control unit 90 operates the first cooling fan 128 and 129. The cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are not operated,
During the period when the induction heating source 9 is performing the heating operation, the IH control section 90 operates the (upper) first cooling fan 60, and the microwave heating control section 130 operates the lower cooling fan. Do not drive 128 or 129.

Therefore, the power consumption of the entire heating cooker 1 can be suppressed to a minimum, and the operation noise of the heating cooker can also be made quiet.

Furthermore, during the period of microwave cooking, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 of the upper unit 100 are not operated at all in "normal times". However, in "extraordinary times", the vehicle may be operated. The "extraordinary time" here refers to, for example, a case where one induction heating cooking is completed and the next microwave cooking is started, and the hot air from the induction heating still remains, and for example, the top plate 15 is heated to a high temperature. This is the case. In this case, the IH control unit 90 continues to operate the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 based on the temperature detection data of the temperature detection circuit 93, and performs cooling with outside air. Therefore, the operation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 and the operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 of the lower unit 200 may overlap for a certain period of time.

Conversely, when induction heating cooking is started after oven heating cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is lowered and the next heating cooking (especially microwave heating cooking) is started. The lower cooling fans 128 and 129 continue to operate so that there is no problem when executing "warming" in the control menu). Therefore, the operating time of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 and the operating time of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 of the upper unit 100 may partially overlap.

Characteristic configuration 11:
A heating chamber 113 whose front opening is openable and closed by a door 114 is provided inside the main body case HC installed inside the kitchen furniture 2, and a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113. An induction heating source 9 that heats an object to be heated,
The interior of the main body case HC is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B with a metal partition wall 16S as a boundary,
The upper space 300A houses an IH coil 17 and an induction heating inverter circuit board 80,
The lower space 300B accommodates a microwave generation source 122 and a microwave heating inverter circuit board 121,
Outside air is introduced into the upper space 300A by a first cooling fan 60 and a second cooling fan 61 from ventilation holes 64 and 164 communicating with the outside of the lower space 300B without passing through the lower space 300B. It has an upper air passage AH,
The lower space 300B has a lower air passage UH through which outside air is introduced by the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 from the intake ports 152F and 152B at the lower part of the main body case HC,
The lower air passage UH includes a first lower air passage in which an inverter circuit board 121 for the microwave heating source 189 is accommodated, and a second lower air passage in which a heat dissipation section 122H of the microwave generation source 122 is disposed. This configuration is characterized by the following.

According to this configuration, in one cooking device, both microwave heating and induction heating can be performed, resulting in a highly convenient heating device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

In addition, the cooling effect of the internal space of the main body case HC is high, and since outside air is introduced without going through the heating space of the lower space 300B, cooking can be performed without adversely affecting the heating chamber 113, providing convenience. It is possible to provide a complex heating cooker with high performance.

Characteristic configuration 12:
a microwave heating source 189 that heats the food to be cooked within the heating chamber 113;
an oven heat source 188 that heats the inside of the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40 that accepts user operations;
an integrated display unit 30 that is shared by the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and has a display screen 30D;
A control unit (IH control unit 90, integrated control device MC) that controls the microwave heat source 189 and the oven heat source 188,
The input operation unit 40 includes an input key 43M1 for selecting a specific control menu (for example, "warming") from a group of control menus, and a heating button for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. It has a start input key 43MS that can issue operation commands,
When the control unit determines that the input key 43M1 has been pressed, it displays one control menu (for example, "warming") and one or more "control condition" information applied to the control menu (this is a heating The display screen 30D (first area 30L, second area 30M) displays information indicating a combination of intensity information (including thermal power value) and/or target temperature information 30T (for example, 80°C). ),
The control unit displays reference information 30P (recommended text) for heating cooking corresponding to the control menu or the control conditions, and when the start input 43MS key is pressed in this state, the control unit displays the control menu (for example, This configuration is characterized by starting execution of "warming").

According to this configuration, in one cooking device, both microwave heating and oven heating can be performed, resulting in a highly convenient heating device that can handle a wide range of cooking.
Moreover, on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 shared by the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, when selecting one control menu when performing microwave heating, the specific control menu (for example, " Before starting cooking by selecting "Warming"), 30 pages of reference information (recommended text) corresponding to the combination of the control menu and one or more "control conditions" will be displayed, allowing the user to control the Can assist in finalizing the menu. Therefore, even if it is a complex type cooking device, it can be made into a cooking device that is easy to use.

Characteristic configuration 13:
A heating chamber 113;
a microwave heating source 189;
an oven heat source 188 that heats the inside of the heating chamber 113;
Input operation section 40;
an integrated display unit 30 that is shared by the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and has a display screen 30D;
A control unit (integrated control device MC, heating chamber control unit 159, and microwave heating control unit 130) that controls the microwave heat source 189, the oven heat source 188, and the integrated display unit 30,
The input operation unit 40 includes a first (specific) control menu (for example, "warming") that uses a microwave heating source from the control menu group, and a second (specific) control menu that uses an oven heating source. menu selection means (input key 43M1) for selecting a control menu (e.g. "oven");
When the first control menu (e.g., "warming") is displayed on the display screen 30D, the control section displays a display 30K that allows identification of the microwave heating source and a display 30K of the control menu. (for example, "warming") and/or target temperature information 30T (for example, 80 degrees Celsius). This configuration is characterized in that it is displayed (for example, on display screen 4ST in FIG. 42).

According to this characteristic structure 13, two types of heating, microwave heating and oven heating, can be carried out in one cooking device, resulting in a highly convenient heating device that can handle a wide range of cooking.
Moreover, the integrated display section shared by the two types of heating sources displays the first control menu (for example, "warming") from the control menu group on the display screen 30D. In this case, information indicating a combination of the display 30K that can identify the microwave heating source 189 and the target temperature information 30T (e.g., 80° C.) applied to the first control menu (e.g., "warming") is displayed. , Before the user starts operating the heating source, the control conditions such as the heating source and target temperature related to the control menu can be confirmed, reducing the burden of input operations on the user. Therefore, even if it is a complex type cooking device, it can be made into a cooking device that is easy to use.

Characteristic configuration 14:
an upper unit 100 that has an induction heating source 9 that heats an object to be heated and is supported by the kitchen furniture 2;
a lower unit 200 attached to the upper unit 100 and containing a heating chamber 113;
A microwave heating device 120 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113 and an oven heating device 140 that heats the heating chamber 113 are arranged in the lower unit 200,
The upper unit 100 includes an integrated control device MC that centrally controls the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating device 120, and the oven heating device 140,
The upper unit 100 includes a filter circuit board 54 mounted with a filter circuit that receives power from the commercial power supply 99, and an inverter circuit board 54 mounted with a (first) inverter circuit 81 that receives power from the filter circuit board 54. 80, and
The lower unit 200 receives power from the microwave heating control section 130 of the microwave heating device 120, the heating chamber control section 159 of the oven heating device 140, and the filter circuit board 54 (second). The inverter circuit board 121A is arranged,
The filter circuit of the upper unit 100 supplies power for the heating sources of the control section 130 of the microwave heating device and the oven heating device 140, respectively.

Therefore, according to this characteristic configuration 14, by providing the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 with a total of three types of heating sources, a wider range of complex cooking can be performed than conventionally.
In addition, through centralized control by the integrated control device MC, the inverter circuit boards placed in the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 can be linked, and heating power can be distributed from the filter circuit of the upper unit to the three heating sources. , it is possible to provide a built-in complex heating cooker that can also reduce noise return to the commercial power supply side.

Characteristic configuration 15:
an upper unit 100 having an induction heating source 9 for heating an object to be heated;
a lower unit 200 attached to the upper unit 100 and containing a heating chamber 113;
A microwave heating device 120 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113 and an oven heating device 140 that heats the heating chamber 113 are arranged in the lower unit 200,
The upper unit 100 includes an integrated control device MC that centrally controls the induction heating source 17, the microwave heating device 120, and the oven heating device 140,
The upper unit 100 includes a power supply circuit board 55 that receives power from a commercial power supply 99, and an inverter circuit board 80 on which a (first) inverter circuit 81 is mounted,
In the lower unit 200, a microwave heating control section 130 of the microwave heating device 120, a heating chamber control section 159 of the oven heating device 140, and a (second) inverter circuit board 121 are arranged,
The power supply circuit board 55 is arranged on the downstream side of the cooling air passage (first air passage F1) of the cooling fan 60 that cools the (first) inverter circuit 81,
The control unit 130 of the microwave heating device and the oven heating device 140 are configured to receive power for their heating sources from the filter circuit board 54 of the upper unit 100.

Therefore, according to characteristic configuration 15, by providing the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 with a total of three types of heating sources, it is possible to perform a wider range of complex cooking than ever before.
Moreover, the inverter circuit boards 80 and 121 disposed in the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200, respectively, can be linked through centralized control by the integrated control device MC.
Furthermore, the filter circuit board 54 is branched from the filter circuit board 54 to distribute heating power to three heating sources, and the filter circuit board 54 is disposed downstream of the cooling air passage (first air passage F1) of the first cooling fan 60. is arranged, it is also possible to prevent the filter circuit board 54 from overheating.

Characteristic configuration 16:
an upper unit 100 having an induction heating source 17 for heating an object to be heated;
a lower unit 200 attached to the upper unit 100 and containing a heating chamber 113;
A microwave heating device 120 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113 and an oven heating device 140 that heats the heating chamber 113 are arranged in the lower unit 200,
The upper unit 100 includes an integrated control device MC that centrally controls the induction heating source 17, the microwave heating device 120, and the oven heating device 140,
The upper unit 100 includes a power supply circuit board 55 that receives power from a commercial power supply 99, and an inverter circuit board 80 on which a (first) inverter circuit 81 is mounted,
In the lower unit 200, a microwave heating control section 130 of the microwave heating device 120, a heating chamber control section 159 of the oven heating device 140, and a (second) inverter circuit board 121 are arranged,
The power supply circuit board 55 is arranged on the downstream side of the cooling air passage (first air passage F1) of the cooling fan 60 that cools the (first) inverter circuit 81,
The control unit 130 of the microwave heating device and the oven heating device 140 are connected to a power supply circuit board 55 provided on the downstream side (non-commercial power supply side) of the filter circuit board 54 of the upper unit 100. This configuration supplies low-voltage power.

Therefore, according to characteristic configuration 16, by providing the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 with a total of three types of heating sources, it is possible to perform a wider range of complex cooking than ever before.
Moreover, the inverter circuit boards 80 and 121 disposed in the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200, respectively, can be linked through centralized control by the general control device MC.
Furthermore, a configuration is adopted in which prescribed low voltage power is distributed from the power supply circuit board 55 to the IH control unit 90, the control unit 130, and the control unit 159, and the passage of the cooling air RF1 of the first cooling fan 60 (the first Since the power circuit board 55 is arranged on the downstream side of the air path F1), overheating of the power circuit board 55 can also be prevented, and stable power can be supplied to the control device 90 and the like.

Characteristic configuration 17:
an upper unit 100 having a first heat source (induction heating source) 9 that heats the object to be heated via a top plate 15 on which the object to be heated is placed;
a lower unit 200 that is installed below the upper unit 100 and includes a heating chamber 113 whose front opening is openable and closed by a door 114;
The lower unit 200 includes a microwave heating device 120 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, an oven heating device 140 that heats the heating chamber, and a cooling fan 128 that cools the microwave heating device. 129 and,
The microwave generation source 122 of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged along one of the left and right side wall surfaces of the heating chamber 113, and the oscillation section 122A of the microwave generation source 122 is located along the back surface of the heating chamber 113. It is installed horizontally so that it protrudes to the side,
A power feeding port 180 communicating with the inside of the heating chamber 113 and an antenna case 124 into which microwaves from the microwave generation source 122 are introduced are provided on the back side of the heating chamber 113,
A rotatable antenna 125 is disposed within the antenna case 124 for propagating microwaves oscillated from the microwave generation source 122 into the space within the heating chamber 113 via the power feeding port 180. This is the configuration.

Because of this characteristic configuration 17, the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating device 120 and the antenna case 124 are installed in a series in the space from one side wall (right side) to the back side of the heating chamber 113. Therefore, these devices can be built into the lower unit 200 having a narrow internal space.

Characteristic configuration 18:
An upper unit 100 supported by the kitchen furniture 2 and having an induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated via a top plate 15 on which the object to be heated is placed;
a lower unit 200 that is installed below the upper unit 100 and includes a heating chamber 113 whose front opening is openable and closed by a door 114;
The lower unit 200 includes a microwave heating device 120 that receives power from the upper unit 100 and supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, an oven heating device 140 that heats the heating chamber 113, and a microwave heating device 140 that heats the heating chamber 113. Cooling fans 128 and 129 are provided to cool the wave heating device 120,
The microwave generation source 122 of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged along one of the right side wall surface or the left side wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and the oscillation section 122A of the microwave generation source 122 is located on the back side of the heating chamber 113. It is installed horizontally so that it protrudes from the
An antenna case 124 into which microwaves from the microwave generation source 122 are introduced is provided on the back side of the heating chamber 113,
Inside the antenna case 124 is a device for propagating the microwaves oscillated from the microwave generation source 122 into the space inside the heating chamber 113 via a power feed port 180 provided on the back surface of the heating chamber 113. Arranging the rotating antenna 125,
The operation of the induction heating source 17, the microwave heating device 120, the oven heating device 140, and the cooling fans 128 and 129 is controlled by an integrated control device MC located on the upper unit 100 side. It is.

For this characteristic configuration 18, the microwave oscillator (magnetron 122) of the microwave heating device 120 and the antenna case 124 are arranged in series in the space from one side wall surface (right side surface) to the back side of the heating chamber 113. These devices can be installed in the lower unit 200 with a narrow internal space.

Furthermore, the integrated control device MC that controls the induction heating source 17 also centrally controls the microwave heating device 120, the oven heating device 140, the third cooling fan 128, and the fourth cooling fan 129. It is possible to provide a built-in composite heating cooker 1 in which the cooperation of heating sources is reliably executed.

Characteristic configuration 19:
An upper unit 100 supported by the kitchen furniture 2 and having an induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated via a top plate 15 on which the object to be heated is placed;
a lower unit 200 that is installed below the upper unit 100 and includes a heating chamber 113 whose front opening is openable and closed by a door 114;
The lower unit 200 includes a microwave heating device 120 that receives power from the upper unit 100 and supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and an oven heating device 140 that heats the heating chamber 113. ,
The microwave heating device 120 includes a microwave heating control unit 130, a microwave generation source 122, and an inverter circuit board 121 that supplies high frequency power to the microwave generation source 122,
The oven heating device 140 includes a heating chamber control section 159,
The microwave generation source 122 and the first inverter circuit board 121 are arranged along one side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 and separated from each other in the front-back direction,
Outside air is drawn from outside the lower unit 200 below the first inverter circuit board 121 and below the heat radiation section 122H of the microwave generation source 122, and the air is connected to the inverter circuit board 121 and below. This configuration includes a cooling fan (cooling fan A) 128 and a cooling fan (cooling fan B) 129 that individually supply the heat radiation portion 122H.

Due to this characteristic configuration 19, the microwave oscillator (magnetron 122) of the microwave heating device 120 and the inverter circuit board 121 are concentrated on one side wall surface (right side surface) of the heating chamber 113, making it possible to save space in a narrow internal space. It can be built into the lower unit 200.

Characteristic configuration 20:
The main body case HC is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B by a partition wall 16S,
The upper space 300A further includes an input operation section 40 for selecting a heating source, and an integrated control device MC that receives an input signal from the input operation section,
The input operation section 40 includes a right operation section 40R for specifying operating conditions for the right heating section 17HR, a left operation section 40L for specifying operating conditions for the left heating section 17HL, and for controlling the oven heat source and the microwave heating. a central operation section 40M for specifying operating conditions for both sources;
Below the input operation unit 40 is a built-in complex type heating cooking device configured to allow outside air introduced by the first cooling fan 61 from the first intake port 164 (ventilation hole 64) to pass through the second cooling fan 61. It is a vessel.

According to this characteristic configuration 20, since the central operating section 40M is used for both the oven heat source 188 and the microwave heating source 189, the operating area for input keys, etc. on the central operating section 40M even in a narrow installation space. can be secured.

Furthermore, since the outside air passes below the input operation section 40, overheating of the electrical components constituting the input operation section 40, as well as malfunctions and damage caused by the overheating, can be prevented.
Note that if the partition wall 16S is made of metal, even if microwave leakage or electromagnetic noise occurs in the lower space 300B, propagation to the upper space 300A side can be suppressed, and the control part of the upper space 300A, for example This has advantages such as being able to prevent adverse effects on the integrated control device MC.

Characteristic configuration 21:
A horizontally long type with a top plate on the top on which the object to be heated is placed, and a maximum height H1 of 50 mm or less, or a flat side wall surface with a maximum height H10 of 40 mm or less below the flange 16A. Case 16,
Inside the case 16, there are a plurality of IH coils 17L, 17R that can respectively heat objects to be heated at two locations on the top plate, and two inverter circuits 81L, 81R that supply high frequency power to each of the IH coils. , an inverter circuit board 80 on which the two inverter circuits are mounted, and a cover 70 that is installed between the IH coils 17L, 17R and the inverter circuit board 80, and partitions a first air path F1 between them. and two cooling fans 60 and 61 that introduce outside air for cooling from the outside of the case 16,
The cover 70 is formed with a maximum height H5 of 27 mm or less in order to form the flat first air passage F1 between the cover 70 and the inverter circuit board 80,
The two cooling fans 60 and 61 are a first cooling fan 60 having rotary blades for centrifugal air blowing, and a second cooling fan 61 having rotary blades for centrifugal air blowing,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have a maximum height of 25 mm or less of the fan cases 60A and 61A including the fan motor, and are installed in close contact with or close to the bottom wall surface of the case 16. and introduces outside air for cooling through the ventilation holes 64 formed in the bottom wall surface of the case 16 by the rotation of the rotary blades,
The first air path F1 into which the first cooling air FR1 from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling air FR2 from the second cooling fan 61 are combined and introduced is the inverter circuit board 80. The structure was characterized by extending in a straight line in the left and right direction above.

Due to this characteristic configuration 21, it is possible to provide an induction heating cooker in which the cooling effect of the IH coil installation space CK is improved and the upper case 16 is made thinner.

Further, the inverter circuit board 80 includes a first heat sink 82F equipped with one switching element for the inverter circuit, and a second heat sink 82B equipped with another switching element for the inverter circuit. have,
The first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B were arranged such that their respective radiation fin portions faced each other with a first gap of 8 mm in size.

With this configuration, it is possible to improve the cooling effect of the heat sink in the IH coil installation space CK, and to provide an induction heating cooker in which the upper case 16 is made thinner.

Furthermore, the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B have a maximum height of about 20 mm, and have an inclined surface on the opposite side from the radiation fin 82FN portion,
The switching element 83 was configured to be attached to the inclined surfaces of the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B, respectively.

With this configuration, the cooling effect of the heat sinks 82F and 82B in the IH coil installation space CK can be improved, and the switching element 83 can be effectively cooled. Moreover, since the heights of the heat sinks 82F and 82B are low, it is possible to provide an induction heating cooker in which the upper case 16 is made thinner.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, the vertical cross-sectional shape of the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 has a maximum height H8 of 20 mm or less, and Moreover, it had a flat shape with a minimum width dimension W11 of 50 mm or more.

Due to this configuration, the installation height of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the IH coil installation space CK can be lowered, and the flat structure of the first air path F1 and the heat sinks 82F and 82B can be lowered. Due to the synergistic effect with the reduced height configuration, it is possible to provide an induction heating cooker in which the upper case 16 is made thinner.

Other features.
In the configuration of the first embodiment, various practical effects and merits can be expected as described below.
(1) When the case A 150 and the case B 151 that constitute the microwave heating device 120 are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction and adjacent to each other as shown in FIG. 8, two independent cooling air RF5 , RF6 can be easily and compactly guided.
(2) A structure in which when the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction and adjacent to each other as shown in FIG. 8, two independent cooling air flows RF5 and RF6 are guided. can be realized easily and compactly.
(3) Important parts such as the case A 150 and case B 151 that constitute the microwave heating device 120, the magnetron 122, the latch switch 132A of the closure detection unit 139 of the door 114, and the door switch 132B are placed on the right side of the heating chamber 113. Since they are integrated, if inspection or repair of these parts becomes necessary, it can be done only on the right side of the lower case 101, which is convenient. For example, if the side vertical wall 101R constituting the right outer shell of the lower case 101 is removed, all of the above-mentioned parts are exposed, making maintenance and inspection easier.
(4) Inside the main body case HC, an oven heat source 188 for heating the heating chamber 113 is further provided above the heating chamber 113, and an oven heat source 188 is provided inside the lower unit 200 (microwave heating The lower air path (for the source 189) has an internal path that branches in the middle and passes through the inside of the heating chamber 113, and an external path that passes through the outside of the heating chamber 113, and the external path is , are arranged above the oven heat source 113 and below the partition wall 16S. Therefore, even if the heating chamber 113 becomes extremely hot during oven cooking, the heat can be prevented from being transmitted to the partition wall 16S. Thereby, there is no fear that the temperature of the inverter circuit board 80 and the like built in the upper unit 100 will increase.

Embodiment 2.
FIG. 47 is a simplified plan view of a built-in composite heating cooker disclosing Embodiment 2 of the present invention. FIG. 48 is a plan view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 47 with the top plate removed. FIG. 49 is a plan view showing a state in which the IH coil, coil base, etc. are further removed from the cooking device shown in FIG. 48. FIG. 50 is a plan view of the heating cooker with the cover removed from the state shown in FIG. 48. FIG. 51 is a plan view showing the flow of cooling air in the state of FIG. 50. FIG. 52 is a plan view of the cooking device showing the power cord and main power wiring in the state shown in FIG. 50. FIG. 53 is an enlarged vertical cross-sectional view showing a part of the cooking device shown in FIG. 47 supported by kitchen furniture. FIG. 54 is a simplified perspective view of the main parts of the lower unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 47. FIG. 55 is an enlarged plan view of essential parts of the upper unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 47. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing the main control relationships of the cooking device of FIG. 47. FIG. 57 is a circuit diagram showing details of the inverter circuit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 47. FIG. 58 shows a modification of the second embodiment of the present invention, and is a plan view showing a state in which the top plate, IH coil, etc. are removed. Note that parts that are the same as or corresponding to the configuration of the first embodiment described in FIGS. 1 to 46 are given the same reference numerals.

This second embodiment is characterized in that the number of induction heating parts of the cooking device 1 is increased to three. Furthermore, since the number of inverter circuits is increased by one, there are two IH control sections 90, one of which is the (first) IH control section 90M1. The other is the (second) IH control section 90M2.

FIG. 47 will be explained.
This cooking device 1 differs greatly from the first embodiment in that the induction heating section 17H includes a center heating section 17HM in addition to the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR. In addition, since this center heating part 17HM is provided, the positions of the left heating part 17HL and the right heating part 17HR are slightly moved forward compared to the case of the first embodiment.

17MS is a circular position mark displayed by printing or the like on the upper surface of the top plate 15 to indicate a desirable position to place a heated object N (not shown) such as a metal pot. In other words, this indicates the presence of the central heating section 17HM.
The central IH coil 17M constituting the central heating section 17HM is driven by an independent inverter circuit 81M. This point will be explained later with reference to FIG. 57.

The center IH coil 17M is configured to be driven independently from the left IH coil 17L and the right IH coil 17R. The central IH coil 17M is controlled by a (second) IH control section 90M2.

The central operation section 40M is equipped with an input key (not shown) for selecting the central heating section 17HM. When the input key is operated, "Central Heater", which is one of the control menus, can be selected on the integrated display section 30, as described in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment. Thereby, the heating operation in the central heating section 17HM can be specified.

TS10 is a thermistor as a contact type temperature sensor, and is arranged in a cavity at the center of the central IH coil 17M. Like the temperature sensor TS4 of the first embodiment, this temperature sensor TS10 is in direct contact with the lower surface of the top plate 15 or in contact with the lower surface of the top plate 15 via a thermally conductive inclusion. . Thereby, the temperature of the top plate 15 is measured. A signal indicating the temperature measurement result is then transmitted to the IH control section 90M2.

47 and 49, 320 is an exhaust port corresponding to the exhaust port 20 of Embodiment 1, which discharges cooling air RF7 from the lower unit 101 of the cooking device 1. The exhaust port 320 is located at the rear right position of the upper unit 100 and is far away from the exhaust duct 102 (not shown) located at the rear left position of the upper unit 100.

A portion of the cooling air RF7 that has cooled the heat radiation section 122H of the magnetron 122 is discharged from the exhaust port 320. Note that the cooling air RF7 discharged from here does not reach the heating chamber 113 or the exhaust duct 102 (see FIGS. 8 and 11 in the first embodiment), but flows into the duct 307 immediately after cooling the heat radiation section 122H. (See FIG. 54), it can be directly discharged to the outside of the cooking device 1. That is, in the process of being discharged to the outside, the cooling air RF7 does not merge with the cooling air RF4R in the upper air passage AH of the upper unit 100.

Next, FIG. 48 will be explained.
17C is a coil base that is located below the left IH coil 17L, right IH coil 17R, and center IH coil 17M, and supports these IH coils horizontally. The coil base 17C has a circular frame shape with a diameter larger than that of the IH coils 17L, 17R, and 17M. Large ventilation holes are formed throughout to improve the flow of air in the vertical direction.
The coil base 17C supports each IH coil 17L, 17R, and 17M with eight arms extending radially from the center.

In the second embodiment, one non-contact temperature sensor TS5 such as an infrared sensor is provided at the front and rear of the left IH coil 17L with the center thereof sandwiched therebetween. The temperature sensor TS5 is fixed to the coil base 17C. TS3 is a contact temperature sensor such as a thermistor. This temperature sensor TS3 is installed at the center of the coil base 17C.

In the second embodiment, one non-contact temperature sensor TS6 such as an infrared sensor is provided at the front and rear of the right IH coil 17R with the center thereof sandwiched therebetween. The temperature sensor TS6 is fixed to the coil base 17C. TS4 is a contact type temperature sensor such as a thermistor. This temperature sensor TS4 is installed at the center of the coil base 17C.

Next, FIG. 49 will be explained.
A cover 70 is located below the left IH coil 17L and covers above the inverter board 80. 70H is a small diameter ventilation hole (through hole) formed in the cover 70 at a position directly below the left IH coil 17L. This ventilation hole 70H has the effect of blowing a portion of the cooling air RF1 and RF2 blown into the first air path F1 toward the IH coil 17L side. Therefore, several or more ventilation holes 70H are formed. Although the cover 70 is entirely made of plastic material, it may also be formed by bending a thin metal plate.

On the other hand, below the right IH coil 17R, the cover 70 does not have a hole corresponding to the ventilation hole 70H. This is because the right edge of the cover 70 is located to the left of the center point of the right IH coil 17R, and there is no cover directly below the center of the right IH coil 17R.

In FIG. 49, 80M is an inverter circuit board on which the inverter circuit 81M is mounted. 82M1 is a heat sink installed on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80M, and is made of aluminum material.

82M2 is a heat sink installed on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80M, and is made of aluminum material. As shown in FIG. 55, these two heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2 are installed side by side with a slight distance in the left and right direction.

Next, in FIG. 50, XG is the intersection point where the blow line FL2 of the second cooling fan 60 and the blow line FL1 of the first cooling fan 60 intersect. This intersection XG is farther forward than the partition wall 11.
XB indicates a point where the air outlet line FL1 passing through the center point of the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 in the longitudinal direction and the partition wall 11 intersect.

Furthermore, FIG. 51 will be explained.
FIG. 51 shows the flow of cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61. Arrows RF1 and RF2 are cooling air that directly cools the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. Flows from left to right.

The IH coil 17L on the left side and the coil base 17C located directly below it are cooled from below by cooling air blown up from a ventilation hole 70H provided in the cover 70.

Further, the right IH coil 17R and the coil base 17C located directly below it are cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 immediately after coming out from the outlet FO of the first air path F1. Most of the cooling air becomes cooling air RF4 and reaches an exhaust window 52B (not shown) formed in a partition plate 52 (not shown) that partitions the rear of the filter circuit board 54 into front and back parts. The cooling air RF4R reaches the right exhaust port 65 and is finally discharged into the room from the exhaust cover 19.

Note that a part of the cooling air RF1 and RF2 cools the electrical components (for example, the transformer 57) mounted on the power supply circuit board 55, and then travels backward as the cooling air RF4R and is mounted on the filter circuit board 54. Cool electrical components (eg, choke coil 56).

On the other hand, a part of the cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 is not blown into the space inside the cover 70, that is, the first air passage F1, as shown by the thick arrow RFB, and is not blown into the space in front of the left edge of the cover 70. and is supplied to the heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2.

As shown in FIG. 55, the cooling air RFB collides at the center around the gap GP19 between the two heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2, and is divided into flows in three directions: right, left, and rear.

One of the branched streams A1 and A2 flows to the right through the gap between the narrow radiation fins 82M2F and the front part (surface part) of the heat sink 82M2. During this process, the heat sink 82M2 is cooled.

On the other hand, one of the branched streams C1 and C2 passes through the gap between the narrow radiation fins 82MF1 and the front part (surface part) of the heat sink 82M1, and flows to the left. During this process, the heat sink 82M1 is cooled.

Furthermore, one branch flow B passes through the gap GP19 between the two heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2 and flows backward. In this process, the heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2 are cooled, respectively.

By dividing the flow into three main directions, the effective contact area between the cooling air and the radiation fins 82MF1 and 82MF2 of the heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2 increases, and the cooling effect can be enhanced. As shown in FIG. 55, a simple configuration in which the left heat sink 82M1 is moved back by a certain distance W17 from the right heat sink 82M2 with respect to the cooling air RFB obliquely from the left side, It is possible to generate cooling air directed towards.

As shown by the arrow in FIG. 51, the divided flow A1 of the cooling air RFB is prevented from proceeding to the right by the partition wall 14, so it changes direction to the left and finally reaches the inverter circuit board 80M. It reaches the through hole 53L1 located at the rear. Then, as shown in FIG. 47, it is discharged to the outside from the spaces on both sides of the duct 102.

As described above, the positions of the inverter circuit board 80, the filter circuit board 54, the power supply circuit board 55, and the inverter circuit board 80M are aligned on the same plane (first horizontal plane) when viewed in the vertical direction. . The through holes 53L1 and 53R1 open above the first horizontal plane HP1.

In other words, the top surfaces of the filter circuit board 54 and the power supply circuit board 55 are aligned with the first horizontal plane HP1 located at the top surface of the inverter circuit board 80.

Further, the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 are located at the same positions as the inverter circuit board 80, the filter circuit board 54, the power supply circuit board 55, and the inverter circuit board 80M. , are on the same plane when viewed vertically.

With the above configuration, the inverter circuit board 80 and the inverter circuit board 80 are The filter circuit board 54, the power supply circuit board 55, and the inverter circuit board 80M are efficiently cooled.

In FIGS. 48 to 51, 89 is an insertion hole for introducing the power cord 106 into the upper unit 100. This insertion hole 89 is formed in the bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S of the upper case 16. The diameter of the insertion hole 89 is made slightly larger than the thickness of the power cord 106 (up to several millimeters).

As shown in FIG. 52, the power cord 106 is guided into the upper case 16 through the insertion hole 89 and connected to a connection port (connection terminal) 108A formed at the left end of the filter circuit board 54. After the power cord 106 is inserted into the insertion hole 89, a sealing material made of a highly elastic material such as rubber may be inserted to minimize the gap between the two.

108B is a connection port (connection terminal) provided at the right end of the inverter circuit board 80, and receives power from the filter circuit board 54 via the electric wire 119A.
108C is a connection port (connection terminal) provided at the right end of the inverter circuit board 80M, and receives power from the filter circuit board 54 via the electric wire 119B. Note that the electric wires 119A and 119B are wired so as to be suspended from the upper surface of the filter circuit board 54 (in the air) so as not to contact the upper surface of the filter circuit board 54 or its electrical components (choke coil 56, etc.).

An inverter circuit 81R for the right IH coil 17R and an inverter circuit 81L for the left IH coil 17L are mounted on the inverter circuit board 80.
In FIG. 52, the range of the inverter circuit 81R and the inverter circuit 81L is shown surrounded by a broken line frame.

The inverter circuit 81L for the IH coil 17L on the left side may be referred to as a "first inverter circuit", and the inverter circuit 81R for the IH coil 17R on the right side may be referred to as a "second inverter circuit". Further, the inverter circuit 81M may be referred to as a "third inverter circuit".

In FIG. 52, 109A is an output terminal section provided at the left end of the inverter circuit board 80. 109B is an output terminal section provided at the left end of the inverter circuit board 80.
The output terminal section 109A is for the inverter circuit 81L. The output terminal section 109B is for the inverter circuit 81R.

In FIG. 52, 109C is an output terminal section provided on the inverter circuit board 80M. This output terminal section 109C is for the inverter circuit 81M.
The high frequency power of each inverter circuit 81R, 81L, 81M is transmitted from the three output terminals 109A, 109B, 109C to each IH coil 17R, 17L, 17M by a dedicated cord (high voltage electric wire 350) (not shown). is supplied to
Note that the power cord 106 and the electric wires 119A and 119B are not shown in FIGS. 48 to 51.

Next, FIG. 53 will be explained.
In FIG. 53(A), 304 is a support metal fitting. This support fitting 304 is formed by press-molding a metal plate, for example, and integrates a vertical portion 304V and a horizontal portion (flange portion) 304H that bends at right angles from the upper end of this vertical portion 304V and extends in the horizontal direction. is forming.

The vertical portions of the support fittings 304 are fixed to at least the left and right sides of the lower case 101 of the cooking device 1 and at three locations on the back side by screws (not shown) or spot welding. Note that the support fittings 304 are fixed to the lower case 101 before being installed on the kitchen furniture 2.

FIG. 53(A) shows an example in which the support fitting 304 is interposed between the rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) 101B of the lower case 101 and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16.
With the above configuration, when the heating cooker 1 is inserted into the installation opening 2 of the kitchen furniture 2, the horizontal part 304H of the support fitting 304 will eventually become attached to the kitchen furniture 2 as shown in FIG. 53(A). It rests on the upper surface of the mouth edge and is supported by the kitchen furniture 2.

Further, the top plate 15 on the upper unit 100 side is also supported from below by a reinforcing plate 22, and the reinforcing plate 22 rests on the upper surface of the support fitting 304. Note that since the upper case 16 is fixed to the lower case 101 with screws or the like and is integrated, the weight is supported by the support fittings 304.

In addition, since there is a horizontal bent portion 16BX formed by further bending the upper end of the rear vertical wall 16B toward the rear BK, this horizontal bent portion 16BX cooperates with the reinforcing plate 22 to separate the upper case 16 and the lower case 101. A structure has been realized that supports both weights and, as a result, also reliably supports the lower case 101.

Next, the structure of FIG. 53(B) will be explained.
In the structure of FIG. 53(B), a spacer 310 is installed between the rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) 101B of the lower case 101 where the support fitting 304 is installed and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16. are doing. The other configurations are the same as in FIG. 53(A).

The spacer 310 is made of, for example, an elastic silicone rubber plate (thickness: 1 mm). This spacer 310 is, for example, fixed in advance to the outer surface of the rear vertical wall 16B by adhesive. Note that instead of silicone rubber, a thin plastic plate may be used.

Because of the above configuration, even in the structure shown in FIG. 53(B), when the heating cooker 1 is inserted into the installation opening 2 of the kitchen furniture 2, it will eventually be supported as shown in FIG. 53(B). The horizontal part 304H of the metal fitting 304 rests on the upper surface of the mouth edge of the kitchen furniture 2, and is supported by the kitchen furniture 2. Moreover, since both the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are fastened together with screws or the like with the spacer 310 interposed therebetween, the upper case 16, the lower case 101, and the spacer 310 are overlapped by the fastening. integrated in the state. Therefore, the strength of the box-shaped main body case HC is improved.

Also in FIG. 53(B), the horizontal bent portion 16BX cooperates with the reinforcing plate 22 to support the weight of both the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, and as a result, the lower case 101 is also securely supported. A supporting structure has been realized.

As described above, in the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the lower case 101 supports the upper case 16 and is placed on the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2.
According to the configuration of the second embodiment, for example, if the supporting metal plate 304 with high mechanical strength is prepared by using a metal plate thicker than the lower case 101, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 can be connected together. It can be placed directly on the kitchen furniture 2 with the support metal fittings, resulting in a solid installation state.

Next, FIG. 54 will be explained.
Reference numeral 129 denotes a fourth cooling fan (one of the lower cooling fans), which is installed directly above the intake port (second intake port) 152B (not shown) formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. There is.

A box-shaped case A151 that accommodates the heat radiation section 122H of the magnetron 122 is installed directly above the air intake port 152B. An opening 150H larger than the intake port 152B is formed in the bottom surface of the case A150.
The case A is entirely made of plastic material.

In this second embodiment, the lower air passage UH inside the lower unit 200 is configured as follows.
Internal path 1: The inverter circuit board 121 is cooled by outside air sucked in by the third cooling fan 128 from the second air intake port 152F. The rest is the same as in the first embodiment.
Internal path 2: The heat radiating section 122H is cooled by the outside air drawn in by the fourth cooling fan 129 from the second air intake port 152B.
A communication window 309 is opened on the left side wall of the case B151 that houses the heat dissipation section 122H and at a position close to the ceiling. This communication window 309 communicates with the gap GP5 and ultimately with the inside of the heating chamber 113.
On the other hand, a communication window 306 is opened on the rear wall of the case B151 at a position close to the ceiling. An exhaust duct 307 extending rearward is connected to the outside of this communication window 306. Note that although the exhaust duct 307 shown in FIG. 54 is inclined as a whole so that it becomes higher as it approaches the end portion 307E, it may also be in a form that extends in the horizontal direction.

A terminal end 307E of the exhaust duct 307 extends to the right end of the gap GP1 at the rear of the upper unit 100. The exhaust (exit) side terminal end 307E of the exhaust duct 307 extends vertically so as to pass through the gap GP1 without penetrating the upper space 300A on the upper unit 100 side, and has an open top surface. are doing.

As described above, in the structure of the second embodiment, the air path after the heat dissipation section 122H is branched into two, and apart from the exhaust air path passing through the heating chamber 113, the air path up to the terminal end 307E is divided into two. A shortened exhaust air path (exhaust duct 307) is formed. Therefore, the cooling air RF7 that has cooled the heat radiating section 122H can be released through a short exhaust air path via the exhaust duct 307, and the air path resistance can be reduced.

Next, FIG. 55 will be explained.
The two heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2 are entirely made of aluminum. Approximately 6 to 7 radiation fins 82MF1 and 82MF2 are integrally formed. These radiation fins 82MF1 and 82MF2 have a plate shape with a thin vertical thickness. The tips of each of these radiation fins 82MF1 and 82MF2 are installed so as to face the cover 70 side.

As shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, two IGBTs 79am and 79bm (power control switching element 83) are used in the inverter circuit 81M of the IH coil 17M. One IGBT 79am is installed on the right heat sink 82M1.

As shown in FIG. 55, one IGBT 79bm is attached to the left heat sink 82M1.
82MF1 is a radiation fin portion of the left heat sink 82M1. 82MF2 is a radiation fin portion of the right heat sink 82M2. These two radiation fins 82MF1 and 82MF2 are installed so that their tips face toward the cover 70 side.

In FIG. 55, GP19 is a space between two heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2. Incidentally, this GP19 is about 8 mm.
W17 is a dimension in which the left heat sink 82M1 is set back from the right heat sink 82M2. Incidentally, this W17 is about 10 mm. Note that a part of the cooling air from the cooling fan 60 is not blown into the space inside the cover 70, that is, into the first air passage F1, as shown by the thick arrow RFB in FIG. It passes through the space and is supplied to the heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2. This will be explained in detail later.

The positions of the inverter circuit board 80M, the filter circuit board 54, the power supply circuit board 55, and the inverter circuit board 80 are aligned on the same plane when viewed in the vertical direction.
On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, a partition wall 14 is vertically raised at a predetermined height between both the filter circuit board 54 and the inverter circuit board 80M. Therefore, the partition wall 14 has the effect of guiding the cooling air RF4R to the through hole 53R1 (see FIGS. 48 and 49) (see FIG. 51).

The through hole 53R1 is formed in the exhaust port plate 53R that stands vertically behind the filter circuit board 54 (on the right side). The through hole 53R1 is formed at a position slightly higher than the upper surface of the filter circuit board 54.

On the other hand, a through hole 53L1 is provided at the rear left side of a (second) inverter circuit board 80M, which will be described later. A large number of through holes 53L1 are formed side by side on the upper surface of the hollow box-shaped (left side) exhaust port plate 53 arranged on the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16.

Note that when induction heating is started by the IH coil 17M of the central heating section 17HM, both the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 start operating at the same time. Furthermore, after the induction heating is completed, the operation is also stopped at the same time.

Furthermore, when induction heating is started in the left heating section 17HL and right heating section 17HR, both the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 start operating at the same time, similar to the induction heating by the IH coil 17M of the central heating section 17HM. be done. Furthermore, after the induction heating is completed, the operation is also stopped at the same time.

Next, FIG. 56 will be explained.
90M1 is a (first) IH control section, which controls the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL. 90M2 is a (second) IH control section that controls the central heating section 17HM. The main parts of these two IH control units 90M1 and 90M2 are each realized by a microcomputer.
90R1 and 90R2 are storage devices, respectively.

The two inverter circuits 81L and 81R are controlled by an operation (driving) program stored in the storage device 90R1 of the IH control section 90M1.
Further, the inverter circuit 81M is controlled by an operation (driving) program stored in the storage device 90R2 of the IH control section 90M2.

The cooling fan drive circuit 62 is driven in response to drive signals from the IH control units 90M1 and 90M2.

Next, FIG. 57 will be explained.
The inverter circuits 81R and 81L of the right IH coil 17R and left IH coil 17L are basically the same as those shown in FIG. 28 of the first embodiment.
What is shown in FIG. 57 shows the inverter circuit of the central IH coil 17M.

74M is a drive circuit. As shown in FIG. 57, it includes a DC power supply circuit 75M, an inverter circuit 81M, a resonance capacitor 76m, an input current detection section 77am, and an output current detection section 77bm.
Current detection data from the input current detection section 77am and the output current detection section 77bm are sent to the (second) IH control section 90M2.

The input current detection unit 77am detects the current input from the AC power supply 99 to the DC power supply circuit 75M, that is, the current input to the drive circuit 74M, and outputs the detected value, that is, the voltage signal indicating the input current value, to a second voltage signal. output to the IH control unit 90M2.

The DC power supply circuit 75M includes a diode bridge 78am, a reactor 78bm, and a smoothing capacitor 78cm. The DC power supply circuit 75M converts the AC voltage input from the AC power supply 99 into a DC voltage and outputs it to the inverter circuit 81M.

The inverter circuit 81M is a so-called half-bridge type inverter in which the IGBTs 79am and 79bm as the switching elements 83 are connected in series to the output of the DC power supply circuit 75M.

In the inverter circuit 81M, diodes 79cm and 79dm as flywheel diodes are connected in parallel with IGBTs 79am and 79bm, respectively.
The inverter 81M converts the DC power output from the DC power supply circuit 75M into high-frequency AC power of about 20 kHz to 80 kHz, so-called high-frequency power, and supplies it to a resonant circuit consisting of an IH coil 17M and a resonant capacitor 76m.

The resonant circuit including the resonant capacitor 76m has a resonant frequency depending on the inductance of the IH coil 17M and the capacitance of the resonant capacitor 76m.

With this configuration, a high-frequency current of approximately several tens of amperes flows through the IH coil 17M, and the high-frequency magnetic flux generated by the flowing high-frequency current causes the object to be heated N on the top plate 15 directly above the IH coil 17M (Fig. (not shown) is heated by induction.

The IGBTs 79am and 79bm are made of, for example, a silicon-based semiconductor, but may also be made of a wide bandgap semiconductor such as silicon carbide or gallium nitride-based material.

The power control switching elements 83 attached to each of the two heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2 in a form with good thermal conductivity are IGBTs 79am and 79bm shown in FIG. 55.
By using a wide bandgap semiconductor for this IGBT, it is possible to reduce the conduction loss as a switching element. Further, even if the switching frequency, that is, the driving frequency is set to a high frequency and the switching operation is performed at a high speed, heat dissipation becomes good. Therefore, the radiation fins of the heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2 to which the switching elements (IGBTs) 79am and 79bm are attached can be made smaller, and the drive unit can be made smaller and lower in cost.

In FIG. 57, the output current detection section 77bm is connected to a resonant circuit consisting of an IH coil 17M and a resonant capacitor 76m. The output current detection unit 77bm detects, for example, the current flowing through the IH coil 17M, that is, the current output from the drive circuit 74M, and outputs a voltage signal corresponding to the detected value to the second IH control unit 90M2.
Although this configuration has been described using a half-bridge type inverter, the circuit that drives the IH coil 17M may be a full-bridge type inverter. Further, although the circuit explained with reference to FIG. 55 is of a current resonance type, a voltage resonance type may be adopted.

As is clear from the above description, according to the second embodiment, since there are three induction heating sections, the number of objects to be heated N (not shown) that can be used simultaneously increases, and convenience is improved.
Furthermore, the second embodiment can also produce the effects described in the first embodiment.
Next, FIG. 58 will be explained. FIG. 58 shows a modification of the second embodiment, and is a plan view showing a state in which the top plate, IH coil, etc. are removed.
In this modification, the position of the cover 70 is moved to the right by a predetermined distance.
A large gap GP17 of about 30 mm is ensured between the left end surface of the cover 70 and the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 or the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61.

70H is a ventilation hole formed at the right end of the cover 70. Right above the ventilation hole 70H, the right IH coil 17R is arranged in close proximity.
According to this modification, the vent hole 70H has the effect of blowing a portion of the cooling air RF1, RF2 blown into the first air path F1 onto the bottom side of the right IH coil 17R. Therefore, several or more ventilation holes 70H are formed in accordance with the planar shape of the IH coil 17R.

Also in this modification of FIG. 58, when induction heating is started by the IH coil 17M of the central heating section 17HM, both the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 start operating at the same time. Furthermore, after the induction heating is completed, the operation is also stopped at the same time.

Furthermore, when induction heating is started in the left heating section 17HL and right heating section 17HR, both the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 start operating at the same time, similar to the induction heating by the IH coil 17M of the central heating section 17HM. be done. Furthermore, after the induction heating is completed, the operation is also stopped at the same time.

In this modification, a portion of the cooling air RF1, RF2 is blown out above the cover 70 from the gap GP17. Therefore, the left IH coil 17L, which is disposed directly above and close to the gap GP17, is cooled. Note that the cooling air after cooling the left IH coil 17L mainly reaches the left through hole 53L1, as shown in the cooling air RFB shown in FIG. 51, but a portion is also distributed to the right through hole 53R1. and flows.

Summary of Embodiment 2.
As is clear from the above description, in the second embodiment, a heating cooker to which the first invention is applied is disclosed in the following form. That is,
It has a flat main body 10 equipped with a top plate 15 on the top on which an object to be heated is placed,
Inside the main body 10, there are three IH coils 17L, 17M, and 17R that heat the object on the top plate 15, and two inverter circuit boards 80 and 80M arranged below these three coils. , a cover 70 that partitions a first air passage F1 below the IH coils 17L, 17R and above the inverter circuit board 80; a first cooling fan 60 that introduces outside air for cooling from outside the main body 10; 2 cooling fans 61;
An inverter circuit board 80M for the IH coil 17M is arranged behind the inverter circuit board 80,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have rotary blades that rotate around a vertical axis, and are arranged on the same horizontal plane (first plane SP1) as the inverter circuit board 80. Facing the entrance of 1 Wind Route F1,
The first air passage F1 is formed horizontally long inside the main body, and another circuit board (power supply circuit board 55) to be cooled is arranged on the exit side of the first air passage F1. He disclosed a heating cooker.

For this configuration, the thin and horizontally long main body 10 is used to connect the first air passage F1 formed above the inverter circuit board 80 from its right or left end (as shown in the first embodiment). The cooling air RF1 and RF2 are forced to pass toward the opposite side, so that the upper part of the inverter circuit board 80 can be cooled.

In the second embodiment, a heating cooker to which the second invention is applied is disclosed in the following form. That is,
A horizontally long and flat upper case 16 is provided with a top plate 15 on which an object to be heated is placed,
Inside the upper case 16, there are three IH coils 17L, 17M, and 17R that can respectively heat objects to be heated at three locations on the top plate, and high-frequency power is applied to each of these three coils 17L, 17M, and 17R. Three inverter circuits 81L, 81M, 81R to be supplied, a (first) inverter circuit board 80 on which two inverter circuits 81L, 81R among the three inverter circuits are mounted, and among the three inverter circuits, The (second) inverter circuit board 80M on which the remaining one inverter circuit 81M is mounted is installed between the two IH coils 17L, 17R and the (first) inverter circuit board 80, and the A cover 70 that partitions a first air passage F1 therebetween, and two cooling fans (a first cooling fan 60 and a second cooling fan 61) that introduce outside air for cooling from the outside of the case 16,
The (first) inverter circuit board 80 has a horizontally long rectangular planar shape,
The two cooling fans are a first cooling fan 60 having rotary blades 60F for centrifugal air blowing, and a second cooling fan 61 having rotary blades 61F for centrifugal air blowing,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are installed near the left or right wall surface of the upper case 16, and the rotor blades 60F, The rotation of 61F introduces outside air for cooling,
The first air passage F1 into which the first cooling air RF1 from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling air RF2 from the second cooling fan 61 are combined and introduced is ) Extending in a straight line in the left and right direction above the inverter circuit board 80,
The first cooling air RF1 and the second cooling air RF2 that have passed through the first air path F1 cool the IH coils 17L, 17M, and 17R, and then are discharged to the exhaust air formed at the rear of the upper case 16. It was configured to be emitted to the outside from windows 53A and 53B.

For this configuration, the thin and horizontally long main body 10 is used to connect the first air passage F1 formed above the inverter circuit board 80 from its right or left end (as shown in the first embodiment). The cooling air RF1 and RF2 are forced to pass toward the opposite side, so that the upper part of the inverter circuit board 80 can be cooled.

Moreover, since the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are installed near the left or right wall surface of the upper case 16, the (first) Both the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70 can be installed, and the cooling air RF1 and RF2 can be supplied in a straight line from the entrance to the exit of the first air path F1.
Therefore, the (first) inverter circuit board 80 can be effectively cooled.
Furthermore, since the installation height of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the main body 10 can be suppressed, it is possible to realize the cooking device 1 having a thin main body 10.

In the second embodiment, a heating cooker to which the third invention is applied is disclosed in the following form. That is,
A horizontally long and flat upper case 16 is provided with a top plate 15 on which an object to be heated is placed,
Inside the upper case 16, there are three IH coils 17L, 17R, and 17M that can respectively heat objects at three locations on the top plate 15, and three inverters that supply high-frequency power to each of these coils. A first inverter circuit board 80 on which circuits 81L, 81M, 81R, two inverter circuits 81L, 81R among the three inverter circuits are mounted, and the remaining one inverter circuit 81M among the three inverter circuits. is installed between the IH coils 17L, 17R, 17M and the first inverter circuit board 80, and a first cooling air path F1 is defined between them. and two cooling fans 60 and 61 that introduce outside air for cooling from the outside of the case 16,
The first inverter circuit board 80 has a horizontally long rectangular planar shape,
The two cooling fans 60, 61 are a first cooling fan 60 having rotary blades for centrifugal air blowing, and a second cooling fan 61 having rotary blades for centrifugal air blowing,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are installed near the left or right wall surface of the upper case 16, and the rotation of the rotor blades is transmitted through a ventilation hole 64 formed at the bottom of the upper case 16. This introduces cooling air, respectively.
The first air path F1, into which the first cooling air RF1 from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling air RF2 from the second cooling fan 61 are combined and introduced, is connected to the first inverter. Above the circuit board 80, it extends in a straight line in the left and right direction,
The first cooling air RF1 and the second cooling air RF2 that have passed through the first air path F1 cool the IH coils 17L, 17R, and 17M, and then are discharged to the exhaust air formed at the rear of the upper case 16. Emitted to the outside from windows 53A and 53B,
The second inverter circuit board 80M is a heating cooker configured to be cooled by cooling air RFB different from the first cooling air RF1 blown out from the first cooling fan 60.

Therefore, in the first air path F1 where the first cooling air RF1 from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling air RF2 from the second cooling fan 61 are combined and introduced, 1 inverter circuit board 80 is effectively cooled.

Furthermore, the second inverter circuit board 80M can also be cooled at the same time by the cooling air RFB different from the first cooling air RF1 blown out from the first cooling fan 60.
In addition, this second embodiment discloses a fourth invention and a fifth invention, but regarding the same configuration as the first embodiment, various effects explained in the first embodiment and equivalent effects can be obtained. Obtainable.

In addition to the above, the second embodiment discloses the following characteristic features.
Characteristic configuration 1:
a first inverter circuit 81L having a first switching element;
a second inverter circuit 81R having a second switching element;
a third inverter circuit 81M having a third switching element;
an inverter circuit board 80 on which the first inverter circuit and the second inverter circuit are mounted;
an inverter circuit board 80M on which the third inverter circuit 81M is mounted;
a first heat sink 82F to which the first switching element is attached;
a second heat sink 82B to which the second switching element is attached;
third heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2 to which the third switching element is attached;
Two (first and second) cooling fans 60 and 61 that supply cooling air to the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B,
The first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are arranged on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 with their respective radiation fins 82FN facing each other with a gap GP2 in between,
A cover 70 is provided to cover the upper part of the inverter circuit board 80 and define a tunnel-shaped first air passage F1,
The two cooling fans 60 and 61 each have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around a vertical axis, and fan cases 60C and 61C surrounding the rotary blades,
The air outlets 60A and 61A formed on the peripheral surfaces of the fan cases 60C and 61C are separated from the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B, and are connected to a straight line (reference line) passing through the center of the gap GP2. ) facing the gap GP2 from both sides of BL,
Of the two cooling fans 60 and 61, the cooling fan 60 disposed at the rear is configured to supply cooling air to the third heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2 (directly without going through the first air path). there were.

Due to this configuration, the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are intensively cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 pushed into the first air path F1.

Furthermore, since the two cooling fans 60 and 61 have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around vertical axes, it is possible to increase the height of the installation space for the two cooling fans 60 and 61. do not have. Therefore, a great effect can be expected in that the entire upper unit 100 can be made thinner.

Furthermore, the cover 70 covering just above the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B allows the tunnel-shaped first air path F1 that surrounds the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B to be easily formed. The structure can be easily formed without complicating the structure.

Furthermore, if the two cooling fans 60, 61 have the same dimensions and the same rating specifications, the procurement cost of the cooling fans 60, 61 can be reduced, or quality control can be facilitated. Furthermore, in this second embodiment, since the rotation directions of the rotary blades 60F and 61F are aligned in the same manner, effects such as ease of production and quality control can be expected.

Furthermore, since the rear first cooling fan 60 of the two cooling fans 60, 61 is also used to cool the third heat sinks 82M1, 82M2, three cooling fans can be used without increasing the number of cooling fans. Each heat sink corresponding to the inverter circuits 81L, 81R, and 81M can be cooled, and manufacturing can be advantageous in terms of cost.

Characteristic configuration 2:
a first inverter circuit 81L having a first switching element;
a second inverter circuit 81R having a second switching element;
a third inverter circuit 81M having a third switching element;
an inverter circuit board 80 on which the first inverter circuit and the second inverter circuit are mounted;
an inverter circuit board 80M on which the third inverter circuit 81M is mounted;
a first heat sink 82F to which the first switching element is attached;
a second heat sink 82B to which the second switching element is attached;
third heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2 to which the third switching element is attached;
(two) cooling fans 60 and 61 that supply cooling air to the first heat sink and the second heat sink,
The first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are arranged on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 with their respective radiation fins 82F facing each other with a gap GP2 in between,
A cover 70 is provided to cover the upper part of the inverter circuit board 80 and define a tunnel-shaped first air passage F1,
The (two) cooling fans 60, 61 have rotary blades 60F, 61F that rotate around vertical axes, and fan cases 60C, 61C surrounding the rotary blades 60F, 61F, respectively.
The air outlets 60A and 61A formed on the circumferential surfaces of the fan cases 60C and 61C are connected to the first heat sink 82F (at different angles) in the gap GP2 with a straight line BL extending in the longitudinal direction of the gap GP2 in between. is oriented obliquely with respect to the second heat sink 82B,
Of the two cooling fans 60 and 61, the cooling fan 60 disposed at the rear is configured to supply cooling air to the third heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2 (directly without passing through the first air path F1). Met.

Due to this configuration, the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are intensively cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 pushed into the first air path F1.

Furthermore, since the two cooling fans 60 and 61 have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around vertical axes, it is possible to increase the height of the installation space for the two cooling fans 60 and 61. do not have. Therefore, the entire upper unit 100 can be made thinner.

Furthermore, the cover 70 covering just above the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B allows the tunnel-shaped first air path F1 that surrounds the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B to be easily formed. The structure can be easily formed without complicating the structure.

Furthermore, since the rear cooling fan 60 of the two cooling fans 60 and 61 is also used to cool the third heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2, three inverter circuits can be used without increasing the number of cooling fans. Each corresponding heat sink can be cooled, and manufacturing can be advantageous in terms of cost.

Furthermore, if the two cooling fans 60, 61 have the same dimensions and the same rating specifications, the procurement cost of the cooling fans 60, 61 can be reduced, or quality control can be facilitated. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, since the rotation directions of the rotary blades 60F and 61F are aligned in the same manner, effects such as ease of production and quality control can be expected.

Characteristic configuration 3:
Inside the flat upper case 16 with a horizontally long rectangular planar shape,
A first inverter circuit 81L having a first switching element, a second inverter circuit 81R having a second switching element, a third inverter circuit 81M having a third switching element, and the first inverter circuit 81L having a first switching element; a first heat sink 82B to which the first switching element is attached, a second heat sink 82F to which the second switching element is attached, and third heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2 to which the third switching element is attached. , comprising an inverter circuit board 80 on which the first inverter circuit 81L and the second inverter circuit 81R are mounted, and an inverter circuit board 80M on which the third inverter circuit 81M is mounted,
The first heat sink 82B and the second heat sink 82F are installed such that their respective radiation fins 82FN portions face each other with a gap GP2 therebetween,
A partition wall 11 is installed in the gap GP2 to partition the respective radiation fins 82FN portions of the first heat sink 82B and the second heat sink 82F,
A first cooling fan 60 and a second cooling fan 61 are provided,
The two cooling fans 60 and 61 supply cooling air RF1 and RF2 toward one end surface of the first heat sink 82B and the second heat sink 82FN, respectively,
The cooling air RF1 from the first cooling fan 60 is directed toward one surface of the partition wall 11,
The cooling air RF2 from the second cooling fan 61 is directed toward the other surface of the partition wall 11,
Further, among the cooling air blown out from the first cooling fan 60, cooling air RFB different from the cooling air RF1 is directed toward the third heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2,
These are the configurations provided respectively.

Due to this configuration, the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are intensively cooled by cooling air RF1 and RF2 from the radiation fins 82FN on the upstream side of the first air path F1.

Further, the cooling air RF1 and RF2 from the two cooling fans 60 and 61 are separated from each other by the partition wall 11 that vertically partitions the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B. Since it travels linearly through F1 and is emitted from the downstream exit, the heat exchange efficiency at the radiation fin 82FN portion is high, and even if the heat sinks 82B and 82F are small, a sufficient cooling effect can be expected. Therefore, it can be expected that the heat sinks 82B and 82F can be made smaller, thereby reducing costs and installation space. As a result, the upper unit 100 can be expected to be made smaller and thinner.

Furthermore, since the rear cooling fan 60 of the two cooling fans 60 and 61 is also used to cool the third heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2, three inverter circuits 81L can be used without increasing the number of cooling fans. , 81R, and 81M, and can be manufactured cost-effectively.

Characteristic configuration 4:
a first inverter circuit 81L having a first switching element;
a second inverter circuit 81R having a second switching element;
a third inverter circuit 81M having a third switching element;
an inverter circuit board 80 on which the first inverter circuit and the second inverter circuit are mounted;
an inverter circuit board 80M on which the third inverter circuit 81M is mounted;
a first heat sink 82F to which the first switching element is attached;
a second heat sink 82B to which the second switching element is attached;
third heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2 to which the third switching element is attached;
two cooling fans 60 and 61 that supply cooling air to the first heat sink and the second heat sink;
A control device (integrated control device MC, IH control section 90M1, IH control unit 90M2) and provision,
The first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are arranged on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 with their respective radiation fins 82FN facing each other with a gap GP2 in between,
A cover 70 is provided to cover the upper part of the inverter circuit board 80 and define a tunnel-shaped first air passage F1,
The cooling fans 60 and 61 are separated from the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B, and are connected to the air gap from both sides with a straight line (reference line) BL passing through the center of the air gap GP2 in between. Blows out cooling air in each of the two GP directions,
The control device is configured to operate the cooling fans 60 and 61 during a period of driving any one or more of the first inverter circuit 81L, the second inverter circuit 81R, and the third inverter circuit 81M. It is.

Due to this configuration, the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are intensively cooled by cooling air RF1 and RF2 from the radiation fins 82FN on the upstream side of the first air path F1.

In addition, the two cooling fans 60 and 61 continue to operate during the period when either or both of the first inverter circuit 81L and the second inverter circuit 81R are driven, so that the two cooling fans 60 and 61 perform induction heating operation. Regardless of changes in the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, cooling air is always supplied to the heat sinks 82B and 82F to perform the cooling operation. Therefore, operation can be continued while avoiding abnormal temperature rise.

Furthermore, since the rear cooling fan 60 of the two cooling fans 60 and 61 is also used to cool the third heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2, three inverter circuits 81L can be used without increasing the number of cooling fans. , 81R, and 81M, and can be manufactured cost-effectively.

Characteristic configuration 5:
Embodiment 2 discloses the following cooling structure for an inverter circuit board. That is,
two inverter circuits 81L and 81R that supply high frequency power to each of the two IH coils 17L and 17R;
One inverter circuit 81M that supplies high frequency power to one IH coil 17M,
(one) inverter circuit board 80 on which the two inverter circuits 81L and 81R are mounted;
(one) inverter circuit board 80M on which the inverter circuit 81M is mounted;
a cover 70 that is located between the IH coils 17L, 17R and the inverter circuit board 80 and defines a first air passage F1 extending in the left-right direction;
A first cooling fan 60 and a second cooling fan 61 that introduce outside air for cooling and supply cooling air RF1 and RF2,
The first air passage F1 has an inlet FI on one left and right side, and an outlet FO on the other side,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 each have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around a vertical axis,
The air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 face the inlet FI in different directions,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 supply the cooling air RF1 and RF2 from different directions toward the inlet FI, and connect the plurality of switching elements 83 constituting the inverter circuits 81L and 81R. This is a configuration in which cooling is performed by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 flowing inside the first air path F1.

Due to this configuration, the switching elements 83 installed in the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are efficiently and intensively operated by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 from the upstream side of the first air path F1. is cooled to
In other words, the overall structure of the inverter circuit board 80 can be made smaller.

Further, the cooling air RFB (see FIG. 53) blown out from the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 cools the inverter circuit board 80M located behind the cover 70. Therefore, the two IGBTs (79am, 79bm), which are the switching elements 83 of the inverter circuit board 80M, are also effectively cooled.

Note that in this second embodiment as well, similarly to the first embodiment, the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B have their radiation fins 82FN and 82FN portions connected to the air from the upstream side of the first air path F1. It is intensively cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

In this second embodiment, three IH coils 17L, 17M, and 17R are provided, but the sizes of the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B themselves are made smaller than before, and the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may be able to be changed to be smaller than conventional ones. Therefore, although the three inverter circuits 81L, 81M, and 81R are provided, the installation space can be minimized and costs can be reduced. Therefore, if applied to the induction heating cooker 1, a thinner heating cooker can be realized.

Characteristic configuration 6:
a horizontally long and flat upper case 16 having a top plate 15 on the top on which an object to be heated is placed;
a horizontally long rectangular top plate 15 that covers the upper surface of the upper case 16;
Inside the upper case 16, there are three IH coils 17L, 17M, and 17R that can respectively heat objects at three locations on the top plate 15, and three IH coils that supply high-frequency power to each of these coils. Inverter circuits 81L, 81M, 81R, a first inverter circuit board 80 on which two inverter circuits 81L, 81R among the three inverter circuits are mounted, and the remaining one inverter circuit among the three inverter circuits. A cover 70 installed between the IH coils 17L, 17M, 17R and the first inverter circuit board 80, and a cover 70 installed between the IH coils 17L, 17M, 17R and the first inverter circuit board 80; two cooling fans 60 and 61 that introduce outside air,
The cover 70 forms a tunnel-shaped first air path F1 above the first inverter circuit board 80,
The first inverter circuit board 80 has a horizontally long rectangular planar shape,
The two cooling fans 60, 61 are a first cooling fan 60 having rotary blades 60F for centrifugal air blowing, and a second cooling fan 61 having rotary blades 61F for centrifugal air blowing,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are installed near the left or right wall surface of the upper case 16, and the rotor blades 60F, The rotation of 61F introduces outside air for cooling,
The first air path F1, into which the first cooling air RF1 from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling air RF2 from the second cooling fan 61 are combined and introduced, is connected to the first inverter. Above the circuit board 80, it extends in a straight line in the left and right direction,
After cooling the IH coils 17L, 17M, and 17R, the first cooling air RF1 and the second cooling air RF2 that have passed through the first air path F1 cool the IH coils 17L, 17M, and 17R. Disclosed is a heating cooker characterized in that air is discharged to the outside of the upper case 16 from exhaust windows 53A and 53B.

Due to this configuration, the two inverter circuit boards 80 and 80M placed inside the flat upper case 16 are effectively cooled by the two cooling fans 60 and 61.

Furthermore, the rotary blade 60F of the first cooling fan 60 rotates around a vertical axis,
The rotor blades 61F of the second cooling fan 61 rotate around a vertical axis,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are installed at intervals in the front-rear direction.

Because of this configuration, even if the two cooling fans 60 and 61 are placed inside the horizontally long upper case 16, the thickness of the upper case 16 in the vertical direction is not increased, and the overall thickness can be reduced. can.

Further, the inverter circuit board 80 includes first heat sinks 82B1 and 82B2 equipped with switching elements for the first inverter circuit 81R, and a second heat sink 82F1 equipped with switching elements for the second inverter circuit 81L. , 82F2, and third heat sinks 82M1 and 82M2 equipped with switching elements for the third inverter circuit 81M,
The first heat sinks 82B1, 82B2 and the second heat sinks 82F1, 82F2 had a configuration in which the respective radiation fins 82FN portions were arranged to face each other with a gap GP2 in between.

Because of this configuration, even if the two cooling fans 60 and 61 are arranged inside the horizontally long upper case 16, the thickness of the upper case 16 in the vertical direction is not increased, and the two inverter circuit boards 80 , 80M and the three heat sinks 82B, 82F, 82M (82M1, 82M2) can be effectively cooled.

In the second embodiment, a microcomputer of an IH control unit 90M1 that drives the first inverter circuit 81 and the second inverter circuit, respectively, is mounted on the first inverter circuit board 80,
The microcomputer was placed in the first inverter circuit board 80 at a position upstream of the first cooling air or the second cooling air.

Due to this configuration, the microcomputer of the IH control unit 90M1, which is an important core control means, can be effectively cooled by the two cooling fans 60 and 61, and breakdowns and malfunctions due to overheating can be prevented.

Further, inside the upper case 16, a power supply circuit board 55 is provided which receives power from a commercial power source and generates the power necessary for the inverter circuit boards 80 and 80M.
The power supply circuit board 55 is disposed on the opposite side of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 with the cover 70 interposed therebetween.

Due to this configuration, the power supply circuit board 55, which is an important power supply means, can be effectively cooled by the two cooling fans 60 and 61, and breakdowns and malfunctions due to overheating can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, a filter circuit board 54 that receives power from a commercial power supply is provided inside the upper case 16, and a filter circuit board 54 that receives power from the filter circuit board 54 is connected to the first inverter circuit board 80 and the first inverter circuit board 80. It includes a power supply circuit board 55 that generates the power necessary for the second inverter board 80M,
The power supply circuit board 55 is disposed on the opposite side of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 with the cover 70 in between,
The filter circuit board 54 is arranged adjacent to the power supply circuit board 55,
The electrical components mounted on the power supply circuit board 55 and the electrical components mounted on the filter circuit board 54 were each located on the first horizontal plane HP1.

Due to this configuration, the filter circuit board 54 and the power supply circuit board 55, which are important power supply means, can be effectively cooled by the cooling air sent out horizontally from the two cooling fans 60 and 61. Failures and malfunctions due to overheating can be prevented.

As disclosed in the second embodiment, particularly in FIG. 52, the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 has an insertion hole 89 for introducing the power cord 106 into the upper unit 100.
Then, it is guided into the upper case 16 through the insertion hole 89 and connected to a connection port (connection terminal) 108A formed at the left end of the filter circuit board 54.

Power is then distributed from the filter circuit board 54 to the inverter circuit boards 80 and 80M via electric wires 119A and 119B, respectively.
Since these electric wires 119A and 119B are also arranged in the flow paths of the cooling air RF4 and RFB, the temperature rise of the electric wires 119A and 119B themselves is also suppressed.

Furthermore, since the connection ports (connection terminals) 109A and 109B are arranged at the right end of the inverter circuit board 80M, the areas around these connection ports are also cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2. These suppress the temperature rise of the inverter circuit boards 80, 80M disposed inside the upper case 16, and prevent failures, deformations, etc. due to the influence of heat.

Embodiment 3.
59 to 68 show a built-in complex heating cooker according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention. FIG. 59 is a simplified perspective view of the cooking device. FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 58 with the door open. FIG. 61 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the cooking device of FIG. 58 with the top plate removed. FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 58 with the top plate and IH coil removed. FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the upper unit with the cover removed from the state shown in FIG. 62. FIG. 64 is a reference perspective view showing the flow of cooling air in the state of FIG. 63. FIG. 65 is a bottom (bottom) view of the upper unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 59. FIG. 66 is a longitudinal sectional view of the main part taken along line XX in FIG. 52. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged partial cross-section of the first cooling fan or the second cooling fan in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 59. FIG. 68 is a block diagram illustrating the overall control function of the cooking device shown in FIG. 59. Note that the same or corresponding parts as the configurations of Embodiment 1 and Embodiment 2 are given the same reference numerals.

Embodiment 3 differs greatly from Embodiment 1 in that the outside air intake port of cooking device 1 is added (changed) and the control-related configuration is also changed.

Mainly different points from Embodiment 1 will be explained with reference to each drawing. First, FIG. 59 will be explained.
Reference numeral 118 is a connecting member for integrating the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200, and since it also has the purpose of reinforcement, it may also be called a "reinforcing member."

The connecting member 118 has a shape that continuously covers the right side surface, the lower surface, and the left side surface of the lower unit 200. That is, 118R is a right vertical portion that closely overlaps the right side surface of the front portion of the lower unit 200 and is fixed to the right side surface.

Although not shown, the connecting member 118 includes a left vertical portion 118L that tightly overlaps and is fixed to the left side surface of the front portion of the lower unit 200, and a left vertical portion 118L formed in series with the right vertical portion 118R and the left vertical portion 118L. It further has a central flat portion 118M.

The central flat portion 118M is fixed to the lower surface of the bottom plate 101U at the front portion of the lower case 101 so as to overlap in close contact with the lower surface. Therefore, the mounting portion of the hinge portion 176 has a robust structure that does not undergo deformation such as curvature even when subjected to loads when the door 114 is opened and closed. As a result, support during opening and closing of the door 114 can be ensured. Therefore, even when used for a long period of time, the door 114 is in close contact with the front surrounding area of the opening 114A of the heating chamber 114, and the opening 114A can be reliably closed, providing a highly safe heating cooker with no leakage of radio waves. It has been realized.

The connecting member 118 is formed by pressing a single metal thin plate (for example, 1 mm thick) to integrally form the right vertical portion 118R, the central flat portion 118M (not shown), and the right vertical portion 118L. ing.

59 and 60, 101RP is a convex portion integrally formed on the side vertical wall 101R of the lower case 101. In FIG. This convex portion is formed by pressing the side vertical wall 101R from the inside to the outside of the lower case 101, and is intended to increase the mechanical strength of the side vertical wall 101R. Similarly, the side vertical wall 101L on the left side of the lower case 101 also has a certain area projected outward to form a convex portion 101LP (not shown).

116 is a metal arm that supports the door 114 in a horizontal state and pulls it in the door closing direction when the door 114 is closed. This arm 116 is guided by a through hole (guide hole) 117 formed in the front plate 101F of the lower case 101, and moves through the through hole 117 in the front-back direction. Note that the door structure of the high-frequency heating device using the arm 116 is introduced in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2002-39541, 2010-181106, and 2007-218544, so a detailed explanation will be provided. is omitted.

In FIG. 60, reference numeral 176 indicates a pair of hinges provided on the left and right sides, which are fixed to both the door 114 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. Thereby, the door 114 is rotatably supported by the lower case 101. Note that the hinge 176 is sandwiched between the connecting member (reinforcing member) 118 and the bottom plate 101U, and is fixed to the lower case 101 at multiple locations with fixing devices (a combination of bolts and nuts, screws, etc.). has been done.

With the above structure, the door 114 opens and closes using the hinge 176 as a fulcrum. The pair of left and right arms 116 described above are supported from below by a roller (not shown) or a sliding member (not shown) rotatably provided below the back side of the through hole 117, and are used to open and close the door 114. At times, the arm 116 moves back and forth against the top surface of the roller or sliding member.

112 is a front cover provided on both left and right sides of the front surface of the lower unit 200, and is made of plastic or metal.
The front cover 112 has a left-right symmetrical shape, and is fixed to the lower case 101 so as to protrude laterally to a greater extent than the width of the lower case 101. When the cooking device 1 is installed on the kitchen furniture 2, the front cover 112 can cover the entire front of the gap between the cooking device 1 and the kitchen furniture 2 (the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L as shown in FIG. 10). By covering as much as possible, these gaps 301R and 301L serve to make them less noticeable when viewed from the front.

198 is a metal support fitting, and has a length that spans the entire width of the lower case 101. This support fitting 198 is fixed to the front horizontal wall 101T of the lower case 101 with screws 186.

In FIG. 60, 145 is a special saucer used inside the heating chamber 113, and is made of highly heat-resistant plastic, porcelain, glass, or the like. This saucer 145 has external dimensions such that it can be taken in and out of the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

A tableware usually made of porcelain or a highly heat-resistant material is placed on the saucer 145, and the food placed in the tableware is heated and cooked using microwaves. However, if microwave heating is not used, the tableware may be made of metal. For example, a magnetic metal cooking utensil such as a frying pan (not shown) is placed on the top plate 15, food (for example, a hamburger steak) is heated by induction to a certain extent on the cooking utensil, and then the cooking utensil is heated. The food may be moved into the heating chamber 113 and further heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B to complete the cooking (this is a type of cooperative cooking).

In FIGS. 59 and 60, 152S1 and 152S2 are auxiliary intake ports composed of a large number of small holes, and are provided at the lower end of the side vertical wall 101R forming the right side of the lower case 101. .

The auxiliary intake port 152S1 is an auxiliary intake port for the intake port (second intake port) 152F for cooling the inverter circuit board 121 with outside air.
Similarly, the auxiliary intake port 152S2 is an auxiliary intake port of the intake port (second intake port) 152B for cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 with outside air. Note that the maximum diameter of these auxiliary intake ports 152S1 and 152S2 is approximately 3 mm, taking into consideration the microwave leakage prevention effect.

Although not shown, the suction port of the third cooling fan (cooling fan A) 128 for cooling the inverter circuit board 121 of the microwave heating source 189 with outside air is located near the auxiliary air intake port 152S1. Similarly, the suction port of a fourth cooling fan (cooling fan B) 129 for cooling the heat radiation section 122H of the magnetron 122 with outside air is also arranged near the auxiliary air intake port 152S2.

FIG. 61 shows a state in which the top plate 15 is removed. In FIG. 61, 30W is a display window, which is formed in the holder 50 at a position corresponding to the integrated display section 30.

31LW and 31RW are display windows, respectively. The display windows are formed in the holder 50 at positions corresponding to the left display section 31L and the right display section 31R, respectively.

56 is a choke coil, which is one of the important electrical components in the filter circuit board 54. 17C is a coil base (coil support frame) on which two IH coils 17L and 17R are placed.

The left IH coil 17L has a maximum external dimension (diameter) of 236 mm. This makes it possible to handle objects to be heated such as large pots and frying pans. Note that the IH coil 17R on the right side is the same as in the first embodiment and has a diameter of 168 mm.

The coil base 17C is integrally formed of a highly heat-resistant plastic material. Further, the coil base 17C has a circular shape as a whole in accordance with the shape of the IH coils 17L and 17R, but includes a plurality of arms 17CH extending radially from the center. In this third embodiment, there are eight arms 17CH. A gap serving as a large ventilation space is formed between each arm 17CH.

17F is a ferrite plate installed between two adjacent arms 17CH. In the left IH coil 17L, TS3 is a contact temperature sensor such as a thermistor.
The temperature sensor TS3 is installed at the center of the IH coil 17L. The other two temperature sensors TS5 are installed at positions outside the IH coil 17L, a little apart from the center thereof.

TS5 is a non-contact temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor. In the right IH coil 17R, TS4 is a contact temperature sensor such as a thermistor. The temperature sensor TS4 is installed at the center of the IH coil 17R. The other two temperature sensors TS6 are installed at positions slightly away from the center of the IH coil 17R and outside of it.

TS6 is a non-contact temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor. Measurement data from each of these temperature sensors TS3 to TS6 is input to a temperature detection circuit (temperature detection processing section) 93.

In FIG. 61, 66 is a magnetic shielding ring made of metal such as aluminum, and is fixed to the coil base (coil support frame) 17C so as to surround the coil base (coil support frame) 17C.
41R is a right touch key board corresponding to the operation board 41 of the first embodiment. 41L is a left touch key board that also corresponds to the operation board 41. These two touch key boards 41L and 41R are also supported on the upper surface of the holder 50.

In FIG. 61, 53 is a hollow case-shaped exhaust port plate with an open bottom surface, and is directly fixed to the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. This exhaust port plate 53 has a large number of through holes 53A formed in a horizontal straight line.

Since the through holes 53A are formed not only on the front side of the exhaust port plate 53 but also on the back side, the cooling air flows rearward to pass through the exhaust port plate 53.

In FIG. 62, 57 is a transformer, which is one of the important electrical components in the power supply circuit board 55. In FIG. 62, the left end portion (two places on the front and back) of the cover 70 is cut out within a width dimension W11. A temperature sensor TS5 supported by the coil base 17C on the IH coil 17L side is arranged in this notched portion. The temperature sensor TS5 uses an infrared sensor, and structures such as an infrared sensor holder have a constant height in the vertical direction. Therefore, in order to prevent the temperature sensor TS5 and the cover 70 from interfering with each other, a notch is provided.

Next, FIG. 63 will be explained. 58 is a capacitor, which is one of the important electrical components in the inverter circuit board 80.
As is clear from FIG. 63, there are two aluminum heat sinks 82 (two rows) on the left and right, and two on the front and back, so there are four in total. The four heat sinks 82 are installed so that two each at the front and rear are close to each other and face each other. 59 is a diode bridge circuit (diode module) attached to one heat sink 82. In the diode bridge circuit (diode module) 59, the heat generated during operation is radiated by the heat sink 82, so that the diode bridge circuit (diode module) 59 does not become overheated. Note that this diode bridge circuit 59 corresponds to the diode bridge 78a shown in FIG. 28 of the first embodiment.

Next, FIG. 65 will be explained.
FIG. 65 is a bottom (bottom) view of the upper unit 100 having a rectangular planar shape. D5 is the maximum width dimension of the upper unit 100 in the front-rear direction, and is 432 mm. W4 is the maximum width dimension of the upper unit 100 in the left-right direction, and is 544 mm.
64 is a circular ventilation hole. These ventilation holes are formed directly below circular suction ports 60H, 61H (see FIG. 67) formed on the lower surfaces of the fan cases 60F, 61F of the first cooling fan 60 and second cooling fan 61.

Next, FIG. 67 will be explained. This FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of the first cooling fan 60 or the second cooling fan 61 in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 59 in an enlarged manner and partly in cross section. Only a portion of the fan case 60F (61F) and a portion around the ventilation hole 64 in the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 are shown in a longitudinal cross-sectional view. Other main parts of the first cooling fan 60 or the second cooling fan 61 are outlined by broken lines.

As is clear from FIG. 67, the fan case 60C of the first cooling fan 60 is installed in direct contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. In addition, in FIG. 67, it is described as if a slight gap is maintained.

The circular ventilation hole 64 formed in the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 has an inclined surface 64C whose opening edge gradually narrows in the direction in which the outside air flows. That is, in FIG. 67, when the outside air flows as indicated by the thick arrow, the outside air is smoothly guided to the suction port 60H of the first cooling fan 60. The diameter of the suction port 60H is slightly smaller (about 2 to 3 mm in diameter) than the minimum diameter of the ventilation hole 64.

Next, FIG. 66 will be explained.
FIG. 66 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the main part of the upper unit 100, which has a rectangular planar shape.
In FIG. 66, the coil base 17C described in Embodiments 1 and 2 is not illustrated. A flat ferrite plate 17F is actually arranged so as to cross below the coil wire 17CL of the left IH coil 17L (see FIG. 61). One ferrite plate 17F is installed between each of the plurality of arms 17CH extending radially from the center of the coil base (coil support frame) 17C.

The ferrite plate 17F is made of a ferromagnetic material that is non-conductive and has high magnetic permeability. By focusing and deflecting the high-frequency magnetic flux generated from the IH coil 17L by the ferrite plate 17F and directing it toward the object to be heated above, the heating efficiency is improved and the temperature of the object to be heated (metal cooking container, etc.) is equalized. be able to. Further, by providing the ferrite plate 17F below the IH coil 17L, it is possible to suppress magnetic flux leakage downward from the IH coil 17L.

As shown in FIG. 66, the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the heat sink 82 are separated by a distance LD1.

As shown in FIG. 67, the entire bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 is flat, and the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have circular suction ports 60H and 61H on the lower surface, respectively. and is fixed directly onto the bottom wall surface 16S in close contact with the bottom wall surface 16S.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are arranged at the same height on the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16.
Since the bottom wall surface 16S is entirely a horizontal surface, this horizontal surface is referred to as a "reference bottom surface" HB.

Note that when the second inverter board 80M is provided as described in the second embodiment, the second inverter board 80M and the first inverter circuit board 80 are connected to the " It is best to install them at the same height upwards using the reference bottom surface HB as a reference.

Reference numeral 71 denotes a support plate interposed between the first inverter circuit board 80 and the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. This support plate 71 is sized to cover the entire bottom surface of the first inverter circuit board 80.

The support plate 71 is made of a plastic material with high electrical insulation properties, but the support plate 71 may also be made of metal (for example, an aluminum plate).
Furthermore, when it is made of metal, it can be expected to have a magnetic shielding effect against leakage magnetic flux radiated from the left IH coil 17L installed above. In other words, the effect of shielding or attenuating unnecessary noise directed toward the inverter circuit board 80 from below the first inverter circuit board 80 can be expected. In addition, if a magnetic shielding effect is expected, this support plate 71 may be sized to cover the entire bottom surface of the first inverter circuit board 80, or may be large enough to cover important electronic components, such as the microcontroller of the first IH controller 90M1. It may be installed only in the area corresponding to the computer part.

As shown in FIG. 66, the upper surface of the first inverter circuit board 80 is located above the lower end surfaces of the air outlets 60A and 61A of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 by a step GD1. are doing. In other words, the lower end surfaces of the air outlets 60A and 61A are located below the first horizontal plane HP1 by the step GD1.

For a circuit board to which electronic components are soldered, such as the first inverter circuit board 80, lead terminals of the electronic components are inserted into small through holes called through holes, and the surface of the molten solder is applied to the circuit board. By passing through the circuit board, electronic components are soldered to the circuit board. This kind of soldering is called flow soldering.

By the way, after soldering is completed, the tips of the lead terminals inserted into the through holes may protrude a little toward the back side of the circuit board (opposite to the side on which the electronic components are installed). Since this protruding part is also surrounded by solder and solidified, there is a post-processing method that involves cutting the tip of the lead terminal to a minute length, but it is virtually difficult to reduce the protruding amount of the lead terminal to zero. be. That is, when installing this type of circuit board, an installation space that is thicker than the thickness of the board itself is required.

In this third embodiment, for this reason, a "gap" GP18 is provided between the inverter circuit board 80 and the support plate 70, including the lead terminal portion as described above, to provide a sufficient electrical insulation space. In order to maintain this, a gap of approximately several mm is maintained between the support plate 71 and the support plate 71.
Due to the circumstances described above, there is the step GD1 between the lower end surface of the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. Note that the support plate 70 may be in the form of a thin sheet made of flexible rubber or the like.

The support plate 71 may function as a magnetic shield plate made of a non-magnetic material such as aluminum. With this configuration, various electronic components on the inverter circuit board 80, such as the microcomputer forming the core of the IH control section 90, the input current detection section 77a, and the output current detector 77b, reach the IH control section 90. The support plate 71 can suppress the adverse effects of high frequency noise due to leakage magnetic flux from the IH coil 17L on the signal line 39B (not shown, see FIG. 24) and the like.

The cooling air RF1 and RF2 from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are continuously flowed above the first inverter circuit board 80 without being affected by the presence of the step GP18 as described above. , and is supplied centrally.

The vertical and horizontal dimensions (inside maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions) of the upper opening of the lower case 101 are determined by taking into consideration the maximum width dimension D5 in the front-rear direction and the maximum width dimension W4 in the horizontal direction of the upper case 16 described above. It is sized to fit.

With the above configuration, when induction cooking is performed in the upper unit 100, the cooling air RF1 blown out from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, as shown by the thick arrow in FIG. The inverter circuit board 80, input operation section 40, power supply circuit board 55, and filter circuit board 54 are cooled by RF2 and RF2A, respectively.

Next, FIG. 68 will be explained.
In FIG. 68, arrows indicated by broken lines indicate command signals for control.
In the cooking device 1 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, there are a total of six control devices mainly based on microcomputers. This point is largely different from the first and second embodiments.

Among the six control devices described above, the integrated control device MC is in charge of overall control of the cooking device 1. It is the IH control unit 90 that receives the command from the integrated control device MC and controls induction heating cooking.

Controller 105 controls both microwave heat source 189 and oven heat source 188. This control device 105 is a combination of the heating chamber control section 159 and the microwave heating control section 130 described in the first embodiment.

The above-described IH control unit 90 and control device 105 are sometimes called slave microcomputers because they perform prescribed control according to instructions to the integrated control device MC and send back processing results to the integrated control device MC. In this case, the integrated control device MC is called a master microcomputer.

The remaining three of the six control devices described above will be explained below.
First, in the input operation section 40, the right input control device 23 processes input from the right touch key group arranged on the right operation section 40R and display on the display section 31R. The right input control device 23 further processes inputs from the touch keys of the central operation section 40M and displays on the integrated display section 30.

The second is a left input control device 24 disposed on the left operation section 40L that processes input from the left touch key group and display on the display section 31L.
The third is the power switch control device 28.
The power switch control device 28 detects the operation of the operation button (operation section) 98 of the main power switch 97 arranged in the input operation section 40 and determines whether the power is turned on or off.

In FIG. 68, 106A is a plug connected to a commercial (AC) power source 99. Power at a voltage of 200V, 50Hz or 60Hz is conducted to filter circuit board 54 via power cord 106. Note that the filter circuit board 54 is built into the upper unit 100.

The filter circuit board 54 has a main relay 107 that turns on and off the main power of the cooking device 1, and a sub-relay (not shown). In FIG. 68, only the main relay is schematically shown.

The main relay 107 opens and closes in response to a predetermined relay control signal from the integrated control device MC that controls the entire cooking device 1 . Note that the sub-relays are opened and closed in response to relay control signals from the power switch control device 28, as will be described later. The power switch control device 28 has a function of detecting the operation of the operation button 98 of the main power switch 97 and determining whether the power is turned on or off. A main power switch 97 is configured by the main relay 107 and the sub-relays.

The integrated control device MC constantly acquires operation information from the IH control unit 90, the control device 105, the right input control device 23, the left input control device 24, and the power switch control device 28, and integrates and processes the information. determine and control.

The integrated control device MC controls the central operation section 40M, the display operation of the integrated display section 30, the speech synthesizer 95, and the wireless communication section 49. The integrated control device MC, the right input control device 23, and the power switch control device 28 are attached to a central operation board 32 that constitutes the input operation section 40.

The central operation board 32 is composed of a right operation board 32R and a left operation board 32L, and the right operation board 32R is equipped with an integrated control device MC, a right input control device 23, and a right display section 31R. The two operation boards 32L, 32L are made of a plastic material with high electrical insulation properties. The left input control device 24 and the left display section 31L are mounted on the left operation board 32L (see FIG. 68). Note that the right operation board 32R and the left operation board 32L are not shown in FIGS. 59 to 67 because they are attached to the lower surface of the holder 50.

Above the central operation board 32 and in front of the holder 50, touch key boards (operation boards) 41L and 41R on which various touch-type input keys are mounted are installed (see FIGS. 61 and 62).

55 is a power supply circuit board to which commercial power supply power is supplied from the filter circuit 54, and as shown in FIG. A power supply circuit B36 to which power is applied via the power supply circuit B36 is provided. These two power supply circuits A34 and B36 convert power at a voltage of 200V into low voltage direct current such as 24V, 18V, 6V, 5V, etc., for example. In other words, a plurality of DC power supplies with different voltages are generated.

The aforementioned 5V power is supplied as a power source to the integrated control device MC, the IH control section 90, the control device 105, the right input control device 23, the left input control device 24, and the power switch control device .
Further, the 6V power is used as a power source (including a backlight power source) for the integrated display section 30, the right display section 31R, and the left display section 31R.

The power circuit board 55 is installed in the upper unit 100, and as described above, the power generated by the power circuit A 34 and the power circuit B 36 is used as a power source for the control and display section in the upper unit 100. has been done.

80 is an inverter circuit board of the induction heating source 9 installed inside the upper unit 100.
This inverter circuit board 80 includes a right inverter circuit 81R that includes a DC power supply section 75R, and a left inverter circuit 81L that includes another DC power supply section 75L.

AC power with a voltage of 200V is applied from the filter circuit 54 to the inverter circuit board 80. Reference numeral 90 denotes an IH control section that controls overall induction heating, and is mainly composed of a microcomputer.

The IH control section 90 sends a drive signal to drive circuits 37L and 37R that drive IGBTs 79a and 79b in inverter circuits 81L and 81R. The two drive circuits 37L and 37R operate with 18V power supplied from the power supply circuit A34 and power supply circuit B36, and control the IGBTs 79a and 79. This controls the driving frequency of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

For example, the drive circuit A37R detects the conduction time of the power switching element 83 (semiconductor switching element) (IGBT79a, 79b), and switches the conduction time to lower the drive frequency of the inverter circuit 81R to reduce the thermal power. Or conversely, increase the drive frequency to increase the firepower. These driving frequency commands are issued from the IH control section 90.

77a is an input current detection section installed on the commercial power supply side of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, and 77b is an output current detection section that detects the power on the output side of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.
The detected values of the input current detector 77a and the output current detector 77b are input to the IH controller 90.

In the initial stage of induction heating cooking, the IH control unit 90 determines the material of the object to be heated.
For example, when the drive frequency is changed from one drive frequency to another, the change in the input current value can be observed to determine whether the material of the object to be heated, such as a pot, is magnetic metal, non-magnetic stainless steel, aluminum, etc. Then, the driving frequency of the switching elements (IGBT) 79a and 79b is automatically adjusted to an appropriate value. When the material of the object to be heated is determined to be non-magnetic stainless steel, it is driven at a higher driving frequency (for example, 31 kHz) than the driving frequency (for example, 23 kHz) when the material is determined to be iron.

TS5 and TS6 are non-contact temperature sensors installed in the gaps between the IH coils 17L and 17R, and TS3 and TS4 are contact temperature sensors installed in the centers of the IH coils 17L and 17R. Temperature detection data from each of these temperature sensors is input to the integrated control device MC.

TS8 and TS9 are contact temperature sensors installed on the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80. Temperature detection data from each of these temperature sensors is input to the integrated control device MC via the IH control section 90.

Although the first embodiment includes a temperature detection circuit 93, the third embodiment does not include such a temperature detection circuit 93 in the form of hardware. The software (temperature detection processing unit) in the integrated control device MC and the software (temperature detection processing unit) in the IH control unit 90 execute processes such as temperature detection, temperature comparison, and abnormality detection, respectively.

131 is a door opening/closing detection mechanism. The door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 includes one switch that opens and closes in response to the opening/closing operation of the door 114, and a monitor switch that detects whether the switch is opened and closed correctly. This point is the same as that described in the first embodiment.

120P is a power supply circuit section of the microwave heating device 120, which generates AC power serving as a low voltage (for example, 24V and 5V) power source from the commercial voltage (200V) power supplied from the filter circuit 54.

Power with a voltage of 5V is supplied as a power source for the control device 105, and power with a voltage of 24V is supplied to the drive circuits 177 of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129, respectively. Although not shown in FIG. 68, 200V power is supplied to the drive power source of the antenna drive motor 126.

The upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B that heat the heating chamber 113 are energized by the control device 105 opening and closing relays 178A and 178B. Note that the relays 178A and 178B may be semiconductor switching elements capable of finely controlling the energization rate, but in this third embodiment, only ON-OFF control is performed, so relays are used. There is. The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are operated by applying a voltage of 200V, which is the same as the commercial power supply.

132M is a door opening detection switch that constitutes a part of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131. This switch itself is installed inside the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131, but is drawn in a different position in FIG. 68 to show that the opening/closing signal is input to the control device 105.

160 is an infrared sensor that measures the temperature of food or the like in the heating chamber 113, and TS1 is a contact sensor that measures the temperature of the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating device 120. The temperature detection data of these sensors 160 and TS1 are all input to the control device 105.

121A is an inverter circuit that supplies high frequency power to the magnetron 122, and oscillation is controlled by a relay 182 inserted in the power supply circuit. The relay 182 is opened and closed by the control device 105.

60P and 61P are drive circuits that drive the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, respectively. The drive circuits 60P and 61P operate in response to instructions from the IH control section 90.

Although this FIG. 68 does not illustrate the temperature sensor that monitors the temperature of the integrated display section 30 and the input operation section 40, in reality, such a temperature sensor is installed, and it is constantly (at regular intervals) during cooking. b) The temperature measurement data is acquired by the integrated control device MC and monitored to prevent abnormal temperatures.

The heating cooker 1 of the third embodiment is configured as described above.
When starting cooking, first press and hold the operation key 98 of the input operation unit 40 for several seconds to turn on the main power switch 97. The power switch control device 28 detects this operation and turns on the filter circuit. Close the main relay 107 inside the board 54.

Therefore, commercial power is supplied from the filter circuit board 54 to the power supply circuit board 55. A power supply of a predetermined voltage is generated by the power supply circuit A 34 and the power supply circuit B 36 of the power supply circuit board 55, and is applied to the integrated control device MC.

When the integrated control device MC is started, it first performs an initial self-diagnosis before starting the heating operation to confirm that no abnormality has occurred. Additionally, the integrated display unit 30 is activated and initial information is displayed.

In this state, when the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 in order to use the microwave heating device 120, the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 transmits a signal indicating that the door 114 is open to the control device 105. Therefore, the control device 105 transmits a signal indicating that the door 114 is opened to the integrated control device MC. The integrated control device MC assumes that the user will perform microwave cooking, displays information necessary for starting microwave heating on the integrated display unit 30, and prompts for input to start heating.

When the user puts food or the like into the heating chamber 113 and closes the door 114, the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 again sends a detection signal indicating the closing of the door 114 to the integrated control device MC via the control device 105. . Therefore, when a command to start heating is issued from the input operation unit 40 in this state, the right input control device 23 detects the presence or absence of a touch input on the input key for microwave heating. Therefore, a signal indicating a heating start command is transmitted from the right input control device 23 to the integrated control device MC.

In the first embodiment, the control menu for cooking by combining microwave heating and oven heating using the heating chamber 113 was called "range grill cooking." Also in this third embodiment, in microwave grill cooking, there is a pattern in which microwave heating is performed first, the food is heated to a certain extent, and then heated by the upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B, and a pattern in which the food is heated in the reverse order. There are three types: , and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously.

Here, "a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously" refers to cases in which microwave heating and heater heating are started at the same time from the start of cooking, and cases in which cooking is performed using only either microwave heating or heater heating. There are two cases in which cooking is started and the other heating source is added midway through, cooking with two types of heating sources.

Generally, microwave heating is often performed by placing food in a heat-resistant plastic container or tableware, but if the upper heater 163A or lower heater 163B is then heated in this state, the above-mentioned There is a risk that containers etc. that have been exposed to heat may burn out due to the high heat.

Therefore, in the integrated display section 30, in the control menu "Range Grill (RG)", a warning message is displayed warning the user not to place a plastic container inside the heating chamber 113 and heat it. In other words, when executing the control menu "Range Grill", this warning message is one type of "standby common information" 30N described in Embodiment 1.

In the "warming" (automatic microwave) control menu, a non-contact (infrared) temperature measurement unit 158 (not shown) detects the temperature of the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the temperature of the wall surface of the heating chamber 113.
The control device 105 receives temperature detection information from the non-contact temperature measuring section (infrared temperature measuring section) 158 (not shown) and sends a control signal to the inverter circuit board 121A. In this way, the microwave oscillation is automatically stopped when the target temperature is reached. Therefore, if heat from previous cooking remains and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated control device MC prohibits automatic microwave heating.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, if the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is too high, the user is notified to select the "manual range" control menu. "Microwave manual" is performed by setting the microwave heating time, so even if the temperature of the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 or the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 is high, cooking can be performed without any problem. The display text displayed on such integrated display section 30 is also one type of "standby common information" 30N described in the first embodiment.

When the user issues a heating start command through the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC sends a drive command to the control device 105 that controls the microwave heating operation, closes the relay 182, and drives the inverter circuit 121A. Start microwave heating. At the same time, an operation command signal is issued to the drive circuits 177A and 177B for the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129, and the operation of these two cooling fans 128 and 129 is started. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 68, the antenna drive motor 126 is driven to rotate the antenna 125. As a result, microwaves are introduced into the heating chamber 113 to heat and cook the food.

As is clear from the above explanation, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 of the upper unit 100 are not operated at all during the period when microwave cooking is being performed, unless it is an "extraordinary time". . Therefore, the power consumption of the heating cooker 1 as a whole can be kept low.

On the other hand, the system may be changed to a method in which the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 of the upper unit 100 are operated even during the period when microwave cooking is being performed. As mentioned above, commercial power is first applied to the filter circuit board 54, and then power is supplied from the filter circuit board 54 to the power supply circuit board 55. In other words, even when induction cooking is not being performed at all, some of the circuit components inside the upper case 16 generate heat, so the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may be operated. .
In addition, compared to induction heating cooking, during microwave heating cooking, a method is adopted in which the operating capacity of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is reduced to suppress the supply amount of cooling air. The power consumption of the entire device 1 may be kept low.

Summary of Embodiment 3.
In the third embodiment, a heating cooker to which the first invention is applied is disclosed in the following form. That is,
It has a flat main body 10 equipped with a top plate 15 on the top on which an object to be heated is placed,
Inside the main body 10, there are two or more IH coils 17L and 17R for heating the object on the top plate 15, one inverter circuit board 80 disposed below the coils, and the IH coil. A cover 70 that partitions a first air passage F1 above the inverter circuit board 80 below 17L and 17R, and a first cooling fan 60 and a second cooling fan 61 that introduce outside air for cooling from the outside of the main body 10. and,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have rotary blades that rotate around a vertical axis, and are arranged on the same horizontal plane (first plane SP1) as the inverter circuit board 80. Facing the entrance of 1 Wind Route F1,
The first air passage F1 is formed horizontally long inside the main body, and another circuit board (power supply circuit board 55) to be cooled is arranged on the exit side of the first air passage F1. The configuration was disclosed.

For this configuration, the thin and horizontally long main body 10 is used to connect the first air passage F1 formed above the inverter circuit board 80 from its right or left end (as shown in the first embodiment). The cooling air RF1 and RF2 are forced to pass toward the opposite side, so that the upper part of the inverter circuit board 80 can be cooled. Other effects similar to those of the first invention described in Embodiment 1 can be expected.

In addition, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have rotary blades that rotate around vertical axes, and can force cooling air into the inlet of the first air path F1.

Furthermore, as particularly shown in FIG. 66, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are installed in an overlapping manner so that the fan cases 60C and 61C are close to or in close contact with the bottom surface of the main body 10. ,
The air outlets 60A, 61A have a rectangular cross-sectional shape with a horizontal dimension larger than a height dimension. Furthermore, the positions of the lower end surfaces of the air outlets 60A and 61A were lower than the upper surface (first horizontal surface HP1) of the inverter circuit board 80 (there was a step GD1).

Therefore, since the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not become structures that are high above, it is possible to avoid interference with the IH coil 17 located above, and the height dimension of the main body 10 can be reduced. Since it can be maintained, a thin cooking device 1 can be realized as a result.
Furthermore, since the positions of the lower end faces of the air outlets 60A and 61A are below the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80, even if the cooling air RF1 and RF2 naturally rise as they advance, the first air passage F1 It can be introduced into

In addition to the above, the third embodiment discloses the following characteristic features.
Characteristic configuration 1:
a first inverter circuit 81L having a first switching element;
a second inverter circuit 81R having a second switching element;
an inverter circuit board 80 on which the first inverter circuit and the second inverter circuit are mounted;
a first heat sink 82F to which the first switching element is attached;
a second heat sink 82B to which the second switching element is attached;
Two (first and second) cooling fans 60 and 61 that supply cooling air to the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B,
The first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are arranged on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 such that their respective radiation fin 82FN portions face each other with a first gap GP2 in between,
A cover 70 is provided to cover the upper part of the inverter circuit board 80 and define a tunnel-shaped first air passage F1,
The two cooling fans 60 and 61 each have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around a vertical axis, and fan cases 60C and 61C surrounding the rotary blades,
The air outlets 60A and 61A formed on the circumferential surfaces of the fan cases 60C and 61C are separated from the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B, and are formed in a straight line passing through the center of the first gap GP2. (Reference line) A configuration was disclosed in which both sides of BL are directed toward the first gap GP2.

For this configuration, the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are cooled from the upstream side of the first air path F1 so as to sandwich the straight line (reference line) BL and join from both sides. The winds RF1 and RF2 can be applied intensively, and the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B can be efficiently cooled.

Furthermore, since the two cooling fans 60 and 61 have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around vertical axes, it is possible to increase the height of the installation space for the two cooling fans 60 and 61. do not have. Therefore, a great effect can be expected in that the entire upper unit 100 can be made thinner.

Furthermore, the cover 70 covering just above the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B allows the tunnel-shaped first air path F1 that surrounds the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B to be easily formed. The structure can be easily formed without complicating the structure.

Furthermore, if the two cooling fans 60, 61 have the same dimensions and the same rating specifications as in the first embodiment, the procurement cost of the cooling fans 60, 61 can be reduced, or quality control can be facilitated. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, since the rotation directions of the rotary blades 60F and 61F are aligned in the same manner, effects such as ease of production and quality control can be expected.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 3, a heating cooker that can obtain the same effects as the second invention, fourth invention, and fifth invention described in Embodiment 1 was disclosed.

Characteristic configuration 2:
Furthermore, this third embodiment also disclosed a built-in heating cooker having the following features. That is,
an upper unit 100 that has an induction heating source 9 that heats an object to be heated and is supported by the kitchen furniture 2;
a lower unit 200 attached to the upper unit 100 and containing a heating chamber 113;
A microwave heating device 120 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113 and an oven heating device 140 that heats the heating chamber are arranged in the lower unit 200,
The upper unit 100 includes an IH control section 90 that controls the induction heating source 9, a control device 105 that controls both the microwave heating device 120 and the oven heating device 140, and the IH control section 90 and the control device 105 that control both the microwave heating device 120 and the oven heating device 140. An integrated control device MC (master microcomputer) MC that integrally controls both the devices 105,
The upper unit 100 includes a filter circuit board 54 that receives power from a commercial power source 99, and a power circuit (34, 36) that converts the power from the filter circuit board 54 into a specified power supply voltage,
The control device 105, the IH control unit 90, and the integrated control device MC are supplied with low voltage power generated by the power supply circuits 34 and 36 as a power source,
The inverter circuit 81 of the induction heating source 17, the microwave generation source 122 of the microwave heating device 120, the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B of the oven heating device 140, the filter circuit 54, the power supply circuit 34, The configuration is such that power (200V power supply) distributed from between 36 and 36 is applied.

With this configuration, the overall power supply configuration of the cooking device 1 is simplified, and reliable operation can be expected by suppressing the propagation of unnecessary noise.

Moreover, according to this configuration, three types of heating, namely induction heating, microwave heating, and oven heating, can be performed in one heating cooking device, and the heating cooking device is highly convenient and can handle a wide range of cooking.

Characteristic configuration 3:
Furthermore, in this Embodiment 3, the heating cooker of the following form was also disclosed. That is,
A top plate 15 is provided at the top of the main body case HC,
Inside the main body case HC, there is a heating chamber 113 whose front opening is openable and closed by a door 114, a microwave heating device 120 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and an upper part of the top plate 15. an induction heating source 9 that heats an object to be heated placed in the
A first air intake port 164 introduces outside air for cooling the induction heating source 9 into the main body case HC, and a first intake port 164 introduces outside air for cooling the microwave heating source 189 into the main body case HC. The second intake port 152 and the auxiliary intake auxiliary intake ports 152S1 and 152S2 were arranged on opposite sides of the heating chamber 113.

According to this configuration, in one cooking device, both microwave heating and induction heating can be performed, resulting in a highly convenient heating device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

In addition, the positions where the outside air for heating the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9 are introduced are separate from each other, so that the introduction of outside air from each other can be prevented from being adversely affected or interfered with. Further, even if the rotational speed of the cooling fan is the same, generation of humming noise can be avoided, and a heating cooker with quiet operating noise can be provided.

Furthermore, as specifically explained with reference to FIG. 66, in this third embodiment, a magnetic shield plate (magnetic shield sheet) formed of a non-magnetic metal is provided between the first inverter circuit board 80 and the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. ), a magnetic shielding effect against leakage magnetic flux radiated from the left IH coil 17L located closest to the inverter circuit board 80 can be expected.
Therefore, the operation of the first inverter circuit board 80 is stabilized, and reliable control can be expected.
Similarly, if the cover 70 is made of a non-magnetic metal, or if non-magnetic metal sheets are stacked on top of each other, it can be expected that the magnetic shielding performance of the first inverter circuit board 80 will be similarly improved.

In the third embodiment, the following characteristic configuration was also disclosed. That is,
A horizontally long and flat upper case 16 is provided with a top plate 15 on which an object to be heated is placed,
Inside the case 16, there are IH coils 17L, 17M, and 17R that can respectively heat objects to be heated at three locations on the top plate 15, and three inverter circuits 81L that supply high-frequency power to each of these coils. 81M, 81R, an inverter circuit board 80 on which two of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R are mounted, an inverter circuit board 80M on which the remaining one inverter circuit 81M is mounted, and one of the IH coils. , a cover 70 that is installed between one IH coil 17L and the inverter circuit board 80 and partitions a first cooling air path F1 between them, and a cover 70 that draws outside air for cooling from outside the upper case 16. A first cooling fan 60 and a second cooling fan 61 to be introduced,
The cover 70 forms a first air path F1 between the cover 70 and the inverter circuit board 80,
The inverter circuit board 80 has a horizontally long rectangular planar shape,
The two cooling fans are a first cooling fan having rotary blades 60F for centrifugal air blowing, and a second cooling fan having rotary blades 61F for centrifugal air blowing,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 blow cooling air from a ventilation hole 64 formed in the bottom surface (bottom wall surface 16S) of the upper case 16 by rotation of the rotary blades 60F and 61F. Each will be introduced,
The first air path F1 into which the first cooling air RF1 from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling air RF2 from the second cooling fan 61 are combined and introduced is the inverter circuit board 80. It extends in a straight line in the left and right direction above the
The first cooling air RF1 and the second cooling air RF2 that have passed through the first air path F1 cool the IH coil 17L, and then pass through the plurality of exhaust windows 53A formed in the rear part of the upper case 16. , 53B to the outside of the upper case 16.

Furthermore, the entire bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 is flat,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 each have a circular suction port 64H on the lower surface,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are arranged at the same height on the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16,
circular ventilation holes 64 are formed in the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case, corresponding to the suction ports 64H of the first cooling fan 60 and the suction ports 64H of the second cooling fan 61;
The diameter of the vent hole 64 is set larger than the suction port 64H of the first cooling fan 60 and the suction port 64H of the second cooling fan 61, respectively.

Due to this configuration, the inverter circuit board 80 is intensively cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 passing through the first air path F1.
Further, as explained in FIG. 67, the ventilation hole 64, the suction port 64H of the first cooling fan 60, and the suction port 64H of the second cooling fan 61 are located at opposite positions and in close proximity to each other. , outside air is efficiently and smoothly drawn into the fan cases 60C, 61C from the outside of the cooking device 1 through the ventilation hole 64. Moreover, since the generation of noise can be suppressed when outside air passes through the ventilation holes 64, quiet operation can be realized.

Embodiment 4.
FIG. 69 is a block diagram illustrating the overall control function of the built-in complex heating cooker according to Embodiment 4 of the present invention. It should be noted that the same or corresponding parts as the configurations of Embodiments 1 to 3 described in FIGS. 1 to 68 are given the same reference numerals.

Embodiment 4 is characterized in that, like Embodiment 2, the number of induction heating parts of heating cooker 1 is increased to three. Furthermore, since the number of inverter circuits is increased by one, there are two IH control sections 90, one of which is the (first) IH control section 90M1. The other is the (second) IH control section 90M2.

In FIG. 69, arrows indicated by broken lines indicate command signals for control.
In the cooking device 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, there are a total of seven control devices mainly composed of microcomputers. This point is a major difference from Embodiments 1 to 3.

Among the seven control devices described above, the integrated control device MC is in charge of overall control of the cooking device 1. It is the (first) IH control section 90M1 that receives the command from the integrated control device MC and controls induction heating cooking other than the central heating section 17HM. Furthermore, it is the (second) IH control section 90M2 that controls the induction heating cooking of the central heating section 17HM.

Controller 105 controls both microwave heat source 189 and oven heat source 188. This control device 105 is a combination of the heating chamber control section 159 and the microwave heating control section 130 described in the first embodiment.

The above-mentioned IH control unit 90M1, IH control unit 90M2, and control device 105 are called slave microcomputers because they perform prescribed control according to instructions to the integrated control device MC and return processing results to the integrated control device MC. There is. In this case, the integrated control device MC is called a master microcomputer.

The remaining three of the seven control devices described above will be explained below.
First, in the input operation section 40, the right input control device 23 processes input from the right touch key group arranged on the right operation section 40R and display on the display section 31R. The right input control device 23 further processes inputs from the touch keys of the central operation section 40M and displays on the integrated display section 30.

The second is a left input control device 24 disposed on the left operation section 40L that processes input from the left touch key group and display on the display section 31L.
The third is the power switch control device 28.
The power switch control device 28 detects the operation of the operation button (operation section) 98 of the main power switch 97 arranged in the input operation section 40 and determines whether the power is turned on or off.

In FIG. 69, 106A is a plug connected to a commercial (AC) power source 99. Power at a voltage of 200V, 50Hz or 60Hz is conducted to filter circuit board 54 via power cord 106. Note that the filter circuit board 54 is built into the upper unit 100.

A (first) inverter circuit 81R related to the right IH coil 17R is driven by a drive circuit 37R.
A (second) inverter circuit 81L related to the left IH coil 17L is driven by a drive circuit 37L.
A (third) inverter circuit 81M related to the central IH coil 17M is driven by a drive circuit 37M.
Note that the configurations of the three inverter circuits 81R, 81L, and 81M are basically the same.

37M is a drive circuit for the inverter circuit 81M. 77aA is an input current detection section, and 77bm is an output current detection section. The outputs of the input current detection section 77aA and the output current detection section 77bm are input to the IH control section 90M2.

Summary of Embodiment 4.
In the fourth embodiment, a heating cooker to which the first invention is applied is disclosed in the following form. That is,
It has a flat main body 10 equipped with a top plate 15 on the top on which an object to be heated is placed,
Inside the main body 10, there are three IH coils 17L, 17M, and 17R that heat the object on the top plate 15, and two IH coils 17L and 17R are arranged below these three coils. (first) inverter circuit board 80, a cover 70 that partitions a tunnel-shaped first air path F1 above the inverter circuit board 80 below the two IH coils 17L and 17R, and the main body 10. a first cooling fan 60 and a second cooling fan 61 that introduce outside air for cooling from the outside,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate about vertical axes, and are located on the same horizontal plane (first) as the (first) inverter circuit board 80. facing the entrance of the first air passage F1 on the plane SP1),
The first air passage F1 is formed horizontally long inside the main body 10, and another circuit board (power supply circuit board 55) to be cooled is disposed on the exit side thereof. A heating cooker was disclosed.

For this configuration, the thin and oblong main body 10 is used to direct cooling air from the right or left end to the opposite side in the first air passage F1 formed above the inverter circuit board 80. By forcing RF1 and RF2 to pass through, the upper part of the inverter circuit board 80 can be cooled.

Furthermore, the cooling air that has passed through the first air path F1 can also cool another circuit board (power supply circuit board 55) to be cooled, and it is also possible to prevent abnormalities and malfunctions of important power supply circuits.

In addition, for the same configuration as the first embodiment, the same effects as described in the first embodiment can be expected.

Embodiment 5.
FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of each cooling fan in the built-in complex heating cooker according to Embodiment 5 of the present invention. Note that the same or corresponding parts as those in the first to fourth embodiments are given the same reference numerals.

In the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 70, the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 start operating at basically the same timing as the start of cooking.
The solid line arrow shown in FIG. 70 indicates the period from the start to the end of the operation, and the broken line arrow following the solid line indicates the additional operation time for heat dissipation, which will be described below. Note that each of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 does not actually stop operating once at the end of the solid line arrow, but continues to operate for the additional operating time.

In this fifth embodiment, the time from the start to the end of operation of each cooling fan 60, 61, 128, 129 is defined as follows.
First cooling fan 60: starts operating at the timing when the induction heating operation is started, and performs "heat dissipation operation" for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the induction heating operation ends. This is for cooling high temperature parts such as the top plate 15. Depending on the value determined by the product of the length of the induction heating time and the maximum thermal power used (power consumption of the inverter circuit), the "heat radiation operation time Th1" may be 3 minutes or 5 minutes. , one of three stages of 10 minutes is selected. This is performed by the IH control section 90.
Second cooling fan 61: In synchronization with the operation of the first cooling fan 60, the “heat dissipation operation time Th2” is determined. This is performed by a drive start command and a drive end command from the IH control section 90. Note that the operation starts at the same timing as the first cooling fan 60.

Fourth cooling fan 129:
(1) In the case of microwave heating cooking: The "heat dissipation operation" is performed for only 3 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating operation ends. In other words, this "heat radiation operation time Tm2" is fixed at 3 minutes. This operation control is performed by the microwave heating control section 130.
(2) In the case of oven heating cooking: Immediately after the operation of either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B ends, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured every 10 seconds, and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured. It operates until the temperature drops below a certain level. In other words, the "heat radiation operation time To2" changes from time to time.

The temperature of the heating chamber 113 is repeatedly measured at regular intervals by at least one of the temperature sensor TS2 and the temperature sensor 160, but a thermistor-type temperature sensor that measures the outside temperature of the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 by contact is used. Sensors etc. may be added. All temperature measurement data is transmitted to heating chamber control section 159 (not shown). Eventually, the temperature measurement data is transmitted to the microwave heating control unit 130, and the fourth cooling fan 129 continues to operate until a command to end the operation is issued to the fourth cooling fan 129. In other words, the "heat radiation operation time To2" changes from time to time.

Third cooling fan 128:
(1) In the case of microwave cooking: “heat radiation operation time Tm1” is the same as that of the fourth cooling fan 129. Further, control of start and end of operation is performed by the microwave heating control section 130, similarly to the fourth cooling fan 129.
(2) In the case of oven heating cooking: Immediately after the operation of either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B ends, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured every 10 seconds, and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured. It operates until the temperature drops below a certain level.
Temperature measurement is performed by a temperature sensor 160 that uses infrared rays for non-contact measurement. The temperature measurement data is transmitted to heating chamber control section 159. Eventually, the temperature measurement data is transmitted to the microwave heating control unit 130, and the third cooling fan 128 continues to operate until a command to end the operation is issued to the third cooling fan 128.

As can be seen from FIG. 70, in the case of oven cooking, the "heat radiation operation time To2" of the fourth cooling fan 129 may be longer than the "heat radiation operation time To1" of the third cooling fan 128. This is because the fourth cooling fan 129 is a fan that directly supplies cooling air into the heating chamber 113, as described in the first embodiment (FIG. 27). That is, when oven cooking is performed once, the heating chamber 113 is continuously heated for a maximum of 60 minutes in the "oven" control menu described in Embodiment 1 (FIG. 29).
Therefore, the entire heating chamber 113 becomes high temperature (for example, 200° C.). Therefore, it takes time to cool such a heating chamber 113.

If the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is not lowered, it is assumed that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 will be high from the beginning when microwave cooking is performed immediately next time.
If the temperature of heating chamber 113 is too high, "warming" cooking as described in the first embodiment cannot be performed using microwave heating source 189. This is because the "warming" control menu adopts a control in which microwave irradiation is automatically stopped when the food is heated to, for example, 80° C. (default value). Therefore, in order to avoid user confusion, for example, if the heating chamber 113 is at a temperature of 80° C. or higher from the beginning, it is necessary to perform an error process and not accept heating cooking.

In this fifth embodiment, the relationship between the control menu of the first embodiment and the operating times (periods) of the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 is set as follows. There is.
That is, in one control menu, the above-mentioned times such as "heat radiation operation time Th1", "heat radiation operation time Th2", "heat radiation operation time To1", etc. are also included in the control program. . In other words, the operating time of the first cooling fan 60 to the fourth cooling fan 129 is also controlled by the IH control unit 90 and the control device 105.

Therefore, when one control menu is set, a series of control operations from the end of the heating operation until the end of the heat dissipation operation is determined according to that control menu. In other words, one control menu ends when the related first to fourth cooling fans 60 to 129 finish operating.

The above explanation was based on the assumption that the air volume (air blowing capacity) of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 during cooking was constant. In some cases, changes such as reducing the amount of air blown may be made. Further, a variable capacity operation may be performed in which the amount of air blown is made smaller when the temperature inside the lower unit 200 or the upper unit 100 is lower than when it is high.

Note that the "control program" that realizes the operating conditions that determine the operation time (operation start, operation stop) and air blowing amount of the first cooling fan 60 to the fourth cooling fan 129 is the IH control unit 90 and the microwave heating control. It is not limited to the configuration stored in the section 130 (see FIG. 25 of the first embodiment), but also the configuration stored in the two IH control sections 90M1 (90M2) and the microwave heating control section 130 (see FIG. 25 of the second embodiment). 56) may also be used. Alternatively, it may be stored all at once in the integrated control device MC as a ventilation control program.

As is clear from the above description, this fifth embodiment can also be expected to have the same effects as the first embodiment with respect to the same configuration as the first embodiment.

Furthermore, the integrated control device MC of this Embodiment 5,
(1) During a period in which one control menu is executed by specifying either a heating operation using only the microwave generation source 122 or an independent heating operation using only the oven heating source using the menu selection section. , the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are operated, and the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are not operated,
(2) By using the menu selection section, specify an operation to automatically execute only the heating operation by the microwave generation source 122 and only the heating operation by the oven heating source in sequence, and create one control menu (RG continuous cooking). ), the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are operated, and the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are not operated,
(3) Only the heating operation by the IH coil 17 is specified by the input operation unit 40, and the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated while one control menu is being executed. , and the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not operated.

According to this configuration, when the user starts cooking by selecting one control menu, the operation of the various cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 is temporarily stopped when induction heating or microwave heating is completed. To smoothly shift from heating cooking mode to heat dissipation mode without causing a situation where operation is started again.

Embodiment 6.
FIG. 71 is a simplified plan view of a built-in composite heating cooker for disclosing Embodiment 6. FIG. 72 is a simplified perspective view of the main parts of the lower unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 71. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing the main cooling air passages of the cooking device of FIG. 71. FIG. 74 is a time chart showing the start and end times of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 71. FIG. 75 is a time chart showing the start and end times of the first to fourth cooling fans in FIG. 71. Note that the same or corresponding parts as those described in Embodiments 1 to 5 are given the same reference numerals.

The heating cooker 1 shown in FIGS. 71 to 75 releases all of the cooling air after cooling the heat radiation part 122H of the magnetron 122 to the outside of the heating cooker 1 without passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113. This is largely different from Embodiments 1 to 5 in that the structure is configured to do this.

The heating cooker 1 of the sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the induction heating section 17H includes a center heating section 17HM in addition to the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR. different.

In FIG. 71, TS10 is a thermistor as a contact type temperature sensor. This temperature sensor TS10 is arranged in a cavity at the center of the ring-shaped IH coil 17M.
Temperature sensor TS10, like temperature sensor TS4 in the first embodiment, is in direct contact with the lower surface of top plate 15 or in contact with the lower surface of top plate 15 via a thermally conductive inclusion. Thereby, the temperature of the top plate 15 is measured. A signal indicating the temperature measurement result is then transmitted to the integrated control device MC.

TS11 is an infrared temperature sensor as a non-contact type temperature sensor, and is arranged at a position away from the center of the central IH coil 17M. This temperature sensor TS11 receives an infrared signal from the direction of the top plate 15, similar to the temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 of the first embodiment. That is, the temperature sensor TS11 measures the state of infrared rays transmitted through the top plate 15 and radiated from the heated object N (not shown) such as a pot or frying pan, and measures the temperature of the bottom surface of the heated object N without contact. It can be measured with

17MS is a circular position mark displayed by printing or the like on the upper surface of the top plate 15 to indicate a desirable position for placing the object to be heated N such as a metal pot.
The central IH coil 17M constituting the central heating section 17M is driven by a dedicated inverter circuit 81M. That is, the inverter circuit 81R of the right heating section 17HR and the inverter circuit 81L of the left heating section 17HL are separately and independently driven by the IH control section 90M2 (not shown).

The inverter circuit 81R of the right heating section 17HR and the inverter circuit 81L of the left heating section 17HL are driven by an IH control section 90M1 (not shown) that is separate from the IH control section 90M2.

The central operation section 40M is equipped with an input key (not shown) for selecting the central heating section 17HM. When the input key is operated, "Central Heater", which is one of the control menus, can be selected on the integrated display section 30, as described in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment. Thereby, the heating operation in the central heating section 17HM can be specified.

Next, FIG. 72 will be explained.
Reference numeral 129 denotes a fourth cooling fan (one of the lower cooling fans), which is installed directly above the intake port (second intake port) 152B (not shown) formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. There is.

A box-shaped case A151 that accommodates the heat radiation section 122H of the magnetron 122 is installed directly above the air intake port 152B. An opening 150H larger than the intake port 152B is formed in the bottom surface of the case A150.
The case A is entirely made of plastic material.

In this Embodiment 6, the lower air passage UH inside the lower unit 200 is configured as follows.
Internal path 1: The inverter circuit board 121 is cooled by outside air sucked in by the third cooling fan 128 from the second intake port 152F. The rest is the same as in the first embodiment.
Internal path 2: The heat radiating section 122H is cooled by the outside air drawn in by the fourth cooling fan 129 from the second air intake port 152B.
The communication window 309 shown in Embodiment 1 is not formed on the left side wall surface of case B151 that accommodates heat dissipation section 122H and at a position close to the ceiling.

On the other hand, a communication window 306, which serves as the only passage to the outside, is opened on the rear wall surface of the case B151 and at a position close to the ceiling. An exhaust duct 307 extending rearward is connected to the outside of the communication window 306. Note that the exhaust duct 307 shown in FIG. 72 is inclined as a whole so that it becomes higher as it approaches the terminal end 307 side, but it may also have a form that extends in the horizontal direction.

A terminal end 307E of the exhaust duct 307 extends to the right end of the gap GP1 at the rear of the upper unit 100. The exhaust (exit) end of the exhaust duct 307 extends vertically so as to pass through the gap GP1 without penetrating the upper space 300A on the upper unit 100 side, and has an open top surface. ing.

In FIG. 72, 320 is an exhaust port corresponding to the exhaust port 20 of Embodiment 1, which discharges the cooling air RF7 from the cooking device 1. It is located at the rear right position of the upper unit 100, and is far away from the exhaust duct 102 located at the rear left position of the upper unit 100 (see FIG. 71).

The exhaust port 320 is installed to the right of the right exhaust port 65 . This point is the same as the configuration described in FIG. 47 in the second embodiment.
The cooling air RF6 that has cooled the heat radiation section 122H of the magnetron 122 does not pass through the heating chamber 113 in this sixth embodiment.

With this configuration, all of the cooling air RF6 that has cooled the heat radiation section 122H of the magnetron 122 does not pass through the heating chamber 113, but directly reaches the exhaust duct 307, and finally reaches the exhaust duct 307. It reaches 102. In other words, the cooling air that has cooled the heat radiation part 122H of the magnetron 122 does not reach the heating chamber 113, but immediately after cooling the heat radiation part 122H, it reaches the rear part of the upper unit 100 through the duct 307, becomes the cooling air RF7, and is heated. It is released to the outside of the cooking device 1.

On the other hand, the inverter circuit board 121 is cooled by the outside air sucked in by the third cooling fan 128 through the ventilation hole 164 .
The cooling air RF5 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121 reaches the exhaust duct 102 from the communication port 173 without passing through the heating chamber 113.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment as well, in the process in which the cooling air RF5 and RF6 are discharged from the lower air passage UH of the lower unit 200 to the outside through different routes, the upper air passage AH of the upper unit 100 is It does not mix with the cooling air inside.

The main features of the sixth embodiment, especially when compared with the first embodiment, are as described above.
In such a change, the air blowing capacity of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 may be changed. Specifically, the blowing capacity of the fourth cooling fan 129 that cools the heat radiation section 122H of the magnetron 122 is set to be small (compared to the third cooling fan 128) in consideration of the magnitude of the air path resistance. In this way, the power consumption of the fourth cooling fan 129 may be reduced or switching to an inexpensive cooling fan may be possible.

Although not shown, in the sixth embodiment as well, the case A 150 includes the vertical portion 308 as described in the first embodiment. The inverter circuit board 121 is installed in the vertical direction corresponding to the vertical portion.

In the heating cooker 1 of the sixth embodiment, "RG cooking", which was one of the control menus of the first embodiment, is changed as follows.
That is, "RG continuous cooking #1" is set as one of the control menus suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113.

In addition, as explained in Embodiment 5, one control menu also includes time controls such as "heat radiation operation time Th1", "heat radiation operation time Th2", "heat radiation operation time To1", etc. included in the program. In other words, the operating time of the first cooling fan 60 to the fourth cooling fan 129 is also controlled.

The above-mentioned "RG continuous cooking #1" is a cooking method using a combination of microwave heating and oven heating. There are two types:
(1) A pattern in which microwave heating is first performed for a certain period of time, and after that period of time, heating is automatically performed using the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.
(2) Microwave heating is performed until the temperature reaches 80°C or the temperature set by the user (however, any one temperature can be set within the range of 80°C to 100°C), after which use is reserved. A pattern that automatically switches to oven heating and heats only for a period of time set by the upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B or until the temperature reaches the temperature set by the user.

As mentioned above, in "RG continuous cooking #1", cooking automatically proceeds without the user giving a command to start cooking again midway through, and the user is always near the heating cooker 1. Since it is not necessary, it reduces the burden on the user.

In the control menu of "RG Continuous Cooking #1", the user cannot select the heating power value (watts) during microwave heating, but can select one of "weak", "strong", etc. to adjust the heating intensity. You can choose.

Such "RG continuous cooking #1" can be selected by the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40.
In addition, in this "RG continuous cooking #1", the central operation section 40M is provided with an order selection key (not shown) so that the user can select whether to perform microwave heating or oven heating first. It is equipped with

FIG. 74 will be explained.
When "RG continuous cooking #1" in which microwave heating is performed first is selected as the control menu, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth Even after the microwave heating operation is finished, the cooling fan 129 continues to operate while the control menu (RG continuous cooking #1) is being executed.

In this way, in the case of "RG continuous cooking #1" in which microwave heating is performed first, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 do not temporarily stop operating when microwave heating ends. The operation continues as is, and the oven heat cooking continues.
On the other hand, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are not operated at all during microwave heating or oven cooking.

Conversely, in the case of "RG continuous cooking #1" in which oven heating is performed first, the third cooling fan 128 and fourth cooling fan 129, which were operated during the oven heating operation, are turned off when the oven heating operation is completed. The operation does not stop and continues as it is. Then, while the operation continues, microwave cooking is started.
The reason that the operations of all the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are coordinated in this manner is that they are all controlled by the integrated control device MC.

Next, FIG. 75 shows an example of the control menu "cooperative cooking" described in the first embodiment.
In this "cooperative cooking", after finishing one type of cooking, the user moves the food to be cooked and cooks another type of food in another place (for example, on the heating chamber 113 or top plate 15). It is heated using a heating source. Although it is necessary to issue a command to start cooking again during the process, the use of at least two heating sources is determined at the control menu selection stage.

The "cooperative cooking" control menu shown in FIG. 75 is an example of using induction heating and microwave heating.
As shown in FIG. 75, after induction heating cooking is performed on the top plate 15, microwave heating is performed, but the food to be cooked on the top plate 15 is moved into the heating chamber 113. There is a need. For example, during induction heating, an object to be heated such as a frying pan or a metal pot is used, but if it is moved to the heating chamber 113 as it is, it is not suitable for microwave heating.

Therefore, a "transition period" TR is provided to provide a time grace, and the maximum time of this transition period is determined in advance by the integrated control device MC.

In this sixth embodiment as well, as described in the first embodiment, the input key 43KP is provided on the central operation section 40M. Therefore, when this input key 43KP is pressed, the integrated control device MC switches to the "function mode", the default value of the transition period TR is displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30, and then the transition period TR is , can be changed by the user. Note that the default value of the transition period TR is set to, for example, 5 minutes. Users can change this from 3 minutes to 15 minutes.

When the transition period TR is set to be long, if the temperature of the top plate 15 or the inverter circuit board 80 drops below a specified value (for example, 60° C.) during that period, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may stop. Similarly, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 may also stop.

As shown in FIG. 75, if preparations are completed during the transition period TR, the user can start the subsequent "microwave heating cooking" by operating the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M again. .
As is clear from FIG. 75, when one control menu (in this case, two combinations of "induction heating and microwave heating") is executed, the end of the execution period of that control menu is reached by the third cooling fan 128. , the fourth cooling fan 129, whichever is later until one of them stops operating.

As is clear from the above description, the following embodiments are disclosed in the sixth embodiment. That is,
A heating chamber 113 whose front opening is openable and closed by a door 114 is provided inside the main body case HC installed inside the kitchen furniture 2, and a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113. An induction heating source 9 that heats an object to be heated,
The interior of the main body case is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B with a metal partition wall 16S as a boundary,
In the upper space 300A, two (first and second) cooling fans 60 and 61 equipped with rotary blades 60F and 61F rotating around a vertical axis, and three IH coils 17L, 17M and 17R, Inverter circuits 81L, 81M, 81R corresponding to each of the three IH coils, an inverter circuit board 80 on which the two inverter circuits 81L, 81R are mounted, and an inverter circuit board 80M on which one inverter circuit 81M is mounted. , respectively accommodate
The lower space 300B accommodates a microwave generation source 122 and a microwave heating inverter circuit board 121,
Two (first, second) cooling fans 60, 61 allow outside air to flow into the upper space 300A from ventilation holes 64, 164 communicating with the outside of the lower space 300B without passing through the lower space 300B. has an upper air passage AH through which is introduced;
The lower space 300B has a lower air passage UH through which outside air is introduced by lower cooling fans 128 and 129 from intake ports 152F and 152B at the lower part of the main body case,
The lower air passage UH includes a first lower air passage in which an inverter circuit board 121 for the microwave heating source 189 is accommodated, and a second lower air passage in which a heat dissipation section 122H of the microwave generation source 122 is disposed. This configuration is characterized by the following.

Furthermore, heat sinks 82B and 82F are arranged on the inverter circuit board 80, with the radiation fins 82F facing each other and a gap GP2 being secured between them,
The configuration is such that the cooling air from the two (first and second) cooling fans 60 and 61 described above is blown in different directions from the upstream position of the gap GP.

According to this configuration, the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are intensively cooled by cooling air RF1 and RF2 from the radiation fins 82FN on the upstream side of the first air path F1.

Furthermore, since the two cooling fans 60 and 61 have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around vertical axes, it is possible to increase the height of the installation space for the two cooling fans 60 and 61. do not have. Therefore, a great effect can be expected in that the entire upper unit 100 can be made thinner.

Furthermore, a cover 70 is installed so as to cover immediately above the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B, thereby creating a tunnel-shaped first air path that surrounds the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B. By forming F1, the cooling effect can be further improved.

As described above, even with the configuration shown in the sixth embodiment, the same effects as in the first embodiment can be expected.

Furthermore, according to the configuration disclosed in Embodiment 6, a single cooking device can perform both microwave heating and induction heating, resulting in a highly convenient heating device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, an operation for cooling the IH coil 17 and the inverter circuit board 80 housed in the upper space 300A, and an operation for cooling the microwave generation source 122 and the microwave heating inverter circuit board 121 housed in the lower space 300B. This means that both microwave heating cooking and induction heating cooking can be performed stably without worrying about overheating inside the main body case HC. .

Furthermore, in Embodiment 6, the lower air passage UH has a vertical portion 308 that extends in the vertical direction apart from the side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 at a position directly above the air intake port 152F, and The inverter circuit board 121 for the source 188 is configured to be housed vertically within the vertical portion 308 .

According to such a configuration, the inverter circuit board 121 can be kept far away from the heating chamber 113 which is heated to a high temperature, and even if the main body case HC is in a narrow space, overheating of the inverter circuit board 121 can be prevented. Highly effective.

Furthermore, the microwave heating inverter circuit board 121 is installed in the vertical portion 308 on the side closer to the side wall surface of the main body case HC. That is, it is located on the side closer to the right side vertical wall 101R of the lower case 101.
Therefore, the inverter circuit board 121 can be placed farthest away from the heating chamber 113, which becomes high in temperature, and is highly effective in preventing overheating of the inverter circuit board 121 even if the main body case HC has a narrow space.

Furthermore, in this sixth embodiment,
The main body case HC is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B by a partition wall 16S,
The upper space 300A further includes an input operation section 40 for selecting a heating source, and an integrated control device MC that receives an input signal from the input operation section,
The input operation section 40 includes a right operation section 40R for specifying operating conditions for the right heating section 17HR, a left operation section 40L for specifying operating conditions for the left heating section 17HL, the oven heat source 188, and the microwave. A central operating section 40M for specifying the operating conditions of the heating source 189 and the central heating section 17HM,
A built-in complex heating cooker is disclosed below the input operation section, in which outside air is introduced into the upper space from the first intake port (vent hole 164) by a cooling fan 61. did.

According to this configuration, since the oven heat source 188, the microwave heat source 189, and the central heating section 17HM utilize the central operation section 40M, the size of the main body case HC is limited due to the narrow installation space. Even if there are restrictions, the operation area for the input keys and the like in the central operation section 40M can be secured.

Furthermore, since the outside air passes below the input operation section 40M, overheating of the electric/electronic components constituting the input operation section, as well as malfunctions and damage caused by the overheating, can be prevented.

Note that if the partition wall 16S is made of metal, even if microwave leakage or electromagnetic noise occurs in the lower space 300B, propagation to the upper space 300A side can be suppressed, and the control portion of the upper space 300A, e.g. This has advantages such as being able to prevent adverse effects on the integrated control device MC.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment,
The main case is divided into an upper space and a lower space by a partition wall,
The upper space 300A further includes an input operation section 40 for selecting a heating source, an integrated display section 30, and an integrated control device MC that receives input signals from the input operation section 40,
The input operation section 40 includes a right operation section 40R for specifying operating conditions for the right heating section 17HR, a left operation section 40L for specifying operating conditions for the left heating section 17HL, the oven heat source, and the microwave heating. a central operating section 40M for specifying the operating conditions of the source and the central heating section 17HM;
When operating the oven heat source 188 or the microwave heat source 189, when the central operation section 40M is operated, the integrated display section 30 displays a control mode and control conditions. has disclosed a built-in complex heating cooker.

According to this configuration, since the oven heat source 188, the microwave heat source 189, and the central heating section 17HM utilize the central operation section 40M, the size of the main body case HC is limited due to the narrow installation space. Even if there are restrictions, the operation area for the input keys and the like in the central operation section 40M can be secured.

Furthermore, when the central operation section 40M is operated, the control mode (for example, "RG continuous cooking #1") and control conditions can be displayed on the integrated display section 30. 30, the control mode and control conditions can be confirmed and cooking commands can be given, improving operability.

Further, the integrated display section 30 and the input operation section 40 are arranged in an air path through which outside air introduced from the first air intake port 164 (intake hole 64) into the upper space 300A by a second cooling fan 61 passes. The configuration is as follows.

According to this configuration, the outside air passes below the input operation section 40 and the integrated display section 30, which prevents overheating of the electric/electronic components that make up the input operation section 40 and the integrated display section 30, and prevents malfunctions caused by this. Damage etc. can be prevented.

Further, the integrated display section 30 and the input operation section 40 are arranged in an air path through which outside air introduced from the first air intake port 164 (intake hole 64) into the upper space 300A by a second cooling fan 61 passes. has been
The integrated control device MC operates the second cooling fan when heating the induction heating source 9, and does not operate the second cooling fan when heating the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. It is.

According to this configuration, the outside air passes below the input operation section 40 and the integrated display section 30, which prevents overheating of the electric/electronic components that make up the input operation section 40 and the integrated display section 30, and prevents malfunctions caused by this. Damage etc. can be prevented.

Furthermore, when the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are operated for heating, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are not operated. It is possible to suppress power consumption at a low level (see FIG. 75).

Embodiment 7.
FIG. 76 is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans to disclose the seventh embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 77 is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the heating cooker to disclose a modification of the seventh embodiment. Note that parts that are the same as or corresponding to the configurations described in Embodiments 1 to 6 are given the same reference numerals.

In the seventh embodiment, the operation contents of "RG continuous cooking #1" are changed and an operation menu of "RG continuous cooking #2" is prepared.

FIG. 76 will be explained.
If you select "RG continuous cooking #2" that uses both microwave heating and oven heating as the control menu from the beginning, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 start operating at the same time.

The fourth cooling fan 129 continues to cool the heat radiation section 122H of the magnetron 122 even after finishing the microwave heating operation, and is stopped when the "heat radiation operation time To2" has elapsed.
On the other hand, the operation of the third cooling fan 128 is stopped when the "heat dissipation operation time To1" has elapsed after the heating operation of oven heating cooking is completed.

In this way, in the case of "RG continuous cooking #2" in which microwave heating and oven heating are started at the same time and only microwave heating is finished first, the third cooling fan 128 The operation does not stop and continues as it is.
On the other hand, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are not operated at all during microwave heating or oven cooking.
The reason that the operations of all the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are coordinated in this manner is that they are all controlled by the integrated control device MC.

Next, FIG. 77 will be explained.
A modification of this seventh embodiment is "RG continuous cooking #3" which starts oven heating at first, automatically starts microwave heating halfway, and uses both oven heating and microwave heating as a control menu. This is an example in which .

As shown in the "execution period of one control menu" indicated by a thick arrow in FIG. 77, only the third cooling fan 128 starts operating in synchronization with the start of oven heating.

Thereafter, when the cooking process of oven heating progresses and microwave heating is started, the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 is started at this point.
Then, when the microwave heating and oven heating are completed according to the "RG continuous cooking #3" control program, the operation of the third cooling fan 128 is stopped when the "heat dissipation operation time To1" has elapsed.

Further, the fourth cooling fan 129 continues to cool the heat radiation section 122H of the magnetron 122, and its operation is stopped when the "heat radiation operation time To2" has elapsed.

In such "RG continuous cooking #3", the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are not operated at all during microwave heating and oven heating cooking.
The reason that the operations of all the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are coordinated in this manner is that they are all controlled by the integrated control device MC.

As is clear from the above description, the seventh embodiment discloses the following configurations. That is,
Inside the main body case HC, there are a heating chamber 113 whose front opening is openable and closed by a door 114, a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and an induction heating source that heats the object to be heated. 9 and,
The interior of the main body case is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B with a metal partition wall 16S as a boundary,
In the upper space 300A, two (first and second) cooling fans 60 and 61 equipped with rotary blades 60F and 61F rotating around a vertical axis, and three IH coils 17L, 17M and 17R, Inverter circuits 81L, 81M, 81R corresponding to each of the three IH coils, an inverter circuit board 80 on which the two inverter circuits 81L, 81R are mounted, and an inverter circuit board 80M on which one inverter circuit 81M is mounted. , respectively accommodate
The lower space 300B accommodates a microwave generation source 122 and a microwave heating inverter circuit board 121,
Two (first, second) cooling fans 60, 61 allow outside air to flow into the upper space 300A from ventilation holes 64, 164 communicating with the outside of the lower space 300B without passing through the lower space 300B. has an upper air passage AH through which is introduced;
The lower space 300B has a lower air passage UH through which outside air is introduced by lower cooling fans 128 and 129 from intake ports 152F and 152B at the lower part of the main body case,
The lower air passage UH includes a first lower air passage in which an inverter circuit board 121 for the microwave heating source 189 is accommodated, and a second lower air passage in which a heat dissipation section 122H of the microwave generation source 122 is disposed. This configuration is characterized by the following.

Furthermore, heat sinks 82B and 82F are arranged on the inverter circuit board 80, with the radiation fins 82F facing each other and a gap GP2 being secured between them,
The configuration is such that the cooling air from the two (first and second) cooling fans 60 and 61 described above is blown in different directions from the upstream position of the gap GP.

According to this configuration, the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B are intensively cooled by cooling air RF1 and RF2 from the radiation fins 82FN on the upstream side of the first air path F1.

Furthermore, since the two cooling fans 60 and 61 have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around vertical axes, it is possible to increase the height of the installation space for the two cooling fans 60 and 61. do not have. Therefore, a great effect can be expected in that the entire upper unit 100 can be made thinner.

Furthermore, a cover 70 is installed so as to cover immediately above the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B, thereby creating a tunnel-shaped first air path that surrounds the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B. By forming F1, the cooling effect can be further improved.

As described above, even with the configuration shown in the seventh embodiment, the same effects as in the first embodiment can be expected.

Furthermore, according to the configuration disclosed in Embodiment 7, a single cooking device can perform both microwave heating and induction heating, resulting in a highly convenient heating device that can handle a wide range of cooking. In addition, if the main body case HC is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, it can also be provided as a built-in heating cooker.

Further, an operation for cooling the IH coil 17 and the inverter circuit board 80 housed in the upper space 300A, and an operation for cooling the microwave generation source 122 and the microwave heating inverter circuit board 121 housed in the lower space 300B. This means that both microwave heating cooking and induction heating cooking can be performed stably without worrying about overheating inside the main body case HC. .

Embodiment 8.
FIG. 78 is a list showing the correspondence between the cooling fan of the heating cooker and the type of heating cooking, for disclosing Embodiment 8 of the present invention. FIG. 79 is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 78. FIG. 80 is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 78. Note that the same or equivalent parts as those described in Embodiments 1 to 7 are given the same reference numerals.

As shown in FIG. 78, in the case of cooking using the induction heating source 9, only two cooling fans, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, are operated.

In the case of cooking using the microwave heating source 189, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 of the lower unit 200 are operated.
Also, in the case of cooking using the microwave heating source 189, as explained in the first to third embodiments, the upper unit 100 includes the filter circuit board 54 and the power supply circuit board 55, and these two types of circuits Electronic components (for example, transformer 57) mounted on the board are also supplied with power and their temperature increases.
Therefore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the upper unit 100 are also operated.

When cooking with the oven heat source 188, the third cooling fan 128 in the lower unit 200 is operated. However, since the magnetron 122 is not driven, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated. This point is different from the operation pattern disclosed in FIG. 36 of the first embodiment.

In the case of cooking using the oven heat source 188, the upper unit 100 also includes a filter circuit board 54 and a power supply circuit board 55, and the electronic components (for example, the transformer 57) mounted on these two types of circuit boards also supply power. is supplied and the temperature rises.
Therefore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the upper unit 100 are also operated.

Next, a continuous cooking operation is specified in which only the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 and only the heating operation by the oven heating source 188 are automatically performed sequentially, during the period when one control menu is being executed. In this case, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 of the lower cooling fan are operated. Further, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 of the upper cooling fan are also operated.

Next, FIG. 79 will be explained.
The feature shown in FIG. 79 is that the content of "cooperative cooking" described in the first embodiment has been changed.

"Cooperative cooking" is a process in which the user moves the food to be cooked after completing one type of heating cooking, and performs another type of heating in another location (for example, on the heating chamber 113 or the top plate 15). It is heated at a source. Although it is necessary to issue a command to start cooking again during the process, the use of at least two heating sources is determined at the control menu selection stage.

The "cooperative cooking" control menu shown in FIG. 79 is an example of using three types of heat sources: induction heating, microwave heating, and oven heating.
As shown in FIG. 79, the food to be cooked is first placed in the heating chamber 113, and the microwave heating source 189 and oven heat source 188 are simultaneously driven to heat the food using two heating methods. . This point is different from the cooperative cooking described in the first embodiment.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 start operating from the start of this cooperative cooking.
The integrated control device MC determines that the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 satisfy the termination conditions (for example, the elapsed cooking time or the elapsed time after the food to be cooked reaches a predetermined heating temperature). Once determined, microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 are simultaneously shut down. Note that, in a strict sense, they are not simultaneous, but there may be a time difference between the two.

After both the microwave heat source 189 and the oven heat source 188 are shut down, the food to be cooked needs to be moved onto the top plate 15. For example, when heating with microwaves, if the food is placed in a heat-resistant glass tableware, it is now necessary to transfer the food to an object to be heated, such as a frying pan or a metal pot.

Therefore, a "transition period" TR is provided to provide a time grace, and the maximum time of this transition period is determined in advance by the integrated control device MC.

In this eighth embodiment as well, as described in the first embodiment, the central operation section 40M is provided with an input key 43KP. Therefore, when this input key 43KP is pressed, the integrated control device MC switches to the "function mode", the default value of the transition period TR is displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30, and then the transition period TR is , can be changed by the user. Note that the default value of the transition period TR is set to, for example, 5 minutes. Users can change this from 3 minutes to 15 minutes.

When the transition period TR is set to be long, if the temperature of the top plate 15 or the inverter circuit board 80 falls below a specified value (for example, 60° C.) during that period, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 may stop.

As shown in FIG. 79, if preparations are completed during the transition period TR, the user can start the subsequent "induction heating cooking" by operating the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M again.

As is clear from FIG. 79, when one control menu (in this case, cooperative cooking of three heating sources of "induction heating, microwave heating, and oven heating") is executed, the execution period of that control menu ends. is the later point in time until either the first cooling fan 60 or the second cooling fan 61 stops operating.

Next, FIG. 80 will be explained.
What is shown in FIG. 80 shows a modification of the control menu "cooperative cooking" described in FIG. 75 of the sixth embodiment. The control menu for "cooperative cooking" shown in FIG. 75 has been changed as follows.

As is clear from FIG. 80, when microwave heating cooking is started, oven heating cooking is also started at the same time. Note that "simultaneously" here does not mean in a strict sense that it is determined in seconds, and there may be a time difference of several seconds or tens of seconds.

Summary of Embodiment 8.
As is clear from the above description, the eighth embodiment discloses a heating cooker having the following configuration. That is,
A top plate 15 exposed to the top surface of the kitchen furniture 2 is provided on the top of the main body case HC,
Inside the main body case HC, there is a heating chamber 113 whose front opening 114A is openable and closed by a door 114, a microwave heating device 120 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and a top plate 115. An induction heating source 9 that heats an object placed above,
The interior of the main body case HC is divided into two spaces, an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B, by a metal partition wall 16S,
The upper space 300A accommodates IH coils 17L and 17R and an inverter circuit board 80 for the IH coils,
The lower space 300B accommodates the microwave heating device 120,
The upper space 300A includes a first cooling fan 60 and a second cooling fan that introduce outside air for cooling the inverter circuit board 80 from outside the lower space 300B,
The lower space 300B has lower cooling fans 128 and 129 that introduce outside air for cooling the microwave heating device 120,
The configuration is characterized in that the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are operated independently and independently of the heating operation by the induction heating device 120.

According to this configuration, in one cooking device, both microwave heating and induction heating can be performed, resulting in a highly convenient heating device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

The main body case HC further includes an oven heat source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113, and operates the lower cooling fan 128 to cool the lower space 300B during the heating operation of the oven heat source 188. However, the rear lower cooling fan 129 was configured not to operate.
Therefore, oven cooking is also possible, and since the cooling configuration of the lower unit 200 can be shared, a highly convenient composite heating cooker can be provided even for kitchen furniture where installation space is limited.

Furthermore, it further includes an IH control section 90 and a microwave heating control section 130 that controls the microwave oscillation section 122A of the microwave heating device 120,
During a period in which only the heating operation by the microwave heating device 120 is being performed, the microwave heating control unit 130 operates the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, and the IH control unit 90 operates the first cooling fan 128 and 129. The cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.

Therefore, the power consumption of the entire heating cooker 1 can be suppressed to a minimum, and the operation noise of the heating cooker can also be made quiet. Further, temperature increases in the filter circuit board 54 and the power supply circuit board 55 can also be suppressed.

Furthermore, if the main body case HC is installed inside the kitchen furniture 2 and the top plate 15 is exposed above the kitchen furniture 2, it can be provided as a highly convenient built-in heating cooker.

Note that in the microwave heating cooking of the eighth embodiment, instead of automatically stopping microwave heating upon detecting the temperature of the object to be cooked, the user may set the microwave heating time.
Similarly, in oven cooking, there are two cases: the heating operation is automatically stopped by detecting a rise in the temperature of the heating chamber 113 or the temperature of the food to be cooked, and the other is that the user sets the heating time. Also good.

In this Embodiment 8, the heating cooker of the fifth invention was disclosed in the following form. That is,
Inside the main body case HC, there is a heating chamber 113 whose front opening 113A is openable and closed by a door 114, a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and a microwave heating source 189 placed above the top plate 15. an induction heating source 9 for heating an object to be heated;
The interior of the main body case HC is divided into two spaces, an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B,
The upper space 300A includes the IH coils 17L and 17R of the induction heating source 9, an inverter circuit board 80 for the IH coils 17L and 17R, an IH control unit 90 that controls the induction heating source 9, and a filter circuit board. 54, and a power supply circuit board 55 that receives power from the filter circuit 54,
In the lower space 300B, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and a control device 105 (microwave heating control unit 130, heating a chamber control unit 159);
The inverter circuit board 80, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188 are supplied with power from the power circuit board 55,
It has an upper cooling fan (first cooling fan 60, second cooling fan 61) that introduces outside air for cooling for the inverter circuit board 80 and the power supply circuit board 55,
The lower space 300B has lower cooling fans (third cooling fan 128, fourth cooling fan 129) that introduce outside air for cooling the microwave heating source 189,
The inverter circuit board 80 is installed horizontally at the bottom of the upper space 300A, and a flat first air passage F1 is defined above the inverter circuit board 80,
The upper cooling fan (first cooling fan 60, second cooling fan 61) is located adjacent to the first cooling fan 60 having rotary blades that rotate around a vertical axis. a second cooling fan 61 having rotor blades rotating around a vertical axis;
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are arranged adjacent to the inlet side of the first air path F1,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated when heating any one of the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188, and This configuration is characterized by comprising an integrated control device MC that operates the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 when the microwave heating source 189 performs a heating operation.

According to this configuration, three types of heating, namely microwave heating, induction heating, and oven heating, can be carried out in one heating cooking device, and the heating cooking device is highly convenient and can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, the temperature rise inside the main body case HC of the heating cooker 1, particularly the temperature rise of the inverter circuit board 80, can be effectively suppressed by the cooling air.

Further, the upper space 300A has an upper part where outside air is introduced into the upper space 300A from a ventilation hole 64 communicating with the outside of the lower space 300B by a first cooling fan 60 and a second cooling fan 61 without passing through the lower space 300B. It has a wind path AH,
The lower space 300B has a lower air passage UH through which outside air is introduced by a third cooling fan 128 and a fourth cooling fan 129 from intake ports 152F and 152B at the lower part of the main body case HC,
The upper air passage AH and the lower air passage UH are configured to communicate with the outside through an exhaust port 20 provided at the upper part of the main body case HC without intersecting in the middle.

Therefore, it is possible to cool the inside of the upper unit 100 and to cool the lower unit 200 separately using separate cooling air channels, so it is a composite type that has a high cooling effect on the main body case HC. We can provide heating cookers.

Furthermore, in Embodiment 8,
The upper space 300A further includes an input operation section 40 that accepts user operations, and the input operation section 40 operates in combination with the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189. It has a menu selection section,
The integrated control device MC is
(1) The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 128 and 4 operating the cooling fan 129;
(2) During a period in which only the heating operation by the IH coils 17L and 17R is specified by the input operation unit 40 and one control menu (for example, boiling water) is executed, the first cooling fan 60 and the 2 cooling fans are operated, and the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not operated,
(3) When cooking using the oven heat source 188 alone, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan are operated, and the third cooling fan 128 is operated. However, the fourth cooling fan 129 does not operate.
The structure was characterized by this.

Therefore, the number of operating cooling fans can be minimized to reduce power consumption.

Furthermore, the first air passage F1 is formed in a tunnel shape by a cover 70 that continuously covers from above to both sides of the inverter circuit board 80,
Inside the first air passage F1, there are a pair of heat sinks 82F and 82B, which have heat dissipation fins 82FN facing each other with a gap GP2 in between, and heat generating electronic components (switching elements) of the inverter circuit board 80. 83).

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the temperature rise of the heat sinks 82F and 82B attached to the inverter circuit board 80, and prevent the heat-generating electronic components (switching elements 83) from malfunctioning due to overheating.

Further, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have flat air outlets 60A, 61A on the peripheral surfaces of flat fan cases 60C, 61C,
The air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 are located on a first horizontal plane HP1 with the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 as a reference. Ta.

Therefore, it is possible to realize a cooking device in which the upper case 16 can be made thinner and the inverter circuit board 80 is more effectively cooled.

As is clear from the above description, the same effects as in the first embodiment can be expected in the eighth embodiment with respect to the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

Embodiment 9.
FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of a built-in composite heating cooker to disclose Embodiment 9 of the present invention. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main parts of the cooking device of FIG. 81 viewed from another direction. Note that the same or corresponding parts as those described in Embodiments 1 to 8 are given the same reference numerals.

FIG. 81 will be explained.
Although only two IH coils 17 are depicted in FIG. 81, this heating cooker 1 is a three-burner induction heating cooker in which the IH coil 17M is arranged in the left and right center portions, as in the second embodiment. . Further, in FIG. 81, the cover 70 is removed, but the following will be described in detail assuming that the same cover 70 as in the first embodiment is used.

As described in the second embodiment (FIG. 52), 109A is an output terminal section provided at the left end of the inverter circuit board 80. 109B is an output terminal section provided at the left end of the inverter circuit board 80.
The output terminal section 109A is for the inverter circuit 81L. The output terminal section 109B is for the inverter circuit 81R.

Reference numeral 340 denotes a groove member disposed on the front side of the upper case 16 at a position directly below the input operation section 40. This groove member has a flat plate shape with banks (vertical walls) of several mm in height on both front and rear end edges, and is installed horizontally long. This horizontally long groove member is integrally formed entirely of a plastic material, but if it is formed entirely or partially of a non-magnetic material, it may be called a "magnetic shield cover."

Reference numeral 340A denotes two guide pieces protruding from the front and rear sides of the groove member 340.
350 is the high voltage electric wire 350 also explained in the second embodiment. In the case of the inverter circuit 81R, this high-voltage electric wire supplies high frequency power from the inverter circuit 82R to the IH coil 17R.

FIG. 81 shows that two high-voltage electric wires 350 pass over the groove member 340 from the output terminal section 109B on the front left end of the inverter circuit board 80 to the IH coil 17R on the right side. .
One of the two high-voltage electric wires 350 is connected to one end of the IH coil 17R, and the other one is connected to the other end of the IH coil 17R.
The guide piece 340A restricts the position of the two high-voltage electric wires 350 within the groove member 340 in such a way as to sandwich the two high-voltage electric wires 350 from both sides.

FIG. 81 also shows that one of the high-voltage electric wires 350 from the output terminal section 109C at the left end of the inverter circuit board 80M reaches the IH coil 17M.
Note that since the IH coil 17L on the left side is not illustrated, the high-voltage electric wire 350 extending from the output terminal portion 109C to the IH coil 17L is not illustrated.

Next, FIG. 82 will be explained.
164 is a ventilation hole (first intake port) 164 formed in the left side vertical wall 101L of the lower case 101. The ventilation hole 164 is composed of a large number of small hole groups to prevent foreign matter from entering.

152F and 152B are intake ports (second intake ports) formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. The intake ports 152F and 152B are formed of a large number of small hole groups to prevent foreign matter from entering.

Reference numeral 123 denotes a waveguide, which is disposed long in the left-right direction on the back side of the heating chamber 113. Furthermore, behind the waveguide 123, a housing case C154 for housing the power supply circuit board 127, on which circuit components for supplying power to the microwave heating control section 130 are mounted, is disposed long in the left-right direction.

124 is an antenna case installed between the waveguide 123 and the back surface of the heating chamber 113, and an antenna 125 (not shown) is placed inside this antenna case.
A motor 126 that rotates or rotates the antenna 125 during microwave heating is arranged behind the antenna case 124 and the waveguide 123.

Summary of Embodiment 9.
As is clear from the above description, in the ninth embodiment, a heating cooker to which the first invention is applied is disclosed in the following form. That is,
It has a flat main body 10 equipped with a top plate 15 on the top on which an object to be heated is placed,
Inside the main body 10, there are three IH coils 17L, 17M, and 17R that heat the object on the top plate 15, and two inverter circuit boards 80 and 80M arranged below these coils. a cover 70 that partitions a first air passage F1 above the inverter circuit board 80 below the IH coils 17L, 17M, and 17R; a first cooling fan 60 that introduces outside air for cooling from outside the main body 10; A second cooling fan 61;
The two inverter circuit boards 80 and 80M are a (first) inverter circuit board 80 on which inverter circuits 81L and 81R of the two IH coils 17L and 17R are mounted, and an inverter circuit 81M of the IH coil 17M is mounted. (second) inverter circuit board 80M,
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around a vertical axis, and are located on the same horizontal plane (first plane SP1) as the inverter circuit board 80. , facing the entrance of the first air passage F1,
The first air passage F1 is formed horizontally long inside the main body, and another circuit board (power supply circuit board 55) to be cooled is arranged on the exit side of the first air passage F1. He disclosed a heating cooker.

For this configuration, the thin and oblong main body 10 is used to direct cooling air from the right or left end to the opposite side in the first air passage F1 formed above the inverter circuit board 80. By forcing RF1 and RF2 to pass through, the upper part of the inverter circuit board 80 can be cooled.

Furthermore, the cooling air that has passed through the first air path F1 can also cool another circuit board (power supply circuit board 55) to be cooled, and it is also possible to prevent abnormalities and malfunctions of important power supply circuits.

In addition to the above, the ninth embodiment discloses the following characteristic features.
Characteristic configuration 1:
a first inverter circuit 81L having a first switching element;
a second inverter circuit 81R having a second switching element;
an inverter circuit board 80 on which the first inverter circuit and the second inverter circuit are mounted;
Two (first and second) cooling fans 60 and 61 that supply cooling air to the inverter circuit board 80,
A cover 70 is provided to cover the upper part of the inverter circuit board 80 and define a tunnel-shaped first air passage F1 extending in the left-right direction,
The two cooling fans 60 and 61 each have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around a vertical axis, and fan cases 60C and 61C surrounding the rotary blades,
The air outlets 60A and 61A formed on the peripheral surfaces of the fan cases 60C and 61C are separated from the inverter circuit board 80,
The two cooling fans 60 and 61 blow cooling air to the first air path F1 from one end (left end) of the inverter circuit board 80 to the opposite end (right end). This is a configuration that supplies

Due to this configuration, the inverter circuit board 80 is intensively cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 passing through the first air path F1.

Then, the power supply circuit board 55 and the filter circuit board 54 are cooled by the cooling air RF4 after passing through the first cooling air path F1.

Further, the high voltage electric wire 350 from the inverter circuit board 80 to the (right side) IH coil 17R is cooled by the cooling air RF2A branched from the second cooling fan 61 before the first cooling air path F1. A heating cooker having the following configuration has been disclosed.

Due to this configuration, the ambient temperature of the high-voltage wires of the inverter circuit board 80 can be kept low, and failures due to overheating can be prevented.
Furthermore, when the input operation section 40 is arranged directly above the groove member 340 that guides the high-voltage electric wire 350 from the inverter circuit board 80 to the (right side) IH coil 17R, the temperature of the input operation section 40 also increases. It is also possible to prevent overheating of various electronic components, display parts, etc. for input operations (including input using touch keys, etc.), and reliable operation can be expected over a long period of time.

Note that other parts having the same configuration as the first embodiment can be expected to have the same effects as those described in the first embodiment.

Embodiment 10.
FIG. 83 is a plan view of a heating cooker for disclosing Embodiment 10 of the present invention. 84 is a plan view, a front view, a right side view, and a rear view of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 83 with both the top plate and the IH coil removed. FIG. 85 is a plan view of the state shown in FIG. 84 with the cover further removed. FIG. 86 is a bottom (bottom) view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 83. FIG. 87 is a longitudinal sectional view taken along the line XX of the cooking device shown in FIG. 83. FIG. 88 is a vertical sectional view taken along the YY line of the cooking device shown in FIG. 83. FIG. 89 is a vertical sectional view taken along the ZZ line of the cooking device shown in FIG. 83. FIG. 90 shows a modification of the cooking device shown in FIG. 83, and is a plan view of the cooking device. 91 is a plan view, a front view, a right side view, and a rear view of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 90 with both the top plate and the IH coil removed. Note that the same or corresponding parts as those described in Embodiments 1 to 8 are given the same reference numerals.

The heating cooker disclosed as Embodiment 10 of the present invention is of a form called a "stationary type" or a "desktop type." This point is largely different from Embodiments 1 to 9.
The heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 83 is a "two-burner" heating cooker that can perform induction heating cooking at two places on the left and right on the top plate 15 having a rectangular planar shape.

221 is a decorative frame corresponding to the decorative frame 21 of the first embodiment. It is fixed to the upper surface of a frame-shaped reinforcing plate 22 (not shown) that supports the top plate 15 from below. This decorative frame projects to the rear of the upper case 16 and is longer than the width of the upper case 16. In other words, when viewed from above, the decorative frame 21 appears to surround the rear and left and right sides of the exhaust cover 19 in a continuous manner.

Reference numeral 25 denotes a metal decorative frame, which is installed to protect the left and right end faces and the front end face of the top plate 15 from external impacts.
30 is an integrated display section, and 31L is a left side display section. Further, 31R is a right side display section. These three display sections 30, 31L, and 31R are installed below the top plate 15.

FIG. 84 and FIG. 85 will be explained.
This heating cooker 1 does not have the lower unit 200 as described in the first to ninth embodiments. In other words, the main body case forming the outer shell of the heating cooker 1 is only the upper case 16.
The upper case 16 is formed by press-molding a thin metal plate.

The upper case 16 has a rectangular case shape with a bottom, and includes a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) constituting the bottom wall surface, and a front vertical wall 16F formed by continuously bending upward from the front end of the bottom wall surface. , a rear vertical wall 16B formed by continuously bending upward from the rear end of the bottom wall surface, a (right) side vertical wall 16R formed by continuously bending upward from the right end of the bottom wall surface 16S, and the bottom wall surface. The (left) side vertical wall 16L (not shown) is formed by continuously bending upward from the left end of the vertical wall 16L.

Inside the upper case 16, an IH coil installation space CK is defined by a partition plate 52 vertically rising from the upper surface of the bottom wall surface 16S. In this IH coil installation space CK, an IH coil 17L having a relatively large outer diameter and serving as a left side heating section, and an IH coil 17R serving as a right side heating section are installed horizontally.

A plurality of auxiliary exhaust holes 16BL and 16BR are formed in the rear vertical wall 16B to discharge cooling air from the IH coil installation space CK.
Reference numeral 89 denotes an insertion hole formed in the rear vertical wall 16B, through which the power cord 106 is pulled out, although it is not shown.

A total of four heat sinks 82F and 82B are installed inside the upper case 16. The inverter circuit board 80 on which the inverter circuit 81L (not shown) for the IH coil 17L and the inverter circuit 81R (not shown) for the IH coil 17R are mounted is placed horizontally as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85. It is a long rectangle.

On the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the heat sinks 82F and 82B are installed in a horizontally long manner.
In FIG. 84, 70 is a cover that covers above the heat sinks 82F and 82B.

Legs 226 are attached to four locations around the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 to support the heating cooker 1 when it is placed on top of kitchen furniture or the like.
54 is a filter circuit board installed in the IH coil installation space CK of the upper case 16 so as to be on the same plane as the inverter circuit board 80.
Reference numeral 14 denotes a partition wall extending in the front-rear direction on the left side of the filter circuit board 54, and its height is such that it approaches the lower (back) surface of the top plate 15 with a minute gap of several mm or less.
This partition wall is provided for the purpose of branching the cooling air RF4 that passes through the first air path F1 and proceeds backward to the left and right.

In FIGS. 84 and 85, 60 is a first cooling fan, and 61 is a second cooling fan. The configurations of these two cooling fans 60 and 61 and the positional relationship with the inverter circuit board 80 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

In FIG. 83, AL is the effective width of the top plate 15 in the front-rear direction. Note that the "effective width" refers to a dimension excluding the dimension of the outer periphery covered by the decorative frame 25 surrounding the top plate 15 and the like. This effective width AL is 413 mm.

This Embodiment 10 is an example in which the width Wmax of the top plate 15 is set to 600 mm. Note that in the wide type, the width Wmax is 750 (~748) mm.
In FIG. 83, the maximum width Lmax of the top plate 15 in the front-rear direction is 510 mm.

Next, FIG. 86 will be explained.
Reference numeral 264 indicates a ventilation hole corresponding to the ventilation hole 64 described in the first embodiment. However, unlike the ventilation holes 64 of Embodiment 1, they are a collection of small holes with a diameter of several mm or less. This hole is made small to prevent foreign matter from entering.
As is clear from FIGS. 86 and 87, the legs 226 are located away from the ventilation holes 264.
In FIG. 87, W4 is the maximum width dimension in the left-right direction of the upper unit 100, excluding the top plate 15, and is 544 mm.

FIG. 88 and FIG. 89 will be explained.
The partition plate 52 that partitions the IH coil installation space CK of the upper case 16 is formed with an exhaust window 52B and an exhaust window 52A (not shown), which are through holes.
The exhaust window 52A is formed on the left side of the partition wall 14, and the exhaust window 52B is formed on the right side.
GP1 is an internal space of the upper case 16, which is a gap separated from the IH coil installation space CK by the partition plate 52. As described in the first embodiment, this gap GP1 is used for exhausting various types of cooling air flowing into the upper case 16.

In FIGS. 86 and 89, D5 is the maximum width in the front-rear direction of the upper case 16 excluding the flange 16BX portion.

Next, the modification shown in FIGS. 90 and 91 will be described.
The heating cooker 1 disclosed as this modification is suitable for uses called "stationary type" or "desktop type".
As shown in FIG. 90, this heating cooker 1 does not have an exhaust opening on the rear upper surface of the upper case 16. Therefore, there is no need to provide the exhaust cover 19 that covers the upper part of the opening.

As shown in FIG. 91, a large number of auxiliary exhaust holes 16BL and 16BR are formed in the rear vertical wall 16B constituting the rear wall of the upper case 16. Therefore, the cooling air in the IH coil installation space CK of the upper case 16 is discharged to the rear of the upper case 16 from the auxiliary exhaust hole 16BL and the auxiliary exhaust hole 16BR. Note that, in reality, a power cord 106 (not shown) is pulled out from the insertion hole 89 to the outside, and a plug (not shown) at the end of the power cord is connected to a commercial power source for use.
Other configurations are the same as the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 82.

According to this modification, since there is no exhaust port or exhaust cover 19 (not shown) on the upper surface of the upper case 16 behind the top plate 15, the pot etc. placed on the top plate 15 overflows. There is also no concern that liquid may enter through the exhaust port. Furthermore, since the rear upper surface of the heating cooker 1 is a flat surface, the area of the top plate 15 can be increased. That is, the upper case 16 can be configured to be covered with one flat top plate 15 up to the vicinity of the rear end edge, and the design can be improved. Furthermore, since the area of the top plate 15 can be increased, there is an advantage that it can also be used as a temporary storage place for pots that are not in use.

Summary of Embodiment 10.
As is clear from the above description, in Embodiment 10, a heating cooker to which the first invention is applied is disclosed in the following form. That is,
It has a flat main body 10 equipped with a top plate 15 on the top on which an object to be heated is placed,
Inside the main body 10, there are two IH coils 17L and 17R for heating the object to be heated on the top plate 15, one inverter circuit board 80 disposed below the coils, and the IH coil 17L, 17R and above the inverter circuit board 80; a first cooling fan 60 and a second cooling fan 61 that introduce outside air for cooling from the outside of the main body 10; Equipped with
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have rotary blades 60F and 61F that rotate around a vertical axis, and are located on the same horizontal plane (first plane SP1) as the inverter circuit board 80. , facing the entrance of the first air passage F1,
The first air passage F1 is formed horizontally long inside the main body, and on the exit side thereof, another circuit board (power supply circuit board 55) to be cooled is arranged.

With this configuration, effects equivalent to those described in Embodiment 1 can be expected.
In addition, regarding the same configuration as the first embodiment, the same effects as those described in the first embodiment can be expected.

In addition, since the heating cooker 1 of this Embodiment 10 is suitable for a heating cooker called a "stationary type" or a "desktop type", there is no need for installation work inside the kitchen furniture 2. It is highly convenient because it can be used by users.

Embodiment 11.
FIG. 92 shows a built-in composite heating cooker according to Embodiment 11 of the present invention. FIG. 93 shows a modification of the configuration of FIG. 92. Note that parts that are the same as or corresponding to the configuration of the first embodiment described in FIGS. 1 to 46 are given the same reference numerals.

FIG. 92 shows only a portion of the rear part of the cooking device 1 in a vertical cross-sectional view, and also shows a schematic comparison of the heights of the cooling fan, cover 70, etc. The lower case 101 is also shown with a broken line for reference.
This Embodiment 11 differs from Embodiments 1 to 10 in that the configurations of the IH coil installation space CK formed inside the upper case 16 and the gap GP1 existing at the rear thereof have been changed.

In the eleventh embodiment, the inverter circuit board 80 and the filter circuit board 54 are installed at the same height with respect to the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16.

In FIG. 92, HP1 is the first horizontal plane. This first horizontal plane HP1 is at a height that matches the top surface of the inverter circuit board 80. It is also at the same height as the top surface of the filter circuit board 54.

H8 indicates the height dimension of the air outlets 60A and 61A, as explained in FIG. 24 of the first embodiment. In this Embodiment 11, the lower ends of the air outlets 60A and 61A are aligned with the first horizontal plane HP1. That is, the height of the two air outlets 60A and 61A from the first horizontal plane HP1 is either 16 mm or 18 mm.

In this Embodiment 11, as explained in FIG. 66 of Embodiment 3, the positions of the lower ends of the air outlets 60A and 61A are not located at a position lower than the first horizontal plane HP1 by the step GD1. 1 coincides with the horizontal plane HP1. Note that the position may be changed to a position lowered by the step GD1. To illustrate two such examples, two thick arrows labeled H8 are drawn.

HF1 indicates the height dimension of the heat sinks 82F and 82B. GP12 is the second gap, as described in FIG. 22 of the first embodiment. In other words, it shows the height of the cover 70 covering the inverter circuit board 80 above. In other words, it is the substantial height dimension of the first air passage F1. In this Embodiment 11, this GP12 is 20 mm. Note that GP12 is set to be larger than the height H8 of the air outlets 60A and 61A.

FIG. 92 is designed to visually compare the height dimension HF1 of the heat sinks 82F and 82B, the height dimension H8 of the air outlets 60A and 61A, etc., with respect to the first horizontal plane HP1, and the actual This does not mean that each component is located in the position shown in FIG. 92.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the eleventh embodiment, the partition plate 52 that partitions the back side of the IH coil installation space CK formed inside the upper case 16 is connected to the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. fixed on the top.

A series of vertical parts are formed at the rear end of the partition plate 52, and an exhaust window 52A is formed in the vertical part. The partition plate 52 is made of a thin metal plate or a plastic material.

52H are several drainage holes formed on the front FR side of the vertical portion of the partition plate 52.
16H1 is a drain hole formed directly below this drain hole 52H. This is formed on the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16.

A plurality of drainage holes 16H2 are also formed in the bottom surface (bottom wall surface 16S of the lower case 16) of the exhaust gap GP1 constituting the exhaust port 20.
Reference numeral 86 denotes a gutter located directly below the water drain hole 16H1 and the drain hole 16H2, and is inclined to become lower toward the rear BK side. The rear end of this gutter 86 extends to a position close to the lower case 101. Note that a drainage duct or hose that guides water from the gutter downward is not shown. Moreover, this gutter 94 is a component corresponding to the water receiving member 86 explained in FIG.

A filter circuit board 54 is installed horizontally on the front FR side of the water drain hole 16H1 of the upper case 16. The filter circuit board 54 has a flat plate shape, and a plurality of electrical components (for example, choke coils 56) constituting a filter circuit (not shown) are mounted on the upper surface.

The filter circuit board 54 is placed and fixed on a support plate 94 made of an electrically insulating material. Since the support plate 94 has a frame-like planar shape, it supports only the outer peripheral edge of the filter circuit board 54. The support plate 94 is fixed to the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16.

The support plate 94 allows the filter circuit board 54 to be installed with a gap of several millimeters between the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 and the filter circuit board 54 and the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. It has a structure that increases the electrical insulation properties of the

HP1 is the first horizontal plane. The height (position) of this first horizontal plane matches the top surface of the inverter circuit board 80 (not shown). Furthermore, it is a (virtual) surface that also exists at a height that coincides with the top surface of the filter circuit board 54.

HP2 is the second horizontal plane. This second horizontal plane is located above the first horizontal plane HP1. In this Embodiment 11, this second horizontal plane HP2 is at a position that coincides with the lower surface of the IH coil 17.

As indicated by the symbol HH1 in FIG. 92, the exhaust window 52A of the partition plate 52 is formed to extend above the second horizontal plane HP2. Moreover, it is formed above the uppermost end of the partition wall 14.

In FIG. 92, a water receiving member 86 having the shape adopted in the first embodiment is not installed, but a gutter 86 is installed. Further, the exhaust cover 19, which has a large number of ventilation holes to ensure ventilation, is structured so that the user cannot easily remove it from the upper case 16. However, the structure is such that it can be removed by a specialist such as a maintenance inspection company.

Next, FIG. 93 will be explained.
This FIG. 93 shows only a portion of the same part as FIG. 92 in a vertical cross-sectional view, and also shows a schematic comparison of the heights of the cooling fan, cover 70, etc. The lower case 101 is also shown with a broken line for reference.

This FIG. 93 also differs from Embodiments 1 to 10 in that the configurations of the IH coil installation space CK formed inside the upper case 16 and the gap GP1 existing at the rear thereof have been changed.

The partition plate 52 has a stepped portion 52D in the middle portion, and several drainage holes 52HH are formed in the stepped portion (horizontal portion) on the front FR side of the vertical portion.
This drain hole 52HH is for draining water downward if it should drop from the exhaust window 52B. The other configurations are the same as those in FIG. 92, so the explanation will be omitted.

Summary of Embodiment 11.
As is clear from the above description, the heating cooker of the eleventh embodiment has basically the same configuration as the first embodiment, and the same effects as those described in the first embodiment can be obtained.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the positions (ranges) of the first cooling fan air outlet 60A and the second cooling fan air outlet 61A are slightly lower than the position of the second gap GP12. be.
Therefore, the cooling air RF1 and RF2 blown out from the air outlets 60A and 61A in a substantially horizontal straight line are directed toward the inverter circuit board 80, but the substantial height dimension (GP12) of the first air passage F1 is , is larger than the height H8 (16 mm or 18 mm), so it is efficiently pushed into the first air passage F1.
Therefore, the heat sinks 82F and 82B are efficiently cooled in the first air path F1.

The cooling air RF1 and RF2 that have passed through the first air path F1 receive heat from the heat sinks 82F and 82B, and their temperature increases. Therefore, the cooling air RF1 and RF2 start rising by themselves from the time they pass through the first air path F1.

As mentioned above, assuming that the cooling air RF1 and RF2 advance while rising, the partition plate 52 that partitions the back side of the IH coil installation space CK is designed to protect the lower surface of the IH coil 17 (17L, 17R, etc.). A series of exhaust windows 52B are formed above and below the position (second horizontal plane HP2).

For the above reasons, the cooling air RF4 discharged from the first air path F1 can be efficiently discharged from the IH coil installation space CK to the exhaust port 20 side. This can be expected to improve the cooling effect of the inverter circuit board 80, IH coil 17, coil base 17C, etc.

Note that the shape of the exhaust window 52B is not limited to a vertically long hole when viewed from the front FR side, but may be formed as a large square or rectangular hole.
Furthermore, even if liquid such as water drops accidentally from above the exhaust cover 19, it is discharged to the lower case 101 side through the plurality of drainage holes 16H2. Furthermore, even if a portion of such liquid enters the front side of the exhaust window 52B, it can be discharged to the gutter 86 side through the drainage holes 52H, 16H1, and 16H2 formed at the bottom of the partition plate 52.

These can be expected to avoid the risk of damaging the electrical insulation of the filter circuit board 54 to which electricity is supplied.
Note that the drainage hole 52H formed at the bottom of the partition plate 52 and the drainage hole 52HH formed in the middle are both small-diameter holes (several mm or less in diameter), so they actively guide the cooling air RF4. Therefore, there is no adverse effect on the exhaust air from the exhaust window 52B as described above.

Other embodiments.
In the first embodiment, there are two paths: an internal path passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122, and an external path passing through the outside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121. However, you can replace this route and change it as shown below.
(1) Internal route: A route in which the inverter circuit board 121 is cooled by outside air sucked in by the third cooling fan 128 from the second air intake port 152F, and the cooling air is introduced into the heating chamber 113 and reaches the exhaust duct 102.
(2) External route: The heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 is cooled by the outside air sucked in from the second intake port 152B by the fourth cooling fan 129, and the cooling air is guided to the outside of the heating chamber 113, and the final A route leading to the exhaust duct 102.

Generally, the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 has a structure in which a plurality of heat dissipation plates (radiation fins) are stacked, and cooling air passes through the narrow spaces between the heat dissipation plates to exchange heat (radiate heat). Therefore, the pressure loss of cooling air is large. In other words, the wind path resistance is large.
Therefore, an improvement is made in which the cooling air passing through the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 is exhausted without entering the heating chamber 113 (by shortening the length of the air path) to balance the internal and external paths. It is. This is effective when the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 have the same performance. In other words, as explained in the first embodiment, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are provided with exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same rating specifications, thereby reducing the procurement cost during manufacturing. This is one promising idea.

Furthermore, after cooling the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122, the internal path for the cooling air RF6 that passes through the inside of the heating chamber 113 is eliminated, and the inverter circuit board 121 is cooled as described in the fifth embodiment. The remaining cooling air RF7 may be discharged in its entirety to the outside of the cooking device 1 via the duct 307, thereby simplifying the cooling air path inside the lower unit 200. By reducing the air path resistance, the rated air blowing capacity of the fourth cooling fan 129 can be changed to a lower level. This has advantages such as being advantageous in terms of cost.

In the case of a user who does not need both the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 at the same time as shown in Embodiments 1 to 9, the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 may be sold or installed on the kitchen furniture 2. Work will be separate. The lower unit 200 is set as an optional item, for example. In such a case, for example, if a packaging form for selling the upper unit 100 and lower unit 200 as a set and a packaging form for selling only the upper unit 100 are set separately, the convenience at the time of sale will be impaired. Never.

In implementing the present invention, it is not essential that the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 be configured in separate housings as shown in Embodiments 1 to 8. Therefore, the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 may be constructed from one casing (main body case HC) from the beginning.

In Embodiments 1 to 10, the food or other food to be cooked stored inside the heating chamber 113 is heated by two types of heating sources, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. Additional heating sources may also be used. For example, a boiler (steam generating means) may be installed outside the heating chamber 113 and cooking may be performed by supplying superheated steam. A heating cooker that performs cooking by supplying such superheated steam has been proposed in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-232270 and Japanese Patent No. 3856788.

In Embodiments 1 to 10, the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 were formed of thin metal plates. However, either or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be made of plastic material. For example, it may be made of thermoplastic material. One example material is PET or PA, PP or ABS. "PET" refers to polyethylene terephthalate. Moreover, "PA" means polyamide, and "PP" means polypropylene. It may be determined by considering the heat resistance temperature, durability as a structure, etc. Alternatively, only a portion of the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 may be formed of plastic, and the remaining portion may be formed of a metal plate.

The induction heating circuit may employ various driving methods such as a half-bridge circuit and a full-bridge circuit depending on the form and number of IH coils 17L and 17R. For example, full bridge circuits have been proposed in Japanese Patent No. 6130411 and Japanese Patent No. 6173623.
In addition, IH coils are not only shaped like donuts, but also have an annular main heating coil and a structure disposed close to both sides of the main heating coil, as shown in Japanese Patent No. 5538546, for example. The induction heating section may include a flat first sub-heating coil and a second sub-heating coil having a width smaller than the radius of the main heating coil.

Furthermore, in Embodiment 1, when starting induction heating, the induction heating operation is started under default conditions (heating power value and heating power level) without setting the heating power, and then the heating is started in which the user decides the desired heating power. The method of operation was adopted. However, methods other than this may also be used. For example, after turning on the main power, it is necessary to determine the desired induction heating source, the thermal power value (watts), and the thermal power level (one of the levels such as "large" to "small" thermal power) and issue a start command. A certain operating method may be adopted, and such method does not affect the essential effects of the present invention.

In the first embodiment, during the period when only oven cooking is being performed, both the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 of the upper unit 100 are operated, and the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated. However, this fourth cooling fan 129 may be operated. When operated in this manner, outside air is continuously introduced into the internal spaces of the lower unit 200 and the upper unit 100, and there is an advantage that the temperature of the entire heating cooker can be kept low.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the lower air passage during microwave heating is the air passage (internal passage) of cooling air that cools the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122, and the air passage that cools the inverter circuit board 121. There are two air paths (external paths) for cooling air, and these two air paths are finally gathered into one exhaust duct 102, and then passed through a common exhaust port 20 to heat the air. It was released to the outside of the cooking device 1.

However, the air does not necessarily need to go through one (common) exhaust duct, nor does it need to gather at one exhaust port 20. For example, a second exhaust port different from the exhaust port 20 is provided at a different position (a position directly below the exhaust cover 19), and cooling air from either the internal route or the external route is supplied from the second exhaust port. It is also possible to exhaust the air. Particularly in the embodiment in which the rear part of the upper unit 100 is partitioned into front and rear parts by the partition plate 52 (Embodiment 1), it is preferable that the exhaust port faces into the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52.

As described in Embodiment 1, for example, when microwave cooking is started immediately after one induction heating cooking is completed, if the temperature of the top plate 15 is still high (in an extraordinary situation), The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may be operated simultaneously during microwave cooking. Even such a form meets the basic purpose and gist of the present invention.

In the first to tenth embodiments, the operation button or operation key 98 of the main power switch 97 is arranged on the input operation section 40 exposed on the upper surface of the main body case HC, and is operated from above the main body case HC. Met.

However, the present invention is not limited to this form of the input operation section 40 at all. For example, the input operation unit 40 does not need to be always exposed when viewed from above the main body case HC, and may be stored inside the main body case HC when not in use. Two types of storage methods have been known: one that moves horizontally like a drawer, and the other that rotates around a single fulcrum.

The method of rotating and retracting is called the operation part of the kangaroo pocket mechanism, and is proposed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-28569, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-3845, or Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 3-233226. has been done. Further, the main power switch 97 may be a seesaw type switch as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-3845.

Even when the input operation section 40 is rotated and stored, it can be operated from above (direction) of the main body case HC when in use. That is, since the user can turn on the main power of the cooking device 1 while standing near the front of the cooking device 1, there is no problem in implementing the present invention. In addition, it does not force the user into an unreasonable posture and is easy to operate.
The input operation section 40, which can be rotated and stored as described above, may be provided, for example, on the right front cover 112 described in the first embodiment.

In Embodiments 1 to 9, an example is described in which a magnetron is used as the microwave generation source 122, but microwaves may be generated by other means. For example, heating cookers using semiconductor oscillators have been proposed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-509587, Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 51-9562, and the like.

In Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-509587, a microwave generator includes: a small signal generator (one or more) configured to generate a high frequency signal at a first power level; A solid-state high-frequency signal amplifier (one or more solid-state amplifiers) that amplifies the high-frequency signal of. The solid-state amplifier amplifies the first high frequency signal having the first low power level into a second high frequency signal having the second high power level and supplies the signal to the heating chamber containing the food to be cooked. was.
When implementing the present invention, a microwave generation source configured with such a semiconductor element may be used.

As explained in FIG. 30 of Embodiment 1, all cooling fans are tested for a short time at the stage of checking for abnormalities at startup (see step ST2 in FIG. 30) before selecting the heating source to be used. However, a method may be adopted in which the integrated control unit MC checks whether abnormal current or voltage is generated on the circuit. In that case, each cooling fan 60, 61, 128 and 129 may be activated all at once, or may be activated one after another for a short period of time. Even if this is done, the essential effects of the present invention will not be impaired in any way.

Among the processes described in the embodiments, all or part of the processes described as being performed automatically can also be performed manually. Furthermore, all or part of the processes described as being performed manually can also be performed automatically using known methods.

In the first embodiment, there are two induction heating sections 17H, a left heating section 17HL and a right heating section 17HR, and one inverter circuit 81L and one inverter circuit 81R are arranged corresponding to these two heating sections. However, this may be changed to the following form.
(1) When heating a large object that straddles two adjacent heating parts, a method in which the IH coils of the two adjacent heating parts are driven in coordination (as a typical example, the Japanese patent (See No. 5188215).

(2) Below the top plate 15, four IH coils having substantially the same shape and size are wound in the same direction and are disposed below the top plate in substantially the same plane and close to each other; two inverter circuits that supply power to the IH coils, the four IH coils are divided into two coil groups, and the two inverter circuits supply power to each of the two IH coil groups. A method of supplying power to each (see Japanese Patent No. 5299590 as a typical example).

(3) A circular IH coil (center IH coil) arranged below the top plate 15 and (a plurality of) auxiliary IH coils arranged so as to surround the circular IH coil. and a first inverter circuit that supplies power to the central IH coil, and a second inverter circuit that supplies power to the auxiliary coil group (as a representative, see Japanese Patent No. 5257542). .

(4) a main IH coil that heats an object placed on the top plate; and a sub-IH coil group consisting of a plurality of sub-IH coils installed adjacent to each other on the outside of the main IH coil; a main inverter circuit that supplies a high-frequency current to the main IH coil; a sub-inverter circuit group that independently supplies a high-frequency current to each of the sub-IH coils; the main IH coil and the plurality of sub-IH coils; a heated object placement determination unit that determines whether the same heated object is placed on at least one of the sub-IH coils of the auxiliary IH coil, and controls outputs of the main inverter circuit and the sub-inverter circuit group; A plurality of sub IH coils are provided at a predetermined distance from each other with a predetermined insulating space around the main IH coil, and the outer diameter shape of the sub IH coil is: A side edge adjacent to the outer circumferential edge of the main IH coil has a curved shape along the outer circumferential edge of the main IH coil, and the energization control circuit controls the main IH coil so that the heating power value is set by the user. The output of the inverter circuit and the output of the sub-inverter circuit group are controlled in a predetermined distribution to perform a cooperative heating operation, and then the number of sub-IH coils that perform a cooperative heating operation increases, decreases, or is applied to other sub-IH coils. A system that maintains the output distribution before the change when the change occurs (for a representative example, see Japanese Patent No. 5,642,168).

Furthermore, each circuit, component, and component of the device shown in the drawings is functionally conceptual, and does not necessarily have to be physically configured as shown in the drawings. Furthermore, in particular, the integrated control device MC, the microwave heating control section 130, the heating chamber control section 159, and the display section drive circuit 63 explained with reference to FIG. The form is not limited to that shown in the drawings, and all or part of it can be functionally or physically distributed or integrated into arbitrary units depending on the functions, operating conditions, etc.

For example, some of the data and programs in the storage device MM and the storage device 90R shown in FIG. 25 may not be held in the cooking device 1 but may be held in an external recording medium (such as a storage server). In this case, the heating cooker 1 acquires necessary data and program information by accessing an external recording medium (storage server).

Furthermore, the operation programs of the integrated control device MC, the microwave heating control section 130, the heating chamber control section 159, and the display section drive circuit 63 explained in particular with reference to FIG. If desired, it may be possible to update to an improved version as appropriate. In this case, for example, the modification program may be obtained through the wireless communication unit 49.

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The substantial scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

The heating cooker and kitchen furniture according to the present invention can be widely used not only in kitchens of ordinary homes but also in cooking areas of public facilities, stores, and the like.

1 Cooking device 2 Kitchen furniture 2A Installation opening 2B Front opening 2G Stepped portion 2P Upper surface of mouth edge 2S Right side 3 Surface material 4 Surface material 5 Surface material 6 Surface material 7 Frame line 8 Wall 9 Induction heating source 10 Main body of upper unit 11 Partition member (partition wall)
12 Partition plate 13 Partition plate 14 Partition wall 15 Top plate 16 Upper case (upper housing)
16A Flange 16B Rear vertical wall 16BL Auxiliary exhaust hole 16BR Auxiliary exhaust hole 16BX Horizontal bent portion 16F Front vertical wall 16L Side vertical wall 16R Side vertical wall 16S Bottom wall (bottom wall surface)
17C Coil base (coil support frame)
17CH Arm 17CL Coil wire 17H Induction heating section 17HL Left heating section 17HM Center heating section 17HR Right heating section 17L IH coil (induction heating coil)
17M IH coil (induction heating coil)
17R IH coil (induction heating coil)
18 Opening 19 Exhaust cover 20 Exhaust port 21 Decorative frame 22 Reinforcement plate 23 Right side input control device 24 Left side input control device 25 Decorative frame 26 Cushioning material 27 Light emitting display section 27L Light emitting display section 27M Light emitting display section 27R Light emitting display section 27L1 to 27L4 Individual Light emitting section 27M1 to 27M6 Individual light emitting section 27R1 to 27R5 Individual light emitting section 28 Power switch control device 29 Support plate 30 Integrated display section (center display section)
30A Display text 30AD Additional screen 30B Display text 30C Two-dimensional information 30D Display screen 30E Caution display 30F Explanation text 30G Caution text 30H Recommended text 30J Specific text 30K Heating source display section 30L 1st area 30M 2nd area 30MY Microwave heating time information 30N Common information during standby 30GY Heating time information for grill cooking 30P Guide information 30Q Text information (additional information)
30R 3rd area 30S Heating time information 30T Target temperature information 30V Information indicating output level 30W Display window 30X Output value (watt value) information 30Y Candidate display section
31L Left side display section 31LW Display window 31R Right side display section 31RW Display window 32 Central operation board 33 Rectifier circuit 34 Power supply circuit A
35 Rectifier circuit 36 Power supply circuit B
37L Drive circuit 37R Drive circuit 38 Exhaust window 39A Signal line 39B Signal line 40 Input operation section 40L Left operation section 40M Center operation section 40R Right operation section 41 Operation board
41L Left touch key board 41R Right touch key board 42 Input key 43L1~43L4 Input key 43M1 Input key 43M2 Input key 43M3 Input key 43KP Input key 43L1~43L4 Input key 43M1~43R3 Input key 43MC Input key 43MS Input key 43MT Input key 43 R1 ~43R4 Input key 44L Input key 44R Input key 45L Input key 45M Input key 45R Input key 46L Window 46R Window 47 Input key 48 Infrared transmitter 49 Wireless communication unit (wireless communication module)
50 Holder 51 Screw 51F Screw 52 Partition plate 52A Exhaust window 52B Exhaust window 53L Exhaust port plate 53R Exhaust port plate 54 Filter circuit board 55 Power supply circuit board 56 Choke coil 57 Transformer 58 Capacitor 59 Diode bridge circuit (diode module)
60 First cooling fan (upper cooling fan)
60A Air outlet 60C Fan case 60F Rotating blade 60FL Cooling air 60H Inlet 60M Motor 60P Drive circuit 60T Rotating shaft 61 Second cooling fan 61A Air outlet 61C Fan case 61F Rotating blade

61M Motor 61P Drive Circuit 62 Cooling Fan Drive Circuit 63 Display Drive Circuit 64 Ventilation Hole
64S Auxiliary ventilation hole 65 Right exhaust port 66 Magnetic shield ring 67L Fire power display 67H Heat retention display 67R Fire power display 68 Heating source display 68L Display 68M Display 68R Display 69 High temperature alarm 70 Cover 70A Front cutout 70B Drooping Wall 70E Extension 71 Support plate 72 Power control section (demand control section)
73 Signal transmission unit 74 Drive circuit 75 DC power supply circuit 75M DC power supply circuit 76 Resonance capacitor 76m Resonance capacitor 77a Input current detection unit 77am Input current detection unit 77b Output current detection unit 77bm Output current detection unit 78a Diode bridge 78am Diode bridge 78b Reactor 78bm Reactor 78c Smoothing capacitor 78cm Smoothing capacitor 79a IGBT
79am IGBT
79b IGBT
79bm IGBT
79c Diode 79cm Diode 79d Diode 79dm Diode 80 Inverter circuit board 80F First inverter circuit board 80M Second inverter circuit board 81 Inverter circuit 81L Inverter circuit (first inverter circuit)
81M inverter circuit (third inverter circuit)
81R inverter circuit (second inverter circuit)
82 Heat sink 82B Heat sink (second heat sink)
82B1 heat sink (first heat sink at the back)
82B2 heat sink (second heat sink at the back)
82F heat sink (first heat sink)
82F1 heat sink (front first heat sink)
82F2 heat sink (front second heat sink)
82FN Heat sink 82M Heat sink 82MF Heat sink 82MF1 Heat sink 82MF2 Heat sink 83 Power control switching element 84 Vibration sensing device 85 Electrical components 86 Water receiving member 87 Outer case 87A Ventilation hole 87B Drain hole 88 Inner case 88A Ventilation hole 88B Hole 89 Insertion Hole 90 IH control unit 90M1 Microcomputer 90M2 Microcomputer 90R Storage device 91 Power supply circuit 92 DC power conversion unit 93 Temperature detection circuit


95 Speech synthesis device 95S Speaker 96 Clock circuit 97 Main power switch 98 Main power switch operation button or operation key 99 Commercial power supply (commercial AC power supply)
100 Upper unit 101 Lower case (lower housing)
101A Flange 101B Rear wall surface (rear vertical wall)
101C Inclined part 101F Front plate 101H Body part 101U Bottom plate 101L Side vertical wall 101R Side vertical wall 101T Front horizontal wall 102 Exhaust duct 102A Internal passage 102B Internal passage 102E End part 104 Cavity 105 Control device 106 Power cord 106A Plug 108A connection port (Connecting terminal)
108B connection port (connection terminal)
109A Output terminal section 109B Output terminal section 109C Output terminal section 110 Main body 111 Inclined section 112 Front cover 112P Mounting leg 113 Heating chamber 113A Opening 113B Rear wall (rear wall surface)
113T recess 114 door 115 handle 117 through hole (guide hole)
118 Connecting member (reinforcing member)
119A Electric wire 119B Electric wire 120 Microwave heating device 120P Power supply circuit section 121 Inverter circuit board 121A Inverter circuit (drive circuit)
122 Magnetron (microwave source)
122A Oscillator section 122H Heat dissipation section 123 Waveguide 124 Antenna case 125 Antenna 126 Antenna drive motor 126A Rotation shaft 127 Power supply circuit board 128 Third cooling fan (lower cooling fan) (Cooling fan A)
129 4th cooling fan (lower cooling fan) (cooling fan B)
130 Microwave heating control section 131 Door opening/closing detection mechanism 132A Latch switch 132B Door switch 133 Monitor switch 134 Pin 135 Pin 136A Interlocking rod 136B Interlocking rod 137 Support plate 138A Communication port 138B Communication port 139 Closure detection section 140 Oven heating device 141 Space ( ceiling space)
142 Space (side space)
145 saucer 150 case A
151 Case B
152B Intake port (second intake port)
152F intake port (second intake port)
152S1 Auxiliary intake port 152S2 Auxiliary intake port 153 Duct 154 Case C
154A Lid 154B Main body 158 Non-contact temperature measurement section (infrared temperature measurement section)
159 Heating chamber control unit 160 Temperature sensor 161 Detection window 162 Cooking plate 163 Heater 163A Upper heater 163B Lower heater 164 Ventilation hole (first intake port)
165 Recess (intake duct)
166L Left side partition plate 166R Right side partition plate 167 Upper heat shield plate 168 Lower heat shield plate 169 Upper case 170 Lower case 171 Partition plate 172 Passage 173 Communication port 174 Communication port 176 Hinge 178A Relay 178B Relay 180 Power supply port 181 Cover 182 relay 184 sticker Material 185 Radio wave seal chamber 186 Screw 188 Oven heating source (heating chamber heating source)
189 Microwave heating source 190 Frame 191 Cover 192 Inner frame 192W Peep window (opening)
193 Inner seal frame 194 Choke chamber 195 Seal plate 196 Seal plate 197 Upper shielding plate 199 Wind direction plate 200 Lower unit 201 Inlet 226 Leg 264 Ventilation hole 300A Upper space 300B Lower space 301R Right side gap (third gap)
301L Left side gap (third gap)
302 Front gap (third gap)
303 Gap 304 Support fitting 304V Vertical part 304H Horizontal part (flange part)
305 Ventilation hole 306 Communication window 307 Exhaust duct 308 Vertical part 309 Communication window 310 Spacer (cushion material)
311 Lower void (third void)
320 Exhaust port 326 Cushion material 340 Groove member 350 High voltage electric wire AH Upper air passage AL Top plate exposure range BL Straight line (reference line)
BH Depth dimension BT1 Dedicated power supply (built-in battery)
CK IH coil installation space D5 Maximum dimension of upper case in front and rear direction D6 Maximum width dimension in front and rear direction D7 Opposing distance DP1 Depth (dimension)
F1 First air path F2 Second air path FG User's fingertip FI Inlet FL1 Blowout line FL2 Blowout line FO Outlet GD1 Step GP1 Gap GP2 Gap (first gap)
GP5L void GP5R void GP6 void GP7 void GP8 void GP9 void GP10 void GP11 void GP12 void (second void)
GP13 Distance between top plate and cover GP14 Gap between first cooling fan GP16 Space GP17 Gap GP18 Gap HC Main body case H1 Maximum height H2 Height H3 Height H4 Height H5 Height H6 Height Dimensions H7 Height dimension H8 Height dimension HB Reference bottom surface HP1 First horizontal plane HP2 Second horizontal plane HV Effective height dimension HX Maximum height dimension IP1 Touch information (input operation information)
IP2 Input information IP3 Selected value signal IP4 Selected value signal IP5 Image signal LA Projection dimension LD1 Distance LD2 Distance LF Exhaust port dimension MC Integrated control device MM Storage device N Object to be heated RF1 Cooling air RF2 Cooling air RF3 Cooling air RF4 Cooling air RF4L Cooling Wind RF4R Cooling air RF5 Cooling air RF6 Cooling air TR Transition period UH Lower air passage W1 Width dimension of installation opening W2 Maximum width dimension of installation space W3 Maximum width dimension of heating cooker W4 Maximum horizontal dimension W5 Horizontal maximum dimension of upper case Large dimensions W6 Length of the inverter circuit board 80 W7 Width of the inverter circuit board 80 W8 Maximum (width) dimension in the left and right direction inside the upper case W9 Opposing distance between the hanging walls 70B (dimension of the space in the front and back direction)
W10 Distance W11 Diameter W12 Distance W13 Distance W14 Installation interval WB Depth dimension WH Inner width dimension (frontage dimension)
XB Intersection XF Intersection XG Intersection.

Claims (57)

It has a flat case with a top plate on the top on which the object to be heated is placed.
Inside the case, there are two or more IH coils that heat the object to be heated, one inverter circuit board disposed below the coils, and an inverter circuit board disposed below the IH coils and above the inverter circuit board. a cover that partitions one air passage; a first cooling fan and a second cooling fan that introduce outside air for cooling from outside the case;
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan each have a rotor blade that rotates around a vertical axis, and each of the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan has rotary blades that rotate around a vertical axis, and the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan have rotary blades that rotate around a vertical axis, and the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan have rotary blades that rotate around a vertical axis, and the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan have rotary blades that rotate about vertical axes, and the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan have rotary blades that rotate about vertical axes, and the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan have rotary blades that rotate around a vertical axis, and the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan have rotary blades that rotate around a vertical axis. Facing the entrance of the wind route,
The first air path is formed laterally long inside the case,
An induction heating cooking device characterized in that another circuit board to be cooled is disposed downstream of the outlet of the first air path. The induction heating cooker according to claim 1, wherein the air outlets of the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan supply cooling air to the inlet from different directions. Inside the first air path, a pair of heat sinks each having a switching element mounted on the inverter circuit board are installed with their radiation fins facing each other with a first gap in between. The induction heating cooker according to claim 2, characterized in that: 4. The induction heating cooker according to claim 3, wherein a partition wall is installed inside the first gap to divide the first air path into two front and rear air paths. The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are installed in an overlapping manner so that the fan case is close to or in close contact with the bottom wall surface of the case,
The induction heating cooker according to claim 2, wherein the air outlet has a rectangular vertical cross-sectional shape with a horizontal dimension larger than a height dimension. The induction heating cooker according to claim 5, wherein the position of the lower end surface of the air outlet is below the first horizontal plane. The IH coils are a left IH coil and a right IH coil installed in two places separated from each other on the left and right above the cover,
The center point of the right IH coil is located to the right of the outlet of the first air path,
The induction heating cooker according to claim 2, wherein the right IH coil is cooled by the cooling air coming out of the outlet of the first air path. It has a horizontally long and flat case with a top plate on the top on which the heated object is placed.
Inside the case, a plurality of IH coils arranged at a plurality of locations below the top plate, two inverter circuits that supply high frequency power to each of the IH coils, and the plurality of inverter circuits are mounted. an inverter circuit board, a cover installed between the IH coil and the inverter circuit board and defining a first air path between them, and two covers that introduce outside air for cooling from outside the case. Equipped with a cooling fan,
The inverter circuit board has a horizontally long rectangular planar shape,
The two cooling fans are a first cooling fan having rotary blades and a second cooling fan having rotary blades,
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are installed near the left side wall or the right side wall of the case, and draw outside air for cooling through a ventilation hole formed at the bottom of the case by rotation of the rotary blades. Each will be introduced,
The first air passage in which the first cooling air from the first cooling fan and the second cooling air from the second cooling fan are combined and introduced is arranged above the inverter circuit board in the left-right direction. It extends in a straight line,
The induction heating cooking device is characterized in that the first cooling air and the second cooling air that have passed through the first air path are discharged to the outside through an exhaust window formed at the rear of the case. The rotary blade of the first cooling fan is a rotary blade for a centrifugal blower that rotates around a vertical axis,
The rotary blade of the second cooling fan is a rotary blade for a centrifugal blower that rotates around a vertical axis,
The induction heating cooker according to claim 8, wherein the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are installed with an interval in the front-rear direction. The inverter circuit board has a first heat sink equipped with one switching element for the inverter circuit, and a second heat sink equipped with another switching element for the inverter circuit,
The induction heating according to claim 8 or 9, wherein the first heat sink and the second heat sink are arranged such that their respective radiation fin portions face each other with a first gap in between. Cooking device. The air outlet of the first cooling fan is separated from the first heat sink and the second heat sink,
The air outlet of the second cooling fan is separated from the first heat sink and the second heat sink,
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan supply the first cooling air and the second cooling air to the first air gap from opposite directions with a straight line crossing the first air gap in between. 11. The induction heating cooker according to claim 10, wherein the induction heating cooker is configured to supply the ingredients to each of the following. The air outlet of the first cooling fan and the air outlet of the second cooling fan are arranged side by side on a first horizontal plane at a height that matches the top surface of the inverter circuit board,
The induction heating cooker according to claim 11, wherein one switching element for the inverter circuit and another switching element for the inverter circuit are located above the first horizontal plane. The IH coil is arranged further above a second horizontal plane that is above the first horizontal plane,
The induction heating cooker according to claim 12, wherein the ceiling surface of the cover is located below the second horizontal surface. The lower end surface of the exhaust window is above the first horizontal plane,
The induction heating cooker according to claim 13, wherein the upper end surface of the exhaust window is located above the second horizontal plane. The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan each have a circular suction port on a lower surface,
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are arranged at the same height on the bottom wall surface of the case,
A vent hole having a diameter larger than the diameter of the suction port is formed in the bottom wall surface of the case, corresponding to the suction port of the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan. The induction heating cooker according to any one of items 8 to 13. The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan each have a circular suction port on a lower surface,
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are arranged at the same height on the bottom wall surface of the case,
The inverter circuit board is arranged at a higher position on the bottom wall surface of the case than lower end surfaces of the suction ports of the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan. The induction heating cooker according to any one of items 8 to 11. A microcomputer for driving the inverter circuit is mounted on the inverter circuit board,
The microcomputer is located upstream of the first cooling air or the second cooling air compared to one switching element for the inverter circuit and one other switching element for the inverter circuit. The induction heating cooker according to any one of claims 10 to 12, characterized in that the induction heating cooker is placed at a position. The case further includes a power circuit board that receives power from a commercial power source and generates the power necessary for the inverter circuit inside the case,
The guide according to any one of claims 8 to 13, wherein the power supply circuit board is disposed on the opposite side of the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan with the cover interposed therebetween. Heating cooker. The case further includes a filter circuit board that receives power from a commercial power supply, and a power supply circuit board that receives power from the filter circuit board and generates the power necessary for the inverter circuit,
The power supply circuit board is disposed on the opposite side of the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan with the cover in between,
The filter circuit board is located adjacent to the power supply circuit board,
13. The electric component mounted on the power supply circuit board and the electric component mounted on the filter circuit board are each located above the first horizontal plane. Induction heating cooker. The induction heating cooker according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the first gap is provided with a partition wall that divides the first air path into two. The induction heating cooker according to any one of claims 8 to 13, wherein the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan have the same shape and the same size. The induction heating cooker according to claim 21, wherein the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan have the same rated specifications. According to any one of claims 8 to 13 and 20 to 22, wherein the rotary blades of the first cooling fan and the rotary blades of the second cooling fan are rotationally driven in the same direction. Induction heating cooker as described. The rotary blade of the first cooling fan is a rotary blade for a centrifugal blower that rotates around a vertical axis,
The first cooling fan includes a flat fan case that accommodates the rotary blade, a motor that rotationally drives the rotary blade, and an air outlet formed on a peripheral wall surface of the fan case,
The induction heating cooker according to claim 8, wherein the motor is housed within a height dimension of the fan case. The rotary blade of the second cooling fan is a rotary blade for a centrifugal blower that rotates around a vertical axis,
The second cooling fan includes a flat fan case that accommodates the rotary blade, a motor that rotationally drives the rotary blade, and an air outlet formed on a peripheral wall surface of the fan case,
The induction heating cooker according to claim 8, wherein the motor is housed within a height dimension of the fan case. The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan each have a circular suction port on a lower surface,
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are arranged at the same height on the bottom wall surface of the case,
The ventilation hole is located directly below the suction port of the first cooling fan and the suction port of the second cooling fan,
14. A diameter of the ventilation hole is larger than a diameter of the suction port of the first cooling fan and the suction port of the second cooling fan, respectively. induction heating cooker. The case further includes an input operation section in the front part for receiving operation input from the user,
The induction heating cooking according to any one of claims 8 to 13, wherein the second cooling fan supplies cooling air different from the second cooling air in order to cool the input operation section. vessel. A first heat sink equipped with one switching element for the inverter circuit, and a second heat sink equipped with another switching element for the inverter circuit,
The first heat sink and the second heat sink are arranged such that their respective radiation fin portions face each other with a first gap in between,
The first heat sink and the second heat sink are provided in one row in front and behind the first air gap in the direction from the upstream side to the downstream side of the first air path, and Both side surfaces viewed in a cross section perpendicular to the traveling direction of the first cooling air and the second cooling air flowing in the air path are sloped surfaces that approach each other toward the upper side,
The induction heating cooker according to claim 8 or 9, wherein the switching element is attached to each of the inclined surfaces. It has a horizontally long and flat case with a top plate on the top on which the heated object is placed.
Inside the case, there are three IH coils corresponding to the three locations on the top plate, first, second, and third inverter circuits that supply high-frequency power to each of these IH coils, and the A first inverter circuit board on which first and second inverter circuits are mounted, a second inverter circuit board on which the third inverter circuit is mounted, and above the IH coil and the first inverter circuit board. A cover that partitions a tunnel-shaped first air path, and two cooling fans that introduce outside air for cooling from the outside of the case,
The first inverter circuit board has a horizontally long rectangular planar shape,
The two cooling fans are a first cooling fan having rotary blades for centrifugal air blowing, and a second cooling fan having rotary blades for centrifugal air blowing,
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are installed near the left wall surface or right wall surface of the case, and each introduces outside air for cooling by rotation of the rotary blade,
The first air path, into which the first cooling air from the first cooling fan and the second cooling air from the second cooling fan are combined, is located above the first inverter circuit board. , extending in a straight line in the left and right direction,
The first cooling air and the second cooling air that have passed through the first air path are discharged to the outside from an exhaust window formed at the rear of the case,
The induction heating cooking device is characterized in that the second inverter circuit board is cooled by cooling air different from the first cooling air blown out from the first cooling fan. The rotor blade of the first cooling fan rotates around a vertical axis,
The rotor blade of the second cooling fan rotates around a vertical axis,
The induction heating cooker according to claim 29, wherein the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are installed with an interval in the front-rear direction. The first inverter circuit board includes a first heat sink equipped with a switching element for the first inverter circuit, a second heat sink equipped with a switching element for the second inverter circuit, and a second heat sink equipped with a switching element for the second inverter circuit. a third heat sink equipped with a switching element for the inverter circuit of No. 3;
The induction device according to claim 29 or 30, wherein the first heat sink and the second heat sink are arranged such that their respective radiation fin portions face each other with a first gap in between. Heating cooker. The air outlet of the first cooling fan is separated from the first heat sink, the second heat sink, and the third heat sink,
The air outlet of the second cooling fan is separated from the first heat sink, the second heat sink, and the third heat sink,
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan direct the first cooling air and the second cooling air toward the first air gap from opposite directions with a straight line crossing the first air gap in between. 32. The induction heating cooker according to claim 31, wherein the induction heating cooker is configured to supply the following ingredients to each other. The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are at a height that is crossed by a first horizontal plane that is at the same height as the top surface of the first inverter circuit board,
At least one of the switching elements is arranged to be included in a height range from a lower end to an upper end of the air outlet of the first cooling fan and the air outlet of the second cooling fan. The induction heating cooker according to claim 32, characterized in that: The three IH coils are located on a second horizontal plane above the first horizontal plane,
34. The induction heating cooker according to claim 33, wherein the ceiling surface of the cover is located below the second horizontal surface. The lower end surface of the exhaust window is above the first horizontal plane,
The induction heating cooker according to claim 34, wherein the upper end surface of the exhaust window is located above the second horizontal plane. The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan each have a circular suction port on a lower surface,
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are arranged at the same height above the bottom wall surface of the case,
Any one of claims 29 to 35, wherein circular ventilation holes are formed in the bottom wall surface of the case, corresponding to the suction ports of the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan. Induction heating cooker described in . The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan each have a circular suction port on a lower surface,
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are arranged at the same height on the bottom wall surface of the case,
circular ventilation holes are formed in the bottom wall surface of the case at positions facing the suction ports of the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan, respectively;
29. The first inverter circuit board and the second inverter circuit board are arranged at a higher position on the bottom wall surface of the case than the lower end surface of the suction port. The induction heating cooker according to any one of 35 to 35. A microcomputer that drives the first inverter circuit and the second inverter circuit is mounted on the first inverter circuit board,
36. The microcomputer is disposed on the first inverter circuit board at a position upstream of the first cooling air or the second cooling air. Induction heating cooker described in . The case further includes a power circuit board that receives power from a commercial power source and generates the power necessary for the first, second, and third inverter circuits, respectively, inside the case,
The guide according to any one of claims 29 to 35, wherein the power supply circuit board is disposed on the opposite side of the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan with the cover interposed therebetween. Heating cooker. Inside the case, there is a filter circuit board that receives power from a commercial power supply, and a filter circuit board that receives power from the filter circuit board to generate power necessary for the first inverter circuit board and the second inverter circuit board. further comprising a power supply circuit board,
The power supply circuit board is disposed on the opposite side of the first cooling fan and the second cooling fan with the cover in between,
The filter circuit board is located adjacent to the power supply circuit board,
Any one of claims 33 to 35, wherein the electrical components mounted on the power supply circuit board and the electrical components mounted on the filter circuit board are respectively located on the first horizontal plane. Induction heating cooker described in . The case further includes an input operation section in the front part of the case that receives operation input from the user,
The induction heating according to any one of claims 29 to 35, wherein the second cooling fan supplies cooling air different from the second cooling air in order to cool the input operation section. Cooking device. further comprising a first heat sink equipped with a switching element for the first inverter circuit, and a second heat sink equipped with a switching element for the second inverter circuit,
The first heat sink and the second heat sink are arranged such that their respective radiation fin portions face each other with a first gap in between,
The first heat sink and the second heat sink are provided in front and behind the first air gap in the direction from the upstream side to the downstream side of the first air path, respectively,
The first heat sink and the second heat sink have an upwardly extending surface on both sides when viewed in a cross section perpendicular to the traveling direction of the first cooling air and the second cooling air flowing through the first air path. They form sloping surfaces that get closer to each other as they go.
A switching element constituting the first inverter circuit and a switching element constituting the second inverter circuit are attached to the inclined surfaces of the first heat sink and the second heat sink, respectively. The induction heating cooker according to claim 29. The top of the main case has a top plate that is exposed to the top of the kitchen furniture.
The main case includes a horizontally long and flat upper case that includes the top plate at the top, and a box-shaped lower case that is connected to the lower part of the upper case and has a heating chamber inside. have,
The lower case includes a door for freely opening and closing the front opening of the heating chamber, a microwave heating source for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber, and a door for cooling a heat radiation part of the microwave heating source. A lower air passage through which outside air is introduced,
Inside the upper case, there are a plurality of IH coils and two inverter circuits that supply high-frequency power to each of the IH coils, corresponding to the two induction heating parts designated on the top plate. an inverter circuit board on which each of the inverter circuits is mounted; a cover installed between the IH coil and the inverter circuit board and defining a first air path between them; Equipped with two cooling fans that introduce outside air for cooling from the outside,
The inverter circuit board has a horizontally long rectangular planar shape,
The two cooling fans are a first cooling fan having rotary blades for centrifugal air blowing, and a second cooling fan having rotary blades for centrifugal air blowing,
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are installed near the left side wall or the right side wall of the upper case, and the rotation of the rotor allows cooling air to flow through the ventilation hole formed at the bottom of the upper case. It introduces air respectively,
The first air passage in which the first cooling air from the first cooling fan and the second cooling air from the second cooling fan are combined and introduced is arranged above the inverter circuit board in the left-right direction. It extends in a straight line,
The first cooling air and the second cooling air that have passed through the first air path are discharged to the outside from an exhaust window formed at the rear of the upper case,
An outlet side end portion of the lower air passage is disposed in a third gap formed in the rear part of the upper case,
The built-in type is characterized in that the cooling air after cooling the heat dissipation section is guided to the third gap without passing through the space through which the first cooling air and the second cooling air flow. Composite heating cooker. An intake port formed in the upper case for introducing outside air into the interior of the upper case for the first air path and an intake port formed in the lower case for the lower air path are 44. The built-in composite heating cooker according to claim 43, wherein the built-in composite heating cooker is disposed on opposite sides of the chamber. 45. The built-in composite heating cooker according to claim 44, wherein the intake port formed in the upper case communicates with the outside without passing through the internal space of the lower case. 45. The built-in composite heating cooker according to claim 43 or 44, further comprising an oven heat source for heating the heating chamber inside the lower case. 47. The built-in complex heating according to claim 46, wherein the oven heat source is a heat source that heats the food to be cooked with radiant heat, and heats a wall surface of the heating chamber from at least an outside of the heating chamber. Cooking device. The upper case further includes an input operation section in the front part that receives user operation input,
The input operation section includes a control device that controls energization of the inverter circuit board, energization of the microwave heating source, and energization of the oven heating source, and a display means that displays the cooking operation. ,
48. The built-in complex heating cooker according to claim 46 or 47, wherein the second cooling fan supplies cooling air different from the second cooling air in order to cool the input operation section. Inside the main case, there is a heating chamber whose front opening is openable and closed by a door, a microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber, and a heating object placed above the top plate. an induction heating source;
The interior of the main body case is divided into two spaces, an upper space and a lower space,
The upper space includes an IH coil of the induction heating source, an inverter circuit board for the IH coil, an IH control unit that controls induction heating, a filter circuit board, and a power supply circuit that receives power from the filter circuit board. containing a substrate;
The lower space accommodates the microwave heating source, an oven heating source, and a control device that controls both the microwave heating source and the oven heating source,
The inverter circuit board, the microwave heating source, and the oven heating source are supplied with power from the power supply circuit board,
The upper space has an upper cooling fan that introduces outside air for cooling the inverter circuit board and the power supply circuit board,
The lower space has a lower cooling fan that introduces outside air for cooling the heat radiation part of the microwave heating source,
The inverter circuit board is installed horizontally at the bottom of the upper space, and a flat first air path is defined above the inverter circuit board,
The upper cooling fan includes a first cooling fan having a rotor blade that rotates around a vertical axis, and a rotor blade that is located adjacent to the first cooling fan and rotates around a vertical axis. a second cooling fan;
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are arranged adjacent to the inlet side of the first air path,
The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan are operated when any one of the induction heating source, the microwave heating source, and the oven heating source is operated for heating, and the lower cooling fan is configured to: A built-in complex heating cooker, which is operated when the microwave heating source is in heating operation. The upper space has an upper air passage through which outside air is introduced by the upper cooling fan from a vent communicating with the outside of the lower space without passing through the lower space,
The lower space has a lower air passage through which outside air is introduced by the lower cooling fan from the intake port at the lower part of the main body case,
50. The built-in composite device according to claim 49, wherein the upper air passage and the lower air passage communicate with the outside through an exhaust port provided at the upper part of the main body case without intersecting in the middle. Type heating cooker. The upper space further includes an input operation section that accepts a user's operation; the input operation section includes a menu selection section;
(1) specifying the microwave heating source using the menu selection section and operating the lower cooling fan and the upper cooling fan during the period when microwave heating cooking is being performed;
(2) specifying the oven heat source using the menu selection section and operating the lower cooling fan and the upper cooling fan during the period when oven heating cooking is being performed;
(3) During the period when the microwave heating source and the oven heating source are specified by the menu selection section and these heating sources are automatically switched in sequence to execute one control menu, the lower cooling fan and operating the upper cooling fan,
(4) specifying the induction heating source using the input operation unit and operating the upper cooling fan and not operating the lower cooling fan during a period when induction heating cooking is being performed;
The built-in complex heating cooker according to claim 49 or 50. The first air path is formed in a tunnel shape by a cover that continuously covers from above to both sides of the inverter circuit board,
Inside the first air path, a pair of heat sinks having heat dissipation fins facing each other with a first air gap formed therein, and a heat-generating electronic device that constitutes the inverter circuit and are attached to the heat sinks are provided. The built-in complex heating cooker according to any one of claims 49 to 51, characterized in that a component is arranged. The first cooling fan and the second cooling fan have a flat air outlet on a peripheral surface of a flat fan case,
The air outlet of the first cooling fan and the air outlet of the second cooling fan are arranged at positions where a first horizontal plane that is at the same height as the top surface of the inverter circuit board intersects, respectively. The built-in complex heating cooker according to any one of claims 49 to 52 . The main case is constructed by connecting a flat upper case made of metal with a bottom wall surface and a lower case made of metal placed below the upper case,
The built-in complex heating cooker according to any one of claims 49 to 52, characterized in that the height of the side wall surface inserted into the installation opening of the kitchen furniture is 40 mm or less. The height dimension of the first air passage is 21 mm or less,
The air outlet of the first cooling fan and the air outlet of the second cooling fan have a flat rectangular longitudinal cross-sectional shape, and the effective height inside the air outlet is 20 mm to 25 mm,
55. The air outlet of the first cooling fan and the air outlet of the second cooling fan are installed in close contact with or in close proximity to the bottom wall surface of the upper case. Built-in complex heating cooker. The cover is made of plastic or non-magnetic metal,
53. The built-in composite heating cooker according to claim 52, wherein a gap is formed above the cover and between the IH coil or a coil base that supports the IH coil. It has an installation port on the top surface, and the built-in complex heating cooker according to claim 43 or 49 is installed in the installation port,
A right side gap and a left side gap formed between the side wall surface of the main body case and a lower gap formed between the bottom wall surface of the main body case communicate with the outside through a front gap formed below the door. Kitchen furniture characterized by:

Images